D. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for correcting all defective work discovered prior to final acceptance of the Contract, despite the failure of the Inspector(s) to discover it.
1.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for scheduling all inspections and tests required.
1. The ENGINEER shall be given a minimum 48 business hours notice prior to any inspections or tests.
B. With the exception of the special inspections noted above to be paid for by the CITY; the CONTRACTOR shall pay for all tests, inspections and special inspections including, but not limited to:
1. Standard inspections and tests necessary to comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of public authorities pursuant to General Conditions.
2. Concrete and CLSM compressive strength tests for trial batch mix designs.
3. Tests of materials, inspections, and certifications required by the Specifications.
4. Testing, adjusting, and balancing o f equipment and systems required by the Specifications.
5. One tension and elongation test for each 5 tons of steel or fractional part thereof for each size will be required, unless the steel can be identified by heat or melt numbers and is accompanied by mill analysis and test reports. Commercial stock may be used, subject to approval of the ENGINEER.
6. Any testing performed by the CONTRACTOR for their own quality control.
7. All compaction testing, moisture testing, field testing of CLSM for backfill placement, geotechnical observations, and all certifications necessary to comply with the specifications.
01 45 03-3
Quality Control
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
8. Retests or re-inspections by the CITY, if required, and tests or inspections required due to CONTRACTOR error or lack of required identifications of material.
9. Any and all water used by the CONTRACTOR in any testing.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for scheduling all tests and inspections pertaining to soils which includes all items covered by 31 05 03 Earthwork. CONTRACTOR shall hire a third party accredited laboratory and geotechnical consultant for approval by CITY a minimum of 30 days in advance of using the laboratory or geotechnical consultant.
D. Two copies of the agency or laboratory report of each test or inspection shall be provided to the ENGINEER. All tests of materials shall be made in accordance with the commonly recognized standards of national technical organizations, and such other special methods and tests as are prescribed in the Contract Documents. Hardcopies of soils testing daily reports shall be provided to the ENGINEER before close of business the day tests are completed.
E. Purchase Orders:
1. One copy of each of the CONTRACTOR's purchase orders for materials forming a portion of the work shall be furnished to the ENGINEER, if requested.
2. Each such purchase order shall contain a statement that the materials included in the order are subject to inspection by the CITY.
3. Materials purchased locally will be inspected at the point of manufacture or supply, and materials supplied from points more than 50 miles from the job site will be inspected upon arrival at the job, except when other inspection requirements are provided for specific materials in other Sections of this Specification.
F. Samples:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples of materials as are require d by the ENGINEER, without charge.
2. No material shall be used until the ENGINEER has had the opportunity to test or examine such materials.
3. Samples will be secured and tested whenever necessary to determine the quality of the material.
4. Samples and test specimens prepared at the job site, such as concrete test cylinders, shall be taken or prepared by the ENGINEER in the presence and with the assistance of the CONTRACTOR.
1.4 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTOR
A. Inspectors employed by the CITY shall be authorized to inspect all work done and materials and equipment furnished to complement the CONTRACTOR furnished independent inspector.
1. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the Work, and to the preparation, fabrication, or manufacture of the materials and equipment to be used.
2. The Inspector will not alter or waive the provisions of the Contract Documents.
3. The Inspector will keep the ENGINEER informed as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being done.
4. The Inspector will call the CONTRACTOR's attention to nonconformance with the Contract Documents that the Inspector may have observed.
5. The Inspector will not be responsible for the adequacy or correctness of the CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for construction.
01 45 03-4
Quality Control
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
6. The Inspector will not approve or accept any portion of the work, issue instructions contrary to the Contract Documents, or act as foreman for the CONTRACTOR.
7. The Inspector may reject defective materials, equipment, or work when it is not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
8. The Inspector will not be responsible for:
a. The CONTRACTOR's quality control program.
b. The CONTRACTOR's safety program.
c. Coordinating the work or activities of the CONTRACTOR or their Subcontractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01 51 03-1
Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 01 51 03
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACTOR'S STAGING AREA AND WORK ACCESS PLAN
A. The CONTRACTOR shall limit the location of the storage of equipment and materials to the staging area(s) designated on the Drawings and as directed by the ENGINEER.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall make their own arrangements for additional space that may be required and shall bear all associated costs.
C. Work Access Plan: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a work access plan showing the planned access route for deliveries of supplies and mobiliz ation of work force for ENGINEER's approval prior to mobilization.
D. On-Site Project Office:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain near the work in progress a suitable office or other protected area in which shall be kept project copies of the Contract Documents, project progress records, project schedule, shop drawings and other relevant documents which shall be accessible to the OWNER and ENGINEER during normal working hours.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall make their own arrangements for additional space that may be required and bear all associated costs.
E. Temporary Facilities Plan:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall su bmit to the ENGINEER for approval, as part of the mobilization effort, the proposed plan and layout for all temporary offices, sanitary facilities, temporary construction roads, storage buildings, storage yards, temporary water service and distributio n, temporary telephone and temporary power service and distribution.
2. The plan shall show all temporary fencing and gates and all proposed access to the work areas.
3. Prior to the removal of existing fence, the CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary security fencing at least equal to the existing chain link and barbed wire fencing to protect the existing facilities and structures.
F. Access Roads:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall "winterize" and maintain all access roads at all times to provide a driving surface satisfactory for 2-wheel drive low clearance vehicular traffic.
2. The roads shall be gravel surfaced, smooth, and free from humps and depressions.
3. Contractor shall perform dust control on all access roads.
4. All costs of complying with this requirement shall be included in the lump sum bid.
1.2 STORAGE - GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide any temporary storage required for the protection of equipment and materials as recommended by manufacturers of such materials.
01 51 03-2
Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1.3 STORAGE BUILDINGS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall erect or provide temporary storage buildings of the various sizes as required for the protection of mechanical and electrical equipment and materials as recommended by manufacturers of such equipment and materials.
B. The buildings shall be provided with such envi ronmental control systems that meet recommendations of manufacturers of all equipment and materials stored in the buildings.
C. The buildings shall be of sufficient size and so arranged or partitioned to provide security for their contents and provide ready access for inspection and inventory.
D. At or near the completion of the work, and as directed by the ENGINEER, the temporary storage buildings shall be dismantled, removed from the site, and remain the property of the CONTRACTOR.
E. Combustible materials (paints, solvents, fuels, etc.) shall be safely stored and separated in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and in compliance with hazardous material storage requirements. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing proper storage buildings for combustible materials.
1.4 STORAGE YARDS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary storage yards as required for the storage of materials that are not subject to damage by weather conditions.
B. Materials such as pipe, reinforcing and structural steel, shall be stored o n pallets or racks, off the ground, and stored in a manner to allow ready access for inspection and inventory.
C. Temporary gravel surfacing of the storage yards shall meet with the approval of the ENGINEER.
1.5 PARKING AREAS
A. Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with public traffic or parking, access by emergency vehicles, CITY’s operations, or construction operations.
1.6 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC
A. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding closing or restricting use of public streets or highways. No public or p rivate road sha ll be closed, except by written permission of proper authority. Assure the least possible obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits.
B. Conduct the Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian.
C. Whenever i t is necessary to cross, close, or obstruct roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for accommodation of public and private travel.
01 51 03-3
Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1.7 DELIVERY-STORAGE-HANDLING
A. General:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver, handle, and store materials and equipment in accordance with supplier's written recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft.
2. Delivery schedules shall be controlled to minimize long-term storage at the site and overcrowding of construction spaces.
3. In particular, the CONTRACTOR shall provide delivery/ installation coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage for material or equi pment recogn ized to b e flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss.
B. Transportation and Handling:
1. Materials and equipment shall be transported by methods to avoid damage and shall be delivered in dry , undamaged condition in supplier's unopened containers or packaging.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment and personnel to handle the materials, and equipment by methods that will prevent soiling and damage.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide additional prote ction during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging packaging, and surrounding surfaces.
C. Storage and Protection:
1. Materials and equipment shall be stored in accordance with supplier's written instructions, with seals and labels intact and legibl e. Exposed metal surf aces of valves, fittings and similar materials shall be coated with grease in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent corrosion. Sensitive materials and equipment shall be stored in weather-tight enclosures and temperature and humidity ranges shall be maintained within tolerances required by supplier's written instructions.
2. For exterior storage of fabricated materials, they shall be placed on sloped support above ground. Materials or equipment subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious sheet covering; ventilation shall be provided to avoid condensation.
3. Loose granular materials shall be stored on solid surfaces in a well-drained area and shall be prevented from mixing with foreign matter.
4. Inspection:
a. Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. b. The CONTRACTOR shall periodically inspect to assure materials and equipment are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.
5. Storage shall be arranged in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items.
1.8 PROJECT SECURITY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall make adequate provision for the protection of the work area against fire, theft and vandalism, and for the protection of the public and CITY personnel against exposure to injury, and for the security of any off-site storage areas.
B. All costs for this protection shall be included within the CONTRACTOR's bid.
01 51 03-4
Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1.9 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all necessary temporary telephones, fuel, power, potable water, sanitary, and proper toilet accommodations. CONTRACTOR shall not use CITY-owned utilities except for potable water. CITY will work with CONTRACTOR to provide potable water free of charge. The CONTRACTOR, however, shall be required to furnish and lay such pipe and/or provide such other means as may be necessary and/or incidental to the delivery of water at such point or points of use and at such pressure as may be necessary. No additional compensation will be made therefore. Contractor shall not use quick acting valves which might create surges.
B. The temporary facilities to be provided by the CONTRACTOR as described above shall conform to all requirements in regard to operation, safety, and fire hazards of State and local authorities and of Underwriters.
C. CONTRACTOR shall ret urn the site and facil ities to their original " pre-construction" condition, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, at the completion of the project.
1.10 SOUND CONTROL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall comp ly with all local sound control and noise level rules , regulations and ordinances which apply to any work performed pursuant to the contract.
B. Each internal combustion engine, used for any purpose on the job or related to the job, shall be equipped with a muffler of a type recommended by the manufacturer, so as to produce a maximum noise level of 85 dBA at 5 feet.
C. No internal combustion engine shall be operated on the project without said muffler.
D. Special Precautions for Inhabited Areas:
1. In inhabited areas, particularly residential, operations shall be performed in a manner to minimize unnecessary noise generation.
2. In residential areas, special measures shall be taken to suppress noise generated by repair and service activities during the night hours.
1.11 DUST/AIR POLLUTION CONTROL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all Federal, State and local regulatory requirements with respect to air pollution prevention.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall take whatever steps, procedures, or means as are required to prevent dust conditions being caused by operations in connection with the execution of the Work; and on any road which the CONTRACTOR or any of their Subcontractors are using, excavation or fill areas, demolition operations, or other activities.
C. Control shall be by sprinkling, use of dust palliatives, modification of operations, or any other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction.
D. Damage to personal property, etc., resulting from the CONTRACTOR's construction operations shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the CITY.
01 51 03-5
Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
E. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the streets and work area clean at all times by means of mechanical sweepers or hand sweeping. Water will be used for dust control only, and not for cleaning streets.
F. Burning of waste, rubbish, or other debris will not be permitted on or adjacent to site.
1.12 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris and shall make necessary arrangements for such disposal. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain written permission from property owne r prior to disposing surplus materials, waste products, or debris on private property.
B. All waste disposal shall be done in accordance with applicable laws and regulations.
C. Landfill Disposal:
1. If the CONTRACTOR proposes to dispose of construction debris, tre nch spoils, excavation spoils, etc., at a landfill, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide and pay for all permits and analyses required by the landfill.
2. If the analyses determine that the material is hazardous, then an equitable adjustment of the Contract for the cost of hazardous waste disposal will be made in accordance with the General Conditions, and the following:
a. Time extension or contract costs will not be granted for delays that could have been avoided by the CONTRACTOR redirecting their forces and equipment to perform other work on the contract.
D. Ditches, washes, or drainageways shall not be filled.
E. Disposal operations shall not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances.
F. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the disposal site in a condition of good appearance and safety during the construction period.
G. Prior to final acceptance of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall have completed the leveling and cleanup of the disposal site.
1.13 CLEAN UP
A. Throughout the period of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the work site free and clean of all rubbish and debris, an d shall promptly remove from the si te, or from property adjacent to the site of the work, all unused and rejected materials, surplus earth, concrete, plaster, and debris.
B. Upon completion of the work, and prior to final acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall remove from the vicinity of the work all plant, surplus material, and equipment belonging to the CONTRACTOR or used under their direction during construction.
1.14 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. When sandblasting, spray pa inting, spraying of insulation, or other activities inconveniencing or dangerous to prop erty or the health of employees, the public or
01 51 03-6
Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
construction workers, are in progress, the area of activity shall be enclosed adequately to contain the dust, over spray, or other hazard.
B. In the event there are no permane nt enclosures of t he area, or such en closures are incomplete or inadequate, the CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable temporary enclosures as required by the ENGINEER to meet field conditions in accordance w ith the recommendations of the owner -furnished equip ment supplier (if applicable) and the CONTRACTOR's equipment supplier requirements.
C. Said temporary or permanent enclosures shall be adequately ventilated to ensure the safety of the workers.
1.15 DRAINAGE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary actions as req uired to meet discha rge requirements of the State of California and other pertinent local ordinances and regulations pertaining to dewatering and/or site drainage discharged into storm drains and creeks. This may include, but may not be limited to, the use of retention basins and silt basins to settle most of the solids prior to discharge.
B. In excavation, fill, and grading operations, care shall be taken to disturb the pre-existing drainage pattern as little as possible.
C. Particular care shall be taken not to direct drainage water onto private property or into streets or drainageways inadequate for the increased flow.
D. Drainage means shall be provided to protect the work.
1.16 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary lighting in all work areas sufficient to maintain a lighting level during working hours not less than the lighting level required by OSHA standards.
1.17 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
A. Construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities shall be of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move the loads to which they will be subjected. Railings, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by law or for adequate protection of life and property shall be provided.
B. Temporary supports shall be designed with an adequate safety factor to assure adequate load bearing capability. Whenever required by safety regulations, the CONTRACTOR shall submit design calculations for staging and shoring prior to application of loads.
1.18 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
A. At such time or times as any temporary construction facilities and utilities are no longer required for the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of their intent and schedule for removal of the temporary facilities and utilities, and obtain the ENGINEER's approval before removing the same.
01 51 03-7
Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. As approved, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the temporary facilities and utilities from the site as CONTRACTOR’s property and leave the site in such condition as specified, as directed by the ENGINEER, and/or as shown on the Drawings.
C. In unfinished areas, such as planted medians, the condition of the site shall be left in a condition that will restore original drainage, evenly graded, seeded or planted as necessary, and left with an appearance equal to, or better than original.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01 51 03-8
Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01 57 03-1
Sewer Bypass Pumping
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 01 57 03
SEWER BYPASS PUMPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Scope: This Section covers temporary bypass pumping requirements, required of the CONTRACTOR, that shall apply during construction, including but not limited to furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, power, maintenance, etc. to implement a temporary pumping system for the purpose of diverting the existing sanitary sewer flow around the work area for the duration necessary to complete the work.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall inform all Subcontractors and manufacturers of the requirements herein and include the required services in their costs for the work specified in these Contract Documents.
C. The design, installation and successful operation of the temporary pumping system shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
D. The bypass system shall be designed, installed and operated by the CONTRACTOR to prevent any and all leakage or discharge of sewage to the environment. If a sewage leak or discharge occurs, CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the remedy of the leak, containment and clean-up of the discharge, as well as responsible for any direct or consequential damages, including fines, that are associated with the leak.
E. Scheduling:
1. Temporary bypass pumping is requisite to satisfactory completion of the Contract and, therefore, shall be completed within the contract time.
2. All temporary bypass pumping activities shall be realistically allowed for and shown on the CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule.
3. Schedule and perform work in a manner that does not cause or contribute to sanitary sewer overflows, releases or spills of sewage from surrounding collection system or bypass system.
4. All temporary bypass pumping shall be scheduled in conformance with the restrictions specified in Section 01 14 03, Special Project Constraints.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Bypass Pumping Plan:
1. Not less than 1 month prior to CONTRACTOR’s intended start of temporary bypass pumping, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed Temporary Bypass Pumping Plan for each of the pipeline segment replacements and pump station improvements that require bypass pumping per the Drawings to the ENGINEER for review. 01 57 03-2
Sewer Bypass Pumping
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Temporary Bypass Pumping shall not commence without written approval of the plan from the ENGINEER.
3. The Temporary Bypass Pumping Plan (for each separate area of work) shall include:
a. Detailed description of the Temporary Bypass Pumping Plan, including a drawing identifying suction manholes, suction piping, high-level alarm float switch locations/elevations, pumps, discharge piping, and discharge connection details. b. Description of sewer plugging method and types and location of plugs. c. Number, size, material, location and method of installation of suction piping. d. Number, size, material, location and method of installation of discharge piping e. Bypass pump information, including make, model, size, curves with operating range clearly delineated, number of each size to be on site and power requirements.
f. Description of backup pump, power and piping equipment. g. Calculations for static lift, flow velocity, friction and fittings losses. h. Power generator size, location, fueling plan.
i. Method of protecting discharge manholes or structures from erosion and damage.
j. Thrust and restraint block sizes and locations.
k. Any temporary pipe supports and anchoring required.
l. Method of crossing streets while maintaining traffic flow requirements. m. Schedule for installation and maintenance of bypass pumps and piping. n. Startup, leakage and pressure testing plan:
1) Testing shall be conducted using clean water
2) ENGINEER shall be notified a minimum of 24 hours prior to testing. o. Identification of any coordination required with the CITY’s staff. p. Plan for monitoring upstream manholes for backup impacts. q. Procedures for setup and breakdown of pumping operations. r. System Monitoring Plan
s. Emergency Response Procedures:
1) Provide detailed emergency procedures to be followed in event of pump failures, sewer overflows, service backups, and sewage spillage. 2) Maintain copy of emergency procedures on site for duration of project. 3) Include emergency contact numbers for CITY and CONTRACTOR personnel. 4) Provide emergency contact hierarchy for day and night operations. 5) Provide spill reporting procedures.
6) List all containment and clean up equipment and supplies to be on site and available at all times.
7) Provide detailed procedures for spill containment and cleanup. t. Proposed use of vactor trucks
u. Valve/piping system plan for removable bypass piping sections PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All bypass piping shall be fusion bonded High Density Polyethylene.
B. Discharge piping diameter: velocity not to exceed 5 feet per second 01 57 03-3
Sewer Bypass Pumping
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Suction piping diameter: Determined according to pump size, flow calculations, and manhole depth following manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.
D. High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe:
1. High density solid wall and following ASTM F714 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-DR) based on Outside Diameter, ASTM D1248 and ASTM D3550.
2. Homogenous throughout, free of visible cracks, discoloration, pitting, varying wall thickness, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults.
3. Defective areas of pipe: Cut out and joint fused as stated herein.
4. Assembled and joined at site using couplings, flanges or butt-fusion method to provide leak proof joint. Follow manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM D 2657.
Threaded or solvent joints and connections will not be permitted. a. Fusing: By personnel certified as fusion technicians by manufacturer of HDPE pipe and/or fusing equipment.
b. Butt-fused joint: True alignment and uniform roll-back beads resulting from use of proper temperature and pressure.
c. Allow adequate cooling time before removal of pressure. d. Watertight and have tensile strength equal to that of pipe.
5. Flexible Hoses and Associated Couplings and Connectors:
a. Abrasion resistant.
b. Suitable for intended service.
c. Rated for external and internal loads anticipated, including test pressure. 1) External loading design: Incorporate anticipated traffic loadings, including traffic impact loading.
d. When subject to traffic loading, compose system, such as traffic ramps or covers.
1) Install system and maintain HS-20-44 loading requirements while in use or as directed by the ENGINEER.
E. Valves and Fittings:
1. Provide all valves and fittings necessary to operate the Bypass Pumping System and to enable quick adjustments or modifications to the system, such as pump switchout.
2. Selection shall be appropriate for raw municipal wastewater and shall be based on flow calculations and system operating pressures.
3. At minimum, the following valves shall be provided:
a. Check valves on the discharge of each pump
b. Isolation valves that enable either the duty or the standby pump to be brought online or taken offline without delay.
4. Cam Lock or quick release fittings shall not be allowed.
5. Where a removable bypass piping section is proposed, CONTRACTOR shall provide valve/piping system to allow for removal of bypass piping section in intersection of roadway. CONTRACTOR shall submit a plan for the valve/piping system and gain approval from ENGINEER/CITY prior to implementation.
F. Plugs: Selected and installed according to size of line to be plugged, pipe and manhole configurations, and based on specific site.
1. Plugs shall be inspected for defects prior to use
2. Provide redundant plugs available in the event a plug fails 01 57 03-4
Sewer Bypass Pumping
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
G. Aluminum irrigation piping or glued PVC piping will not be permitted.
H. Discharge hose will only be allowed in short sections when approved by ENGINEER.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Pumps: Provide fully automatic self-priming units that do not require foot-valves or vacuum pumps for priming.
1. Leak proof design.
2. Capable of passing minimum 2” diameter solids.
3. Pumps shall have minimum 4” suction and discharge connections.
4. Electric or diesel powered. CONTRACTOR shall provide generator if electric powered, no electric service shall be assumed to be available at the work sites.
5. Able to run dry without damage.
6. Provide start/stop controls for each pump, complete with visual and auditory alarming systems.
7. Provide a high-level alarm float switch near the suction of the bypass pumping system that when activated will indicate the pumping system is not keeping pace with influent sewage flows.
8. Provide noise attenuation system for pumps producing noise louder than 60 dBA at 30 feet from pump. Provide similar noise attenuation for all generators used.
9. Bypass System Capacity:
Bypass system shall have sufficient capacity to pump the peak anticipated sewer flows at each bypass point. Peak anticipated sewer flows at each bypass point are as follows: 350 gpm maximum if work is done prior to PS 26 pump installation; 900 gpm maximum if work is done after PS 26 pump installation. 1) Work Zone 1: Existing 10” line (parallel to Sierra College Boulevard) 2) Work Zone 2: Existing 8” line (parallel to Sierra College Boulevard) 3) Work Zone 3: Existing 8” line (intersection of East Roseville Parkway and Sierra College Boulevard)
4) Work Zone 4: Existing 10” line (parallel to Sierra College Boulevard) 5) Work Zone 5: Existing 10” line (parallel to Sierra College Boulevard) 6) PS #26:
a) Existing 10” line (perpendicular to Sierra College Boulevard) b) Removal and replacement of existing pumps
10. Standby Equipment:
a. Provide a minimum of one full capacity standby pump for each size maintained on site. A minimum of one standby pump shall be provided for up to two duty pumps and a minimum of two standby pumps shall be provided for three or more duty pumps.
b. Standby pump shall be maintained online, isolated from duty pump by a valve. c. A sufficient number of valves, tees, elbows, connections, tools, piping, and other parts of the system hardware for the different pipe sizes as needed, shall be on site and readily available to ensure immediate repair or modifications of any part of the system as necessary.
d. If the pumps are electrical, a standby generator shall be provided on site at all times.
01 57 03-5
Sewer Bypass Pumping
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Raw sewage is prohibited from entering any drain inlets, storm drain manholes, or other outlets that flow into a stream, creek, river, or other waterway. Raw sewage shall not leave the sewer collection system.
B. Bypass pumping and/or diversion shall be provided as required for acceptable completion of the sewer mainline replacement via open cut and pipe bursting methods as well as the improvements to City of Roseville Pump Station #26.
C. Bypass pumping shall be done in such a manner as not to damage public or private property or create a nuisance or health menace.
D. Bypass pumping shall adhere to CITY easement boundaries and encroachment permits.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall be liable for all cleanup, damage, and/or resultant fines in the event of a sewage spill. After the Work is completed, flow shall be returned to the rehabilitated sewer and all temporary equipment removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
A. Provisions and requirements must be approved by ENGINEER before implementation.
B. CITY and ENGINEER shall be notified of the schedule and present during installation of Bypass Pumping system.
C. Access manholes or make connections to existing sewer and construct temporary bypass pumping structures at access locations indicated on ENGINEER approved Drawings.
D. Plugging or blocking of sewage flows shall incorporate a primary and secondary plugging device. When plugging or blocking is no longer needed for performance and acceptance of work, remove in a manner that permits the sewage flow to slowly return to normal without surge, to prevent surcharging or causing other major disturbances downstream.
E. When working inside manholes, follow all OSHA, Local, State and Federal safety requirements. Take required measures to protect workforce against sewer gases and/or combustible or oxygen-deficient atmosphere.
F. Installation, Operation and Removal of Bypass Pipelines:
1. When bypass pipeline crosses local streets and private driveways, place in roadway ramps.
2. When roadway ramps cannot be used, place bypass in trenches and cover with temporary pavement as approved by ENGINEER.
3. Prior to any excavation required, CONTRACTOR shall locate all utilities in the proposed area and notify the ENGINEER of any potential conflicts. 01 57 03-6
Sewer Bypass Pumping
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
4. During bypass pumping operation, protect sewer lines from damage inflicted by equipment.
5. Upon completion of bypass pumping operations, and after the receipt of written permission from ENGINEER, remove piping, restore property to pre-construction condition and restore pavement. Bypass pipeline shall be flushed with potable water prior to removal to prevent spillage of sewage to the environment.
3.3 INITIAL TESTING
A. Pressure testing of the bypass pipeline shall be conducted and witnessed by the ENGINEER prior to initial testing. Pressure testing shall be with potable water. The provision of potable water for testing shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
B. An initial test of the complete bypass pumping system shall be conducted in the presence of the ENGINEER, using potable water. The provision of potable water for testing shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
C. Pumps shall be shown to be capable of self-priming after a loss of prime, with a minimum reprime lift greater than the suction lift that will be required during normal operation.
D. Suction pipe configuration for reprime test shall incorporate a 2 feet minimum horizontal run, a 90o elbow and vertical run at the minimum specified lift. Pipe size shall be equal to the pump suction diameter.
E. Repeatability of performance shall be demonstrated by testing three consecutive reprime cycles. Full pump capacity (flow) shall be achieved within five minutes during each cycle. No water should be discharged from the priming system to the environment during priming or operation.
3.4 OPERATION OF THE BYPASS SYSTEM
A. CONTRACTOR shall have sole responsibility for the operation of the bypass system.
Neither CITY nor ENGINEER personnel shall be involved in bypass system operation in any way.
1. System monitoring:
a. CONTRACTOR shall supply personnel dedicated to the monitoring and maintenance of the bypass system full time during all hours that the system is operated (24 hours per day where applicable).
b. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for monitoring bypass pumping operations using CONTRACTOR personnel who are on site performing other functions.
Bypass pumping operations shall be monitored, including examination of the entire length of the bypass pipeline at least once every 2 hours during operating hours to confirm that all systems are fully functional, not leaking, and in good condition. CONTRACTOR shall repair any leaks discovered immediately.
3.5 USE OF VACTOR TRUCKS
A. CONTRACTOR may use sewer plugging and vactor trucks to bypass low flows as indicated on the Drawings or proposed by the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall 01 57 03-7
Sewer Bypass Pumping
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
confirm and estimate the peak flow rate to be pumped out to confirm pumping with a vactor truck is feasible as opposed to bypass pumping.
B. When plugging sewer lines, contractor shall regularly monitor upstream manholes for surcharging and pump out the manhole and sewer lines as frequently as required.
C. CONTRACTOR may discharge pumped flow into a nearby downstream manhole at a rate which does not cause surcharge in the downstream sewer.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01 61 03-1
General Product Requirements
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 01 61 03
GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All products furnished and installed under this contract shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this Section except as otherwise specified in other Sections.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all details of the products and equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in the Work required to accommodate products or equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Contract Drawings or Specifications.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Where CONTRACTOR design is specified, design and installation of systems, equipment, and components, including supports and anchorage, shall be in accordance with provisions of 2019 edition of the California Building Code (CBC).
1. Basic Wind Speed: 105 mph, Exposure C.
2. Seismic:
a. SS (maximum short-term spectral response acceleration) = 0.426 b. S1 (maximum 1-second spectral response acceleration) = 0.216 c. SDS (design short-term spectral response acceleration) = 0.414 d. SD1 (design 1-second spectral response acceleration) = 0.312 e. Ie (Seismic Importance Factor) = 1.5
f. Risk Category = IV
3. Maximum Rain Intensity: 2.22-inches/hour (15 min precipitation intensity) B. Proof of Compliance:
1. Structural integrity and anchorage shall be certified by an approved calculation that demonstrates the adequacy of the anchorage system for seismic forces. This calculation may be based on principles of structural analysis and engineering mechanics, or based on similarity to approved shake-table tests.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for review and approval test data or calculations certified by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of California to show compliance with the above requirements.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Altitude: Provide materials and equipment suitable for installation and operation under rated conditions at 100 feet above sea level.
01 61 03-2
General Product Requirements
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. Provide equipment and devices installed outdoors or in unheated enclosures capable of continuous operation within an ambient temperature range of 15 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
1.5 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.
B. All equipment shall be designed, f abricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts o f duplica te units shall be interchangeable.
Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.
C. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick.
D. Except where otherwise specified, all metal which will be exposed to weather, submerged or otherwise exposed to moisture shall be either non -ferrous or stainless steel, as the application may require.
1.6 LUBRICATION
A. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems wh ich require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants.
B. Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by CITY. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, the use of synthetic lubricants will not be acceptable.
C. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Drains shall allow for convenient collection of waste oil in containers from the nor mal operating area or platform without removing the unit from its normal installed position.
1.7 ELECTRIC MOTORS
A. Unless otherwise specified, motors furnished with equipment shall meet the following requirements:
1. Designed and applied in accordance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, AFBMA, and NEC for the duty service imposed by the driven equipment, such as frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment.
2. Premium efficiency rated.
3. Rated for continuous duty at 40-degrees Celsius ambient, unless the application is well recognized for intermittent duty service as a standard industry practice.
01 61 03-3
General Product Requirements
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
4. Insulated with Class F insulation and designed for a service factor of 1.15, or greater.
5. Three phase motors used in conjunction with variable speed drives shall have Class F insulation with a Class B temperature rise at rated nameplate horsepower, and 1.15 service factor.
6. When operating at service factor load, maximum observable temperature rise of insulation and motor parts, as determined by resistance or thermometer methods, shall not exceed the NEMA allowable limits for the type of motor, the type of enclosure, and the particular application with regard to c ontinuous or intermittent duty.
7. To ensure long motor life, nameplate horsepower, regardless of service factor, shall be at least 115 percent of the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment.
8. Designed for full voltage starting.
9. Designed to operate from an electrical system that may have a maximum of 5 percent voltage distortion per IEEE Standard 519.
10. Derated, if required, for the altitude at which the equipment is installed.
11. Clamp-type grounding terminal shall be inside motor conduit box.
12. External conduit boxes shall be oversized at least one size larger than NEMA standard.
13. Totally enclosed motors shall have a continuous moisture drain which also excludes insects.
14. Bearings shall be either oil or grease lubricated.
15. Manufacturer's standard motor may be supplied on integrally constructed, packaged assemblies such as appliances, tools, unit heaters, and similar equipment specified by model number, in which case a redesign of the unit would be required to furnish motors of other than the manufacturer's standard design. However, in all cases, totally enclosed motors are preferr ed and shall be furnished if offered by the manufacturer as a standard option.
16. Totally enclosed motors shall be furnished on:
a. Equipment for installation below grade.
b. Equipment operating in wet or dust-laden locations.
17. Drip-proof motors, or totally enclosed motors at t he supplier's option, shall be furnished on equipment in indoor, above-grade, clean, and dry locations.
18. Explosion-proof or submersible motors shall be furnished as required by applicable codes, as specified in other Sections, or at the supplier's option.
19. Motors shall be rated and constructed as follows:
a. Below 1/2 hp:
1) 115 volts, 60 Hz, single phase.
2) Built-in manual-reset thermal protector, or integrally mounted stainless steel enclosed manual motor starter.
b. 1/2 hp and above:
1) 460 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
2) Where specified or required by the drawings, motors used on 240-volt systems shall be 230 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
1.8 DRIVE UNITS
A. The nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer shall be at least equal to the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Drive units shall be designed for 24 hours continuous service.
B. Unless otherwise specified, the use of gearmotors will not be acceptable.
01 61 03-4
General Product Requirements
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Gear reducers:
1. Each gear reducer shall be a totally enclosed unit with oil or grease lubricated antifriction, rolling element bearings throughout.
2. Helical, spiral bevel, combination bevel-helical, and worm gear reducers shall have a service factor of at least 1.50 based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Shaft-mounted and flange-mounted gear reducers shall be rated AGMA Class II. Helical gear reducers shall have a gear strength rating to catalog rating of 1.5.
Each gear reducer shall bear an AGMA nameplate.
3. The thermal horsepower rating of each unit shall equal or exceed the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. During continuous operation, the maximum sump oil temperature shall not rise more than 100oF above the ambient air temperature in the vicinity of the unit and shall not exceed 200oF.
4. Bearings:
a. Each grease lubricated bearing shall be installed in a bearing housing designed to facilitate periodic regreasing of the bearing by means of a manually operated grease gun.
b. Each bearing housing shall be designed to evenly distribute new grease, to properly dispose of old grease, and to prevent overgreasing of the bearing. c. The use of permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings will not be acceptable. d. An internal or external oil pump and appurtenances shall be provided if required to properly lubricate oil lubricated bearings.
e. A dipstick or sight glass arranged to permit visual inspection of lubricant level shall be provided on each unit.
5. Gear reducers that require the removal of parts or periodic disassembly of the unit for cleaning and manual regreasing of bearings will not be acceptable.
6. Certification shall be furnished by the gear reducer manufacturer indicating that the intended application of each unit has been reviewed in detail by the manufacturer and that the unit provided is fully compatible with the conditions of installation and service.
D. V-belt drives:
1. Each V-belt drive shall include a sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment.
V-belt drives shall have a service factor of at least 1.6 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor.
1.9 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment.
B. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed.
C. Anchor bolts shall comply with Section 05 05 06, Anchors, Inserts and Dowels and, unless otherwise specified, shall have a minimum diameter of 1/2-inch.
D. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete.
01 61 03-5
General Product Requirements
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1.10 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment shall be installed on concrete bases at least 6 inches high.
B. Cast iron or welded steel baseplates shall be provided for pumps, compressors, and other equipment.
C. Each unit and its drive assembly shall be supported on a single baseplate of neat design.
D. Baseplates shall have pads for anchoring all components and adequate grout holes.
E. Baseplates for pumps shall have a means for collecting leakage and a threaded drain connection.
F. Baseplates shall be anchored to the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts and the space beneath filled with grout as specified in Section 03 60 03, Grout.
1.11 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices.
1.12 SHOP PAINTING
A. Surface Protection:
1. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable paint or coatings applied in the shop.
2. Surfaces that will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment.
3. Exposed surfaces shall be finished smooth, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth uniform base for painting.
4. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self -contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with a high-grade oil-resistant enamel suitable for coating in the field with an alkyd enamel.
5. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed.
B. Shop Primer:
1. Surfaces to be painted after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of the specified primer.
2. Unless otherwise specified, the shop primer for steel and iron surfaces shall be:
a. Cook "391-N-167 Barrier Coat",
b. Koppers "No. 10 Inhibitive Primer",
c. Tnemec "37H Chem-Prime HS",
d. Valspar "13-R-28 Chromox Primer",
e. Or equal.
C. Machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with rust-preventive compound, Houghton "Rust Veto 344", Rust-Oleum "R-9", or equal.
01 61 03-6
General Product Requirements
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1.13 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
A. All equipment shall be suitably p ackaged to facilit ate handling and protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from expos ure to the elements and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times.
B. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of ENGINEER.
C. Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar items.
D. Each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment.
1.14 STORAGE
A. Upon delivery, all equipment and material shall immediately be stored and protected until installed in the Work.
B. Pumps, motors, electrical equipment, and all equipment with antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight structures maintained at a temperature above 60o F. Equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture and water damage. All space heaters furnished in equipment shall be connected and operated continuously.
C. Equipment and materials shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or other deleterious effects of storage when installed in the work.
1.15 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
A. Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary for proper results. When so specified, or when employees of the CONTRACTOR or their subcontractors are not qualified, such personnel shall be field representatives of the manufacturer of th e equipment or materials being installed.
B. Qualified field representatives shall be provided by the equipment manufacturers as required by Section 01 75 06, Testing, Training and Startup.
C. All equipment installed under this Contract, including that furnished by CITY shall be placed into successful operation according to the written instructions of the manufacturer or the instructions of the manufacturer's field representative. All required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup activity shall be provided.
D. Acceptance of work in connection with the installation of equipment furnished by others will be subject to approval of the field representative. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for planning, supervising, and executing the installation of work, and the
01 61 03-7
General Product Requirements
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
approval or acceptance of ENGINEER or the field representative will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for defective work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01 61 03-8
General Product Requirements
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01 64 03-1
Owner-Furnished Equipment
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 01 64 03
OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section includes the unloading, handling, installation, connection, and testing of OWNER-furnished equipment as indicated on the Plans and as specified herein.
B. OWNER-furnished equipment:
1. Submersible Sewage Pumps
a. Equipment Manufacturer: Xylem/Flygt
b. Contact Person: Adrian Gutierrez (508) 274-4643
c. Components: Two NP 3202 pumps with 310 mm impellers and motors C. Definitions: As used in this Section, the following terms have the meaning indicated:
1. Equipment Manufacturer:
a. The Company with whom the OWNER has a contract to procure the equipment items.
2. Defective:
a. An adjective which when modifying the word "equipment" refers to OWNER-furnished equipment and indicates that such equipment is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient; that such equipment does not conform to the provisions of the Equipment Specifications; that such equipment does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test, or approval referred to in the Equipment Specifications; or that such equipment is damaged.
3. Equipment specifications:
a. The specifications and other Contract Documents covering the purchase and delivery of OWNER-furnished equipment are included in the separate agreement between the OWNER and the Equipment Manufacturer.
4. Approved shop drawings:
a. The drawings and data supplied by the Equipment Manufacturer for OWNER-furnished equipment, as approved by the ENGINEER.
1.2 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER A. CONTRACTOR shall be in close coordination with service representatives of the manufacturer of the OWNER-furnished equipment in every phase of installation.
B. Both the CONTRACTOR and the Equipment Manufacturer have separate responsibilities, both of which must necessarily be interwoven as regards the installation, testing and acceptance of the equipment.
C. The Agreement between the OWNER and the Equipment Manufacturer, plus approved shop drawings, are available for inspection at the ENGINEER’s Office. All prospective Contractors shall review said Agreement and shop drawings.
01 64 03-2
Owner-Furnished Equipment
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment specifications and approved shop drawings:
1. The CONTRACTOR will be presumed cognizant, prior to entering into the Contract, of the provisions of the Equipment Specifications and approved Shop Drawings.
2. One copy of the approved shop drawings will be made available to the CONTRACTOR to whom the Contract is awarded.
B. Installation:
1. OWNER-furnished equipment shall be installed as specified in Paragraph 3.1.
C. Operation:
1. OWNER-furnished equipment shall be operated in accordance with the written instructions furnished with the equipment, and with the instructions issued by representatives of equipment manufacturers.
D. Testing:
1. After installation, and following certification in writing by Equipment Manufacturer that the installation is ready for electrical testing, the CONTRACTOR shall make electrical tests on OWNER-furnished equipment.
2. The tests shall prove that the equipment has been properly installed; that power, control, instrumentation, and alarms are properly connected and wired from the equipment to points of supply or receipt of signals and are properly calibrated; and that all other work performed by the CONTRACTOR renders the equipment operational as intended.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of OWNER-furnished equipment:
1. Equipment will be delivered to the CONTRACTOR at the site of the work as specified in the Equipment Specifications and identified in Section 01 11 03, Summary of Work.
2. Changes to the delivery procedure and schedule may be made if mutually agreed between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, and if approved by the Equipment Manufacturer.
3. Inspection and Acceptance:
a. Upon delivery, conduct with OWNER or ENGINEER a joint inspection for the purpose of identifying product, general verification of quantities, and observation of apparent condition.
b. Such inspection will not be construed as final or as receipt of any product that, as a result of subsequent inspections and tests, are determined to be nonconforming.
c. Damaged or incomplete products to be returned for replacement will not be unloaded, except as necessary to expedite return shipment. d. OWNER will submit claims for transportation damage and expedite replacement of damaged, defective, or deficient items.
e. Indicate signed acceptance of delivery on a copy of the invoice. f. Upon CONTRACTOR’s acceptance of OWNER -furnished equipment, it shall be understood that the CONTRACTOR assumes the responsibilities assigned to him in these Specifications in relation to the installation, testing and operation of OWNER furnished equipment.
01 64 03-3
Owner-Furnished Equipment
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
4. Defective Equipment Notice:
a. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the conditions of OWNER-furnished equipment and shall submit to the ENGINEER within 7 days after delivery date a statement listing all defective equipment items.
b. The list shall include the cost and extension to the Contract Time that the CONTRACTOR estimates for the correction and repair of each defective equipment item and a statement of the CONTRACTOR's opinion as to the cause of the defective equipment items.
c. If the CONTRACTOR makes no submittal within the time period specified, it shall be understood that the OWNER-furnished equipment is in satisfactory condition and that the CONTRACTOR's acceptance has occurred as of the date of delivery. d. If the CONTRACTOR makes a submittal listing defective equipment items within the time period specified, the ENGINEER will decide on the course of action to be taken. The possible courses of action by the ENGINEER include:
1) Correction By Change Order:
a) To authorize the CONTRACTOR to proceed with the correction and repair of defective equipment items through the issuance of a Change Order. b) The CONTRACTOR's consent to perform such repair and correction shall be construed as CONTRACTOR's acceptance for the items included in the Change Order.
2) Correction By Force Account:
a) To direct the CONTRACTOR to proceed with the correction and repair of defective equipment items through the procedures specified for force account work.
b) It shall be understood that CONTRACTOR's acceptance has occurred for the items covered under force account work on the date of the issuance of the ENGINEER's directive.
3) Correction By Others:
a) To have others perform the correction and repair of defective equipment items.
b) The CONTRACTOR shall observe the work done by others and notify the ENGINEER in writi ng of all irregularities, faulty workmanship, or unsatisfactory work done by others.
c) The CONTRACTOR observations shall be carried out without obstruction or interference to others performing work.
d) Upon completion of the correction and repair, the ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR and it shall be understood that CONTRACTOR's acceptance has occurred for items repaired by others upon receipt of the ENGINEER's notification.
4) Modify the Installation Contract:
a) To modify the Plans and Specifications in order to meet changing conditions.
b) It shall be understood that CONTRACTOR's acceptance has occurred upon receipt of the ENGINEER's modifications to Plans and Specifications. 5) Reject the Characterization:
a) To state to the CONTRACTOR that an item listed by the CONTRACTOR is not a defective equipment item.
e. Regarding such items, it shall be understood that CONTRACTOR's acceptance has occurred on the delivery date.
01 64 03-4
Owner-Furnished Equipment
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
5. If CONTRACTOR is not prepared to accept delivery of OWNER-furnished equipment by either the specified Estimated Date of Arrival or such OWNER -confirmed delivery date, as specified herein, associated costs incurred by OWNER shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. Such costs may include, but not be limited to, demurrage, interest, insurance costs, additional administrative and engineering costs, additional factory and field technical support, additional storage and reshipping costs, cost escalation, and extended warranty costs due.
6. The CONTRACTOR shall unload the equipment from the delivery vehicle within 24 hours afte r arrival of the vehicle transporting such equipment to the site. The equipment shall be unloaded in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions, or as specified.
7. The CONTRACTOR shall assume responsibility for storage and handling of equipment after the delivery has been accepted.
B. Protection of OWNER-furnished equipment:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall protect the equipment in accordance with the Equipment Manufacturer's recommendations against weather conditions, including construction of a temporary cover, and periodic lubrication, if required.
2. From the time of receipt until the equipment is energized for operations, unless such equipment is being worked on, equipment shall be considered in storage.
3. While in storage, a 120V, 1 phase source of power shall be provided and connected to space heaters in all items of equipment so equipped. Equipment not provided with space heaters shall be provided with a light bulb or electric heater while in storage to prevent moisture condensation.
1.5 SCHEDULING:
A. It shall be understood that the CONTRACTOR's review of the Equipment Specifications has allowed the scheduling of their operations in accordance with the dates for the delivery of OWNER-furnished equipment anticipated in said Equipment Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall install OWNER -furnished equipment in accordance with the instructions and recommendations furnished with the equipment, approved shop drawings, instructions of the representatives of equipment manufacturers and installation manuals, and as indicated on the Plans.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to include in their bid all labor, materials, and equipment required to install the OWNER-furnished equipment and make the complete system operate satisfactorily.
C. Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary to obtain proper results.
Such personnel shall be field representatives of the Equipment Manufacturer.
01 64 03-5
Owner-Furnished Equipment
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
D. Factory Service Representatives:
1. Qualified factory service representatives will be provided by the Equipment Manufacturer as required to perform all manufacturers’ field services called for in these Specifications.
2. Equipment Manufactur er will submit resumes of the proposed factory service representatives to the ENGINEER for review and acceptance not less than 21 days prior to the factory services representative’s first site visit.
3. Factory service representatives will observe, instruct , guide, and direct CONTRACTOR's erection or installation procedures, and perform an installation check, as required herein or as requested by the ENGINEER.
4. Each factory service representative will revisit the site as often as necessary to attain installation satisfactory to ENGINEER.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all piping, electrical and instrumentation work, interconnections, finish painting and accessories as required to make the OWNER-furnished equipment and system complete and functional.
F. Provide foundation pads for OWNER -furnished products as shown. Verify exact dimensions and configuration of all pads, including penetrations, with OWNER-furnished product shop drawings.
G. Anchor Bolts:
1. Where required, provide anchor bolts, fasteners, washers, and templates needed for installation of OWNER-furnished equipment.
2. Size and locate anchor bolts in accordance with OWNER -furnished product shop drawings and installation instructions.
H. Mechanical and electrical equipment shall be properly aligned, plumb and level, with no stresses on connecting piping or conduit.
3.2 FIELD FINISHING
A. Products will be delivered with prime coat(s) applied.
B. Finish coat as specified in Section 09 91 03, PAINTING.
C. Touch up or repair damage to coatings resulting from unloading, st orage, installation, testing, and startup.
D. If finish coats are damaged extensively after transfer, completely repaint.
E. Touch up, repair, or complete repainting shall match color of original paint, and shall be fully compatible with applied primers and finish.
3.3 EQUIPMENT FIELD TESTING
A. General:
1. Field Testing shall consist of Functional Testing performed by the CONTRACTOR, and Performance Testing performed by the Equipment Manufacturer with OWNER assistance.
01 64 03-6
Owner-Furnished Equipment
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Minimum Functional Testing requirements are specified in Section 01 75 06, Testing, Training and Startup.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule, coordinate, and perform all Functional Tests required to prove that the equipment has been properly installed and is in satisfactory operating condition.
4. The Equipment Manufacturer will furnish a factory trained representative to provide technical guidance to assist the OWNER's CONTRACTOR during Functional Testing.
5. Addition Functional Testing requirements for the Owner -Supplied Equipment are listed in the Technical Specifications.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall repair, replace or correct to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER all defective equipment items caused by the CONTRACTOR's improper placement and handling of OWNER-furnished equipment.
C. After testing, the CONTRACTOR shall repair, replace, or correct faulty work.
3.4 SERVICES OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVES A. The Equipment Manufacturers (through the OWNER) will provide services of skilled representatives of equipment manufacturer's for inspecting the installation, adjustments, start-up and testing of OWNER-furnished equipment.
B. The extent of services provided by manufacturer's representatives is specified in the Equipment Specifications.
C. The services will be provided as requested by the ENGINEER.
D. The CONTRACTOR and their employees shall fully cooperate with the manufacturer's representatives.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing 15 calendar days before the equipment manufacturer's representative needs to be present at the site.
++ END OF SECTION ++
O
ctober 3, 2022
CITY OF ROSEVILLE
1800 BOOTH RD
1800 BOOTH RD
ROSEVILLE CA 95747- 9708
Quote # 2022-FFB-0359
Project Name: City of Roseville
Job Name: PS 26 improvements
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. is pleased to provide a quote for the following Flygt equipment.
Pumps
Qty Description Unit Price Extended Price
2 Flygt Model NP-3202.095 6" volute Submersible pump
eq
uipped with a 460 Volt / 3 phase / 60 Hz 60 HP
1750 RPM motor, 458 impeller, 1 x 50 Ft. length of
SUBCAB 4G25+S(2x0,5) submersible cable, FLS
leakage detector, volute is prepared for Flush Valve
$ 68,338.75 $ 136,677.50
1 START UP CHARGE FLYGT 1-TP MODELS:
30 00,7000,8000
$ 1,720.40 $ 1,720.40
Accessories
Qty Description Unit Price Extended Price
2 CONNECTION,DISCH 5½X6" CI $ 1,820.00 $ 3,640.00
4 KIT,HARDWARE 3/8IN SS (2X) $ 93.15 $ 372.60
2 HARDWARE,DISC CONN ASSY 304SS+ 302SS
A
LT.
$ 701.50 $ 1,403.00
2 SLEEVE,NBR $ 34.50 $ 69.00
2 BRACKET,GUIDE BAR U. 3" 316SS $ 470.35 $ 940.70
2 HOOK,SAFETY ASSEMBLY SS $ 201.25 $ 402.50
2 SLING,CHAIN UNIT POLY ROPE 10M $ 292.10 $ 584.20
1 GRIP EYE UNIT $ 198.95 $ 198.95
1 HOLDER,CABLE HEAVY DUTY 316SS $ 238.05 $ 238.05
2 MINI-CASII/FUS 120/24VAC,24VDC $ 719.00 $ 1,438.00
2 SOCKET,11-PIN BACK MOUNTING $ 118.00 $ 236.00
Total Price $ 147,920.90
Freight Charge $ 5,664.00
Total Price $ 165,048.77
N
OTES:
Xylem Water Solutions USA , Inc.
Flygt Products
790-A Chadbourne Rd
Fairfield, CA 94534
Tel (707) 422-9894
Fax (707) 422-9808
Sales Tax $11,463.87
-
Current lead time for pumps is an estimated 12-14 weeks -This quote is for everything above and nothing else
-3" Stainless guide bar to be provided by others, recommended guide bar specs attached -Does not include any additional factory performance testing or any additional epoxy coatings that may or may not be required
-Does not include any extended warranty or preventative maintenance agreement Terms & Conditions
This order is subject to the Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale – Xylem Americas effective on the date the order is accepted which terms are available at http://www.xyleminc.com/en-us/Pages/terms- conditions-of- sale.aspx and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of the agreement between the parties.
P
urchase Orders: Please make purchase orders out to: Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.
Freight Terms: 3 DAP - Delivered At Place 08 - Jobsite (per IncoTerms 2020) See Freight Payment (Delivery Terms) below.
Taxes: State, local and other applicable taxes are not included in this quotation.
Back Charges: Buyer shall not make purchases nor shall Buyer incur any labor that would result in a back charge to Seller without prior written consent of an authorized employee of Seller.
Shortages: Xylem will not be responsible for apparent shipment shortages or damages incurred in shipment that are not reported within two weeks from delivery to the jobsite. Damages should be noted on the receiving slip and the truck driver advised of the damages. Please contact our office as soon as possible to report damages or shortages so that replacement items can be shipped and the appropriate claims made.
Terms & Conditions: Attached please find our Standard Terms & Conditions of Sale that apply to this order.
Taxes: State, local and other applicable taxes are not inclu ded in this quotation.
Time of delivery: Delivery lead times are [FILL IN # OF WEEKS HERE] weeks after receipt of submittal approval and order acceptance.
Terms of delivery: PP/Add Order Position
T
erms of Payment: 100% Net 30 days following shipment date. Xylem’s payment shall not be dependent upon Purchaser being paid by any third party unless Owner denies payment due to reasons solely attributable to items related to the equipment being provided by FLYGT.
Schedule: Please consult your local Flygt Branch Office to get fabrication and delivery lead times.
Changes: This Quote is based on the current design criteria p rovided to Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Revisions may result in price changes.
Exclusions: T his Quote includes only the items listed specified above.
Validity: Please note that this pricing is valid for 30 days and is contingent upon final approval of submittals and release for fabrication within 90 days of PO date.
We thank you for your interest in Flygt equipment from Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. and look forward to being of service to you in the near future.
Sincerely,
Adrian Gutierrez
Sales Representative
Phone: 508-274-4643
[email protected]
Customer Acceptance
This order is subject to the Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale – Xylem Americas effective on the date the order is accepted which terms are available at http://www.xyleminc.com/en-us/Pages/terms- conditions-of- sale.aspx and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of the agreement between the parties.
A signed copy of this Quote is acceptable as a binding contract.
Please make purchase orders out to: Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. 2022-FFB-0359
CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PS 26 improvements
$ 165,048.77
Purchase Orders:
Quote #:
Customer Name:
Job Name:
Total Amount:
(including taxes &
freight)
Signature: _______________________________ Name:______________ _________________________ (PLEASE PRINT)
Company/Utility:___________________________ PO:________________ _________________________ Address:_________________________________ Date:_______________ _________________________ ________________________________________ Phone:______________ _________________________ ________________________________________ Email:_______________ ________________________ ________________________________________ Fax :____________________________ _____________ Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.
Flygt
Products
Introducing the Xylem
Preventative Maintenance Agreement
Don’t forget to protect your new assets
Thank you for considering Xylem for your pumping equip ment needs. We appreciate the significance of your purchase decision and want to ensure you get the most out of your investment. The most cost-effective way to do this is to sign-up for a preventative maintenance agreement (PMA) that we tailor to your specifi c requirements and budget.
A Xylem PMA offers a proven method to extend your equip ment life, prevent expensive repairs and minimize unplanned failures. It’s also ensures you remain in compliance with environmental, health and other government regulations – critical to maximizing operation uptime.
Our Flygt Gold PMA Includes:
• One scheduled preventative maintenance service visit with multi-point inspection, 12 months after purchase and discounted access to Xylem's rental fleet • An additional 12-month warranty when purchased with your new or replacement Flygt pump(s) • The option to renew annually or on a multi-year basis following the first service visit • Priority service on repairs and field service calls
* Flat-Rate Pricing is available for new and replacemen t Flygt models 3069, 3085, 3102, 3127, 3153, 3171, 3202, 3301 & 3315 starting at $500 per pump.
Multi-year PMA packages are available as well.
Contact your Xylem Sales Representative today for more information.
Visit our PMA site for more info
WARRANTY
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.
Ver. 12 -120312
For the period defined, Xylem Water Solutions USA, In c. offers a commercial warranty to the original End Pu rchaser against defects in workmanship and material on Flygt Products. Warranty covers Flygt parts and labor as outl ined in ADDENDUM – A.
COVERAGE:
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. will pay the cost of p arts and labor during the warranty period, provided t hat the Flygt product, with cable attached, is returned prepaid to a Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Authorized Service Faci lity for Flygt Product repairs. Coverage for Flygt parts and la bor will be provided for the period shown in ADDENDUM - A. The warranty period will begin from date of shipment or dat e of a valid Start-up (For permanently installed pump s only). In cases where the Start-up date is used as the beginn ing of the warranty on a permanently installed Flygt pump, a Start-up Report completed by an approved service technician from a Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Authorized Service F acility for Flygt products must be received by the Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Area Service Manager for Flygt Pr oducts within thirty (30) days of the initial onset of the u nit placed into service. If not received, the beginning of the warranty coverage will default to the Flygt product ship date. A Start-up for a permanently installed Flygt pump mu st occur within one (1) year from the date of shipment from a Xylem Wat er Solutions USA, Inc. authorized facility for Flygt Pr oducts or warranty will automatically default to ship date as s tart of warranty. (See STORAGE section) When using the start-up date as the beginning of the warranty, a copy of the Start-up Report will be required to support a ny Warranty Claims .
Warranty on Flygt Dewatering pumps will begin with s hip date only . No other date on Flygt Dewatering pumps will be considered.
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. ’s sole obligation under this Warranty for Flygt Product s shall be to replace, repair or grant credit for Flygt P roducts upon Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. ’s exclusive determination that the Flygt Product does not conform to the above warranty. In the event that the Flygt product is replaced, warranty on the repla cement product will be equal to the balance remaining on the original product or ninety (90) days, which ever is greater.
MISUSE:
This Warranty shall not apply to any Flygt product or pa rt of Flygt product which (i) has been subjected to mi suse, misapplication, accident, alteration, neglect, or phys ical damage (ii) has been installed, operated, used and/or maintained in a manner which is in an application that is contr ary to Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. ’s printed instructions as it pertains to installation, operation and maintenance of F lygt Products, including but without limitation to (iii) operation of equipment without being connected to monitoring devices supplied with specific products for protection; or (iv) damaged due to a defective power supply, improper electrical p rotection, faulty installation or repair, ordinary wear a nd tear, corrosion or chemical attack, an act of God, an act of war or by an act of terrorism; or (v) has been damaged resul ting from the use of accessory equipment not sold by Xylem Wa ter Solutions USA, Inc. or not approved b y Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. in connection with Flygt products.
WEAR PARTS:
This warranty does not cover costs for standard and/or s cheduled maintenance performed, nor does it cover Flygt parts that, by virtue of their operation, require replacement through normal wear (aka: Wear Parts), unless a defe ct in material or workmanship can be determined by Xylem Water Soluti ons USA, Inc.. Wear Parts are defined as Cutters, Cu tting Plates, Impellers, Agitators, Diffusers, Wear Rings ( Stationary or Rotating), Volutes (when used in an abras ive environment), oil, grease, cooling fluids and/or any it ems deemed necessary to perform and meet the requireme nts of normal maintenance on all Flygt equipment.
WARRANTY
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.
Ver. 12 -120312
DISCLAIMERS:
(i) Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.’s warranties are null and void when Flygt Products ar e exported outside of the United States of America without the knowledge and written co nsent of Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.; (ii) Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. makes no independent warranty or representation with respect to parts or products manuf actured by others and provided by Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. (however, Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. will exte nd to the Purchaser any warranty received from Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.’s supplier for such parts or products).
LIMITATIONS:
XYLEM WATER SOLUTIONS USA, INC. NEITHER ASSUMES, NOR AUTHORIZES ANY PERSON OR COMPANY TO ASSUME FOR XYLEM WATER SOLUTIONS USA, INC., ANY OTHER OBLIGA TION IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF ITS FLYGT EQUIPMENT. ANY ENLARGEMENT OR MODIFICATION OF THIS WARRA NTY BY A FLYGT PRODUCT DISTRIBUTOR, OR OTHER SELLING AGENT SHALL BECOME THE EXCLUSIVE RESPONSIBILITY OF SUCH ENTITY.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF AN Y AND ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
GUARANTEES, CONDITIONS OR TERMS OF WHATEVER NATURE R ELATING TO FLYGT PRODUCT(S), INCLUDING AND
WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WHICH ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED AND EX CLUDED. PURCHASER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND XYLEM WATER SOLUTIONS USA, INC. ’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR BREACH OF ANY OF THE FOREG OING WARRANTIES IS LIMITED
TO REPAIRING OR REPLACING FLYGT PRODUCTS AND SHALL IN ALL CASES BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY THE PURCHASER HEREUNDER. IN NO EVENT IS XYLEM WATER SOLUTIO NS USA, INC. LIABLE FOR ANY OTHER FORM OF
DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, LIQUIDATED, INCIDENTA L, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY OR
SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF PROFIT, LOSS OF ANTICIPATED
SAVINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF INCOME, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PRODUCTION, LOSS OF OPPORTUNITY OR LOSS OF REPUTATION.
XYLEM WATER SOLUTIONS USA, INC. WILL NOT BE HELD RESPO NSIBLE FOR TRAVEL EXPENSES, RENTED EQUIPMENT,
OUTSIDE CONTRACTOR'S FEES, OR ANY EXPENSES ASSOCIATED WITH A FLYGT PRODUCT REPAIR SHOP NOT AUTHORIZED BY XYLEM WATER SOLUTIONS USA, INC. U.S.A., INC. REIMBURSEMENT COSTS FOR CRANES AND/OR ANY
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION FOR THE REMOVAL A ND/OR REINSTALLATION OF ANY FLYGT EQUIPMENT IS NOT COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY.
ANY UNAUTHORIZED ALTERATIONS TO SUPPLIED FLYGT EQUIPME NT USED WITHOUT XYLEM WATER SOLUTIONS USA, INC. SUPPLIED FLYGT BRAND CABLE OR CONTROLS WILL NOT BE COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY , UNLESS IT CAN
BE PROVEN SUCH ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE AND EQUAL TO XYLEM WATER SOLUTIONS USA, INC. SUPPLIED FLYGT BRAND CABLES OR CONTROLS THAT WOULD ORIGINALLY HAVE BEEN SUPPLIED WITH THE TYPE OF EQUIPMENT IN USE.
REQUIREMENTS:
A copy of Electrical System Schematics of the Control u sed (including a Control’s Bill of Material) could be required to support a Warranty Claim when a non Flygt Brand C ontrol is used. In addition, a written record, hereby k nown as “the log”, will be associated with each unit serial numbe r and must be maintained by the organization having pr oduct maintenance responsibility. The log must record each p reventative maintenance activity and any repair act ivity during the life of the warranty or verification that a Xylem Wate r Solutions USA, Inc. authorized Service Contract for Flygt Products is in force and must be available for review and/or audit ing. Failure to meet these conditions could render this warrant null and void. Such logs could be required to determine warranty coverage.
WARRANTY
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.
Ver. 12 -120312
STORAGE:
Should a delay occur between ship date and the date of start-up, maintenance as outlined in Xylem Water S olutions USA, Inc.’s Care & Maintenance Manual for Flygt Products must be performed by the “CONTRACTOR” and/or “OWNER” du ring any such period of storage. Documentation providing proof and outlining what maintenance was performed must be provided to Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. or its Flygt Products representative within thirty (30) days of s aid maintenance, or the Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. warranty for Flygt Products could be considered void.
CONTROLS:
Warranty coverage for permanently installed controls will start for the end purchaser on the date of shipm ent. This warranty does not apply to controls that have been damag ed due to a defective and/or improper input power suppl y, improper electrical protection, accidental damage, imp roper or unauthorized installation and/or repair, unauth orized alteration, negligence, environmental corrosion or chemical attack, improper maintenance or storage of control, any act of God, an act of war, an act of terrorism or damage resul ting from the use of accessory equipment not approved b y Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.. Further, this warranty do es not apply in the event an adjustment is found to cor rect the alleged defect.
Solid state devices will be covered for a period of on e (1) year except in the Flygt Standard Control Pane l (FSCP) where the solid state devices will be covered for the full w arranty period of the control panel. Electrical control panels containing controllers, PLC’s, drives, soft starts, and other compu terized equipment will require Transient Voltage Sur ge Suppression (TVSS) protection in order to satisfy the requirements of this warranty. The protection equipment associated wi th the control must be kept in working condition during the lif e of the warranty. Auxiliary equipment supplied with the control (air-conditioners etc.) is limited by the respective original equipment manufacturer’s warranty offered. Consumable items such as: light bulbs, fuses, and relays are covered under normal operating conditions. Electrical surges experienced during startups and/or during normal operating use of t he control panel will cause the consumable items not t o be covered under this warranty policy. Components not supp lied by Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. will not cover ed by this warranty.
TOP (The Optimum Pump Station)
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. will warrant the Flyg t TOP pre-engineered fiberglass pump station componen ts against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of start-up or eighteen (18) months from date of shipment and is valid only to the original owner of the station. Warranty shall cover the cost of labor and materials required to correct any warrantable defect, excluding any removal and reinstallation costs, FOB Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.’s authorized warranty service location for Flygt’s TOP.
Flygt Products contained within a TOP pre-engineered fiberglass pump station will carry the standard Xyl em Water Solutions USA, Inc. warranty for Flygt products and/or accessories installed in the TOP pre-engineered fib erglass pump station.
All Flygt Product restrictions and/or limitations as ou tlined and described within the context of this warra nty are germane to all sections of this Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Warranty document.
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.
National Quality Assurance - US Corporate
WARRANTY
Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc.
Ver. 12 -120312
ADDENDUM – WARRANTY COVERAGE BY PRODUCT
PRODUCT PRODUCT SERIES AND CONFIGURATION Months Months Months Months Months 1 - 12 13 - 18 19 - 36 37 - 39 40 - 60
Axial Flow/ Mixed Flow/ Centrifugal Pumps & Mixers
3000 Series (CP, NP, DP, CT, NT, CZ, NZ, LL)
4000 Series (SR, PP)
7000 Series (PL)
100% 50% 25%
Flygt Standard Control Panels (FSCP) Standard Control Panels (FSCP – permanently installed) 100% (From Ship Date)
ETO Electrical Control Panels Engineered to Order, Xylem Manufactured Control Panels (permanently installed) - 3 Years 100% - 1 YR LIMITED - 2 - YR Abrasion/Corrosion Resistant & Chopper/ Grinder Pumps
3000 Series (MP, MF, MH, FP, FS, FT, HP, HS)
5000 Series (HP, HS)
8000.280 Series (DP, DZ, DT, DS, DF)
100%
Dewatering Pumps
2000 Series (BS, KS)
3000 Series (CS, NS, DS)
8000.280 Series (DS, DF)
100% (From Ship Date)
TOPS Fiberglass Pump Station 100% (From Ship Date)
Accessories Permanent / Portable
100%
(From Ship
Date)
Hydro ejectors/ Aerators HE, JA 100%
Portable Pump Controls
TOPS Control Panels
Control Boxes (Nolta, MSHA etc.)
TOPS control panels (permanently installed)
100%
(From Ship
Date)
Small Pumps 3045, 3057, SX
100%
(From Ship
Date)
Parts - * All new Flygt parts (mechanical & electrical) 100%
(From Ship
Date)
* - Parts that fail where used in a repair are warranted for one (1) year from the date of the repair for the failed part only – no labor; This Includes Flygt pump controllers, Flygt supervision equipment, Flygt submersible level transducers, etc.
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01 71 13-1
Mobilization
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 01 71 13
MOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all bonds, insurance, and licenses; moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, temporary buildings, and other construction faciliti es; all as required for the proper performance and completion of the work.
B. Mobilization shall include but not be limited to the following principal items:
1. Moving on to the site of all CONTRACTOR's equipment.
2. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
3. Developing construction water supply.
4. Furnishing the work access plan as specified in Section 01 51 03, Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities.
5. Providing all on -site CONTRACTOR communication facilities, including telephones, and radio pagers and any radio communications facilities required for the CONTRACTOR to coordinate their forces.
6. Providing on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified in Section 01 51 03, Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities.
7. Arranging for and erection of the CONTRACTOR's work and storage yard, including site security.
8. Posting all EPA and OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs.
9. Post all required labor and EEOE notices.
10. Have the CONTRACTOR's superintendent at the job site full time.
11. Submittal and CITY acceptance of the Construction Schedule.
12. Establishing site security, lighting, fencing, and signing.
13. Obtaining all bonds, insurance and licenses.
14. Providing an organization chart of the project and for the CONTRACTOR's firm. The project chart shall include the name, title and responsibilities of each position which is involved in the work.
15. Other mobilization items approv ed by the ENGINEER required to support t he complete work (e.g., Health and Safety Plans for Hazardous Waste).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01 71 13-2
Mobilization
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01 74 03-1
Cleaning
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 01 74 03
CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section covers the work necessary for cleaning during construction and final cleaning on completion of the Work.
1.2 GENERAL
A. At all times maintain areas covered by the Cont ract and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by construction operations.
B. Pollution Control:
1. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti- pollution laws.
2. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site.
3. Volatile wastes shall be properly stored in covered metal containers and removed daily.
4. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains.
5. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
C. Construction materials such as concrete forms and scaffolding shall be neatly stacked by the CONTRACTOR when not in use. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint, corrosive liquids, a nd cleaning solutions from su rfaces to prevent marring or other damage.
D. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
E. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. During execution of Work, clean site and public properties and dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish to assure that buildings, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.
B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.
01 74 03-2
Cleaning
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Provide approved containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Empty containers within one day after they are full.
D. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
E. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish to match adjacent surfaces.
F. Vacuum clean all interior spaces, including inside cabinets. Broom clean paved surfaces, rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
G. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights.
H. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
I. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is ready for substantial completion or occupancy.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. Refer to the requirements of the Contract Documents in addition to the requirements of this Section.
B. See Section 01 77 03, Operational Completion and Project Closeout , for additional requirements.
C. At the completion of Work on all Contracts and immediately prior to final in spection, cleaning of the entire Project will be accomplished according to the following provisions:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and equipment, including finishes. The cleaning shall leave the structures and sit e in a complete and finished condition to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
2. Should the CONTRACTOR not remove rubbish or debris or not clean the building and site as specified above, the CITY reserves the right to have the cleaning done at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
3. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning.
4. In preparation for substantial completion of occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.
5. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, la bels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight -exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine finish.
6. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces t o specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.
7. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
8. Replace air-handling filters if units were operated during construction.
9. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air -handling units were operated without filters during construction.
10. Clean luminaires in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean all light fixtures.
01 74 03-3
Cleaning
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
11. Remove from the CITY's property all temporary structures and all materials, equipment, and appurtenances not required as a p art of, or appurtenant to, the completed work. See Sec tion 01 51 03 - Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01 74 03-4
Cleaning
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01 75 06-1
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 01 75 06
TESTING, TRAINING, AND STARTUP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Scope:
1. This Section covers general equipment and system testing and startup requirements, services of the manufacturer's representatives and special coordina ting services required of the CONTRACTOR that shall apply during construction and training of the CITY's personnel for facilities operation.
2. Specific testing and tracking procedures and requirements found in the Technical Specifications shall also apply.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall inform all Subcontractors and manufacturers of the requirements herein and include the required services in their costs for the work specified in these Contract Documents. Where a minimum amount of time is stated in the Technical Specifications for manufacturers' services, any additional time required to perform the specified services shall be provided at no additional cost to the CITY.
C. Scheduling:
1. Equipment testing and startup are requisite to satisfactory completion of the Contract and, therefore, shall be completed within the contract time.
2. All equipment testing and plant startup activities shall be realistically allowed for and shown on the CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule, in accordance with Section 01 32 13, Progress Schedule.
3. All equipment testing and plant startup activities shall be scheduled in conformance with the restrictions specified in Section 01 14 03, Special Project Constraints.
D. Equipment testing shall be satisfactorily completed prior to commencing plant startup associated with the particular equipme nt item or equipment package. The equipment shall not be considered ready for testing until the following conditions are satisfied:
1. Manufacturer's certification of equipment installation has been accepted by the ENGINEER.
2. Electrical and/or instrumentation Subcontractor certification of motor control logic has been accepted by the ENGINEER.
3. Related Technical Submittals, O&M Manual and Final Shop Drawings have been accepted by the ENGINEER.
4. Operator training services have been furnished by the CONTRACTOR (operational testing only).
5. Testing procedures have been submitted in writing and accepted by the ENGINEER in accordance with Section 01 33 03, Submittal Procedures. All testing procedures and results shall be submitted in writing.
E. The requirements of plant sta rtup specified herein shall also apply to the startup of individual treatment plant processes and facilities.
F. Startup Plan:
01 75 06-2
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Not less than 3 months prior to initial equipment or system startup, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review, a detailed Facilities Startup Plan for the associated items of equipment and/or systems.
2. The Startup Plan shall include:
a. A detailed sub-network of the CONTRACTOR's Construction Progress Schedule including the following activities:
1) Manufacturer's Services;
2) Installation Certifications;
3) Operator Training;
4) O&M Manual;
5) Functional Testing;
6) Performance Testing;
7) Operational Testing;
8) All other activities necessary to affect a coordinated and successful Testing, Training and Startup.
b. Written testing plan with prop osed data logs for each item of equipment to be tested.
c. A discussion of any coordination required with the CITY’s staff and/or any system or equipment outage requirements.
d. The Plan shall be updated and/or revised as necessary prio r to subsequent Construction Progress Meetings.
e. Testing shall not be scheduled earlier than 30 days after approval of the Plan.
1.2 SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. General:
1. Manufacturer’s Representative:
a. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of competent and experienced technical representatives of the manufacturers of all equipment and systems furnished under the contract, for as many days as may be necessary for assembly, installation, testing assistance and operator training. b. Manufacturer's field representa tives shall observe, instr uct, guide, and direct CONTRACTOR's erection or installation procedures, or perform an installation check, as required.
c. In each case, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange to have the manufacturer's representative revisit the job site as often as necessary until operator training is complete and testing and startup problems have been resolved to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
d. This requirement applies to manufacturers of all equipment furnished (excluding manually operated valves smaller than 24 inches in size, and any other items of equipment specifically exempted by the ENGINEER in writing), whether or not specifically set forth in the Technical Specifications. e. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a service record on each item of equipment and shall deliver these service records to the ENGINEER prior to acceptance of operational testing.
B. Fulfillment of Specified Minimum Services:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior written approval from the ENGINEER for providing manufacturers' services.
2. All reque sts to the ENGINEER for prior approval shall (1) be in writing, (2) be submitted not less than 10 calendar days prior to the providing of the subject
01 75 06-3
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
services, (3) state the service to be provided, and (4) state the reason(s) why the timing of the service is appropriate.
3. Request made to the ENGINEER less than 10 calendar days prior to the manufacturers' services may not receive consideration and response prior to the times the services are provided.
4. Visits of manufacturers and their representatives to the jobsite or training classroom without prior approval as provided herein may not act to fulfill the specified minimum man-day requirements.
C. Certificate of Proper Installation:
1. Equipment requiring factory tests shall not be delivered to the jobsite until the CONTRACTOR submits acceptable certified test results to the ENGINEER.
2. Equipment shall not be considered ready for functional testing until after the following certifications have been submitted and accepted by the ENGINEER. a. Manufacturer Representatives:
1) The CONTRACTOR shall require that each manufacturer's representative furnish to the ENGINEER a written and signed report addressed to the CITY certifying that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts, has been operated satisfactorily under full-load conditions and is ready for full-time operation. 2) For pumps, compressors, blowers, engines, motors, and other rotating or reciprocating equipment, the report shall certify that the equipment operates within the manufacturer's allowable limits for vibration. 3) The report shall also certify that all controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as part of the manufac turer's equipment package are properly installed and calibrated; and that the control logic for equipment startup, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating. 4) The CONTRACTOR shall also sign said certification.
5) The CONTRACTOR shall submit "Manufacturer's Certification of Proper Installation" on the CITY form.
b. Electrical and Instrumentation Subcontractor:
1) The CONTRACTOR shall require that the electrical and/or instrumentation Subcontractor shall furnish a written and signed report to the ENGINEER certifying that the motor control logic for the equipment item that resides in motor control centers, control panels, control boards, microprocessors, distributed processing units, computers, and the like furnis hed by the electrical and/or instrumentation Subcontractor has been properly tested and calibrated.
2) The report shall certify that the control logic for equipment startup, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating.
3) The CONTRACTOR shall also sign said certification.
1.3 STARTUP AND TESTING
A. General:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the effective coordination of all parties necessary for the successful project startup.
01 75 06-4
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. The ENGINEER shall not be responsible to instruct the CONTRACTOR in the startup of the project, however, the ENGINEER will be available prior to and during startup to provide operational and technical support to the CONTRACTOR.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, consumables (power, water, chemicals, air, etc.) tools, equipment, instruments, and services required and incidental to completing all functional, performance and operational testing of installed equipment.
4. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for favorable review the proposed test procedures to the ENGINEER for review at least 30 days prior to testing.
5. After favorable review of the test procedures, t he CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER written notice confirming the date of testing at least five working days before the time the equipment is scheduled to be tested.
6. All testing shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER to be considered valid.
7. Test Reports:
a. CONTRACTOR shall submit written detailed results of all functional, performance and operational testing.
b. Upon successful completion of Operational tes ting all equipment installation, testing and maintenance records shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. c. Said records shall be bound separately for each piece of equipment or system and shall be collected by type of record.
8. For factory tests, written test results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 10 days prior to shipment.
B. Functional testing:
1. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be functionally tested by the CONTRACTOR after installation for proper operation.
2. A minimum of ten (10) days prior to the start of functional testing, the CONTRACTOR shall submit interconnection diagrams for the equipment and for the alarms, controls and instruments associated with the equipment. This requirement shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of meeting any r equirements in the technical specifications for earlier submittal of the interconnection diagrams.
3. Minimum Test Requirements
a. The functional test of each piece of mechanical equipment shall continue for not less than eight (8) continuous hours without interruption. b. The functional test shall include checking for proper rotation, alignment, speed, flows, pressure, vibration, sound level, etc. Initial equipment and system adjustment and calibrations shall be performed in the presence of and with the assistance of the manufacturer's representative.
c. The functional test shall include a demonstration of the proper performance of all alarms, local and remote controls, instrumentation, equipment functions, and all other electrical, mechanical, and piping systems.
d. All parts shall operate satisfactorily in all respects, under continuous full load, and in accordance with the specified requirements, for the full duration of the eight-hour test period.
e. If any part of a unit shows evidence of unsatisfactory or imprope r operation during the eight-hour test period, correction or repairs shall be made and the full eight-hour test operation, as specified herein, shall be repeated after all parts operate satisfactorily.
C. Performance testing:
1. Where performance testing is requ ired by the Technical Specifications, the testing shall be supervise d by the manufacturer's representative. These services shall
01 75 06-5
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
continue until such times as the applicable equipment or system has been successfully tested for performance and has been acce pted by the ENGINEER for operational testing.
2. Performance testing shall take place after functional testing is successfully completed in accordance with Article 1.3 B.
3. Performance testing shall demonstrate that the equipment meets all performance requirements specified.
D. Startup/operational testing:
1. Upon successful completion of operator training and the functional, performance and leakage testing, the CONTRACTOR shall startup the facilities and test the equipment operation and performance by conductin g a seven (7) day, continuous operational test of the completed facilities as an operational process unit to demonstrate to the ENGINEER's satisfaction that all equipment and systems required by these specifications will operate in the manner in which they are intended to perform.
2. The CITY will provide CONTRACTOR-trained operating personnel for the duration of the operational test. Said operation shall be conducted and under the supervision and direction of the CONTRACTOR and/or manufacturer's representative.
3. Operational Defects:
a. All defects in materials or workmanship which appear during the operational test shall be immediately corrected by the CONTRACTOR.
b. In the event of a malfunction or deficiency that results in shutdown or partial operation of a system or process unit or results in performance that is less than that specified, the startup duration shall be repeated for that corresponding system or process unit and any other affected equipment so its proper operation and performance as required by the Contract Documents is demonstrated for a minimum of seven (7) continuous and trouble free days.
4. If the operational test is interrupted through no fault of the CONTRACTOR, the test may resume at the earliest mutually agreeable time.
5. No unit process or par t thereof shall be placed in service until it has successfully completed operational testing.
6. During plant startup, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the appropriate construction trades and the services of authorized Manufacturer's representatives for operational testing and as necessary, to correct faulty equipment operation.
7. After completion of all startup/operational testing, the CONTRACTOR shall repaint, hose, scrub, clean up and otherwise return the work to a "like new" condition, prior to CITY acceptance.
1.4 TRAINING OF CITY PERSONNEL
A. General:
1. Operation and maintenance trai ning of CITY's personnel shall be provided for mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and control equipment as listed in this Section or elsewhere in the Specifications.
2. For the purposes of this requirement, operations training is considered to be separate from maintenance training. Instructions are to be tailore d to the needs of each group.
3. These training services shall be conducted by the manufacturer's representative and shall ensure measurable and observable means that CITY’s personnel are qualified to perform equipment task requirements, including essential k nowledge, skills , and abilities.
01 75 06-6
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
4. Training shall be conducted by competent representatives who are certified by the manufacturer to be thoroughl y famil iar with the subject matter as well as instructional methods.
5. Training materials shall be submitted to the CITY (see Paragraph 1.4 C below) for review. Acceptance of training materials is required prior to start of training.
6. All training shall be completed prior to beginning operational testing.
7. The CITY shall have the right to videotape any or all training sessions, or may designate separate sessions or portions thereof for the sole purpose of videotaping.
B. Training coordinator:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall designate and provide one or more persons to be responsible for coordinating and expediting training duties.
2. The person or persons so designated shall be present at all training coordination meetings with the CITY.
C. Training schedule:
1. The CONTRACTOR's coordinator shall coordinate the training periods w ith CITY’s personnel and manufacturer's representatives, and shall submit a training schedule and the training materials for each piece of equipment or system for which training is to be provided.
2. The training schedule shall be submitted not less than 21 calendar days prior to the time that the associated training is to be provided and shall be based on the then current Plan of Operation.
3. Equipment and/or systems shall be deemed suitable for use in training upon satisfactory completion of functional testing.
4. All training with regards to a unit process or part thereof shall be completed prior to the start of operational testing.
5. As a minimum, training shall be provided on the following equipment and systems:
a. Pumps
b. Electrical Systems
c. Instrumentation and Controls
d. Generator
6. The CONTRACTOR shall provide distinct and separate training sessions for both operations and maintenance personnel, meeting the following criteria:
a. Maintenance Training:
1) Maintenance training shall be provided for all items in 1.4.C.5 above. 2) Maintenance training shall be scheduled on at least one day shift, Monday through Thursday.
3) Training shall emphasize theory of operations, troubleshooting, and preventative maintenance and repair procedures.
4) The discussion shall encompass issues relating to instrumentation, electrical, and mechanical systems.
b. Operations training:
1) Operations training shall be provided for each piece of e quipment listed in Paragraph 1.4.C.5 above.
2) Operations and/or Maintenance t raining sha ll be scheduled on t hree consecutive day shifts, Tuesday through Thursday.
c. Training session schedules shall be approved by the ENGINEER. d. Training shall emphasize theory of operations, startup instructions, emergency and normal shutdown instructi ons, lockou t procedures, trou bleshooting, preventative maintenance, and alarm and control logic.
01 75 06-7
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
7. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm each training period a minimum of three working days prior to the schedule time.
8. If a manufacturer's representative fails to condu ct a scheduled training class , the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to compensate the CITY for labor cos ts, including overhead, for all CITY personnel in attendance for the entire scheduled training period.
9. If the CONTRACTOR or the manufacturer's representative fails to provide training that qualifies the CITY personnel to perform equipment task requiremen ts, the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to provide remedial training to ensure CITY personnel proficiency at no additional cost to the CITY.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORD KEEPING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain as a minimum, the following records:
1. Equipment manufacturer's shop drawings.
2. Daily logs indicating all equipment testing and startup activities.
3. Log and time sheets of all manufacturer's representatives performing services on the jobsite.
4. Updated equipment testing and startup schedules.
5. Records of system cleaning.
6. Hydrostatic and pressure test records.
7. Equipment alignment and vibration measurements and corrective actions.
8. Equipment lubrication records.
9. Insulation resistance measurements.
10. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements.
11. Electrical breaker inspection, test, and adjustment records.
12. Logs of abnormal circuits and lifted wires.
13. Testing and validation of all central and alarm functions.
14. Data sheets of all testing and calibration of instrumentation devices and control loops including documentation of set points.
15. Equipment and system release logs (from construction to startup).
16. Daily work reports.
3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES
A. The general work procedures l isted below outl ine the work t o be performed by the CONTRACTOR. Additional procedures applicable to specific equipment items are specified elsewhere.
B. Technical assistance and support:
1. Obtain the assistance of the appropriate construction trades and the manufacturer or vendor, as required for technical assistance during equipment installation, testing, and startup by the CONTRACTOR and for training of the CITY's Opera tion and Maintenance personnel.
2. Furnish names and telephone numbers of manufacturer's and v endor's current technical service representatives for use by the ENGINEER.
01 75 06-8
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Instructions:
1. Maintain an adequate manufacturer's instruction file so that the information will be readily available during equipment testing and startup.
2. Prior to equipment testing , finalize, and t ransmit to t he ENGINEER the applicable technical manuals as required under Section 01 33 03, Submittal Procedures of the Contract Specifications.
D. Removal of rust preventives:
1. Prior to equipment testing, remove all rust preventives and oils used to protect the equipment during the construction period whenever these protective materials will be detrimental to operation or equipment maintenance.
E. Lubricants:
1. At least 60 days prior to startup, provide a list of the manufacturer's recommended lubricants for use i n the plant. All equipment lubrication shall be listed with the lubricant types an d quantities recommended and approved by the equipment manufacturers.
2. Provide the necessary lubricants for startup and the initial 60 days of operation.
3. Flush systems and install the initial charge of all lubricants. Dispose of flushing oil in accordance with applicable regulations.
4. The CONTRACTOR shall lubricate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations until the equipment is accepted by the CITY.
5. Maintain a lub rication record for each item of equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the lubrication records to the ENGINEER prior to equipment testing.
F. Packing and seals:
1. Install, adjust, and replace packing, mechanical seals, and accessories, as necessary, during the equipment testing and startup period.
2. Adjust seal water and flushi ng water flow rates in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Removal of temporary bracing:
1. Prior to equipment testing, remove all temporary supports, bracing, or other foreign objects that were installed in vessels, transformers, ro tating machinery, or other equipment to prevent damage during shipping, storage, and erection, and repair any damage sustained.
H. Rotation, alignment, and vibration:
1. Prior to equipment testing, check rotating machinery for correct direction of rotation and for freedom of moving parts before connecting the driver.
2. Prior to equipment testing, perform the cold alignment and hot alignment to the manufacturer's tolerances.
3. Prior to equi pment testing, test equipment vibration and correct any vibration in excess of the manufacturer's recommendation.
I. Tie-ins at the contract limits:
1. Provide proper notification, preparation, and coordination for safe tie-ins and minimal interference with the pump station operation.
2. Obtain approval and make the necessary tie-ins at the unit limits as required by the Contract Documents and as approved by the ENGINEER.
3. Prior to startup, remove the temporary blind flanges, plugs, bulkheads, seals, etc.
01 75 06-9
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
J. Leak and pressure tests:
1. Provide the ENGINEER with 3-day advance notification in writing of the schedule for non-operating field leak tests or field pressure tests on piping and field fabricated equipment, unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER.
2. Provide the water, air and any special media required for the test purposes.
3. Prior to startup, conduct a ll leak and pressure tests in accordance with applicable codes, regulations, and the Contract Documents, and as approved by the ENGINEER.
The CONTRACTOR is advised that the tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER, to be considered valid.
4. Maintain a record of the leak and pressure test data and work completed.
5. Dispose of the test media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the CITY and applicable regulatory agencies.
6. Isolate in-line equipment as necessary for protection against test pressure.
K. Pressure/vacuum safety relief devices:
1. Prior to equipment testing, test and adjust all safety devices as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Prior to plant startup, provide the ENGINEER with a list of all field or factory equipment settings.
L. Flushing and chemical/mechanical cleaning:
1. Prior to equipment operation, conduct all flushing, blowing, and chemical/mechanical cleaning operations without using the permanently installed equipment.
2. Provide any special media needed for flushing and/or cleaning purposes.
3. Dispose of all media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the CITY and the applicable regulatory agencies.
4. All systems shall be free of trash and construction debris before initiating startup.
5. Maintain a record of the work completed.
M. Screens, strainers, and blind flanges:
1. Provide and install temporary strainers, screens, and blind flanges as necessary to protect the equipment and to test the equipment and pipelines.
2. Prior to startup, remove all of the temporary blinds and temporary appurtenances.
3. Clean the screens and strainers as required during startup.
4. At the end of startup, clean all of the permanently installed screens and straine rs.
N. Purging/inerting:
1. Prior to startup, purge and/or passivate the facilities as specified.
2. Install pur ge/inerting connections in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Provide purge or inerting materials and conduct the necessary operations a s recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
O. Drying out:
1. Prior to startup, dry out the facilities as specified or recommended by the equipment manufacturer to prevent contamination of catalysts, operating materials, and/or product.
2. Dry out systems, protect ive coatings, refrac tories, and lin ings as specified or recommended by the equipment manufacturers.
01 75 06-10
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3.3 SPECIFIC PROCEDURES
A. In addition to the work responsibilities described in Subsection 3.2, the procedures outlined below further define the work responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR for specific systems and items of equipment.
B. Mechanical equipment:
1. Level baseplates and soleplates and grout under all load bearing surfaces.
2. Install suitable supports and flexible connections to alleviate any piping stresses that may be imposed on pumps, compressors, and drivers.
3. In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, chemically clean lube oil, seal oil, and cooling systems. Dispose of waste and cleaning media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the CITY and applicable regulatory agencies.
4. In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, charge th e lube oil, seal oil, and cooling systems with flushing media and circulate for cleaning purposes.
Dispose of any flushing media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the CITY and applicable regulatory agencies.
5. Charge the lube oil systems, seal oil systems, and cooling systems with the amount and type of operating oil or coolant recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Operate the equipment and check for excessive vibration, abnormal operating noises, overheating and lubricant leakage, etc., and test any safety shutdown/alarm devices for proper operation, and make any operating tests required by the ENGINEER. The adjustments required for proper operation shall be made prior to operational testing.
7. Utilize manufacturer's representative for technical assistance during installation and startup.
8. Prior to startup, all sidewalks, gratings, handrails, safety chains, safety shields, etc., shall be installed.
9. Prior to startup, demons trate to t he ENGINEER's satisfaction that all chemical solution pipelines are connected to the intended pump(s) and application points, and that the pipes, appurtenances contained therein and diffusers will oper ate at the intended flow rates.
10. Prior to startup, the applicable safety equipment, emergency shower an d eyewash units, fire extinguishers, fire suppression equipment, self -contained breathing apparatus, toxic and/or combustible gas detectors (including the respective personnel warning system), protective clothing, emergency repair kits, etc., shall be installed in an acceptable manner-subject to the ENGINEER's approval, and be fully ready for operation.
11. All safety hazards, e.g., exposed drive shafts or rotating equipment members, exposed electrical circuitry, open electrical junction boxes and panels, impro perly supported piping and conduits, missing safety devices, etc., shall be corrected prior to supplier training of the CITY's personnel.
12. The CONTRACTOR shall perform a comprehensive safety inspection and correct any safety deficiencies found before implementing plant startup.
13. Roadways that are required for ambulance service, fire fighting access, delivery of treatment chemicals and supplies, and disposal of the treatment byproducts shall be completed prior to startup.
14. Prior to startup, install all warning and safety signs, labels, and devices.
C. Electrical power and lighting systems:
1. Provide the ENGINEER with 3-day advance notification in writing of the test schedule.
The CONTRACTOR is advised that the tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER.
01 75 06-11
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Perform insulation resistance tests on all wiring 120 volt and larger. Do not use meggar instruments or solid-state devices.
3. Perform insulation resistance tests on all motor and transformer windings from phase to phase and phase to ground.
4. Perform grounding system tests to determine the continuity of connections and the value of resistance to ground.
5. Fill electrical gear with oil and/or other media as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
6. Prior to energizing electrical equipment, startup, test and set switchgear and circuit breaker relays for proper coordination and operation.
7. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a qualified "independent testing service", member of the National Ele ctric Testing Associati on, to perform a thermographic survey on all switchgear buses, insulators and power connections when energized and under at least 20 percent load. Significant hot spots shall be further checked by infrared pyrometer for exact temperature rise. The CONTRACTOR shall troubleshoot and correc t the thermographic hot spots. Correction shall be verified by repeating the thermographic survey at no additional cost to the CITY.
8. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a qualifi ed "independen t testing service", member of the National Electric Testing Association, to inspect and test the protective relays and the 800 -ampere and larger drawout breakers for proper installation, adjustment, and operation in accordance with th e manufa cturer recommendations.
9. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a qualified "independent testing service", member of the National Electrical Testing Association, to perform DC high potential tests on all cables that will operate at more than 2,000 volts to ground.
10. Obtain local electrical inspector's approval where required.
11. Energize all substations, with approval of the Utility Company and the ENGINEER after completion of all electrical testing.
12. Prior to startup, perform tests and adjustments on all switchgear and motor control equipment to demonstrate proper operation and conformance to the Contract Documents and manufacturer's recommended settings.
13. Prior to startup, test installation of emergency power and lighting systems for proper operation, including light intensity.
14. Prior to startup, provide the ENGINEER with a record of all test data and the work completed.
15. Vacuum clean all electrical equipment prior to startup and acceptance.
D. Piping systems:
1. Provide the ENGINEER with 3-day advance notification in writing of test schedule.
2. Hydrostatically or pneumatically test all piping as required by the codes and contract documents.
3. After successful testing of the piping, slowly drain the system and then flush the system. Orifice plates shall be installed after testing. If installed with the piping, they will be removed and replaced with spacers or pipe spools of equal length prior to the pressure test.
4. Dewater the system, remove blind flanges, and perform tightness tests, as required by the ENGINEER.
5. Insulate or paint piping, flanges, threaded joints, or field welds after the specified testing of each item has been completed unless instructed otherwise b y the ENGINEER.
01 75 06-12
Testing, Training and Startup
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
6. Leave exposed all welded joints (longitudinal, girth, and nozzle) in underground piping that have not been shop tested until the specified testing has been completed.
After final testing of these joints, cover the system.
7. Prior to substantial completion and startup, check pipe hangers, supports, guides, and pipe specialties for the removal of all shipping and erection stops and for the correctness of the cold and hot settings for the design service. Make adjustments as necessary to obtain proper installation. Provide the ENGINEER with instructions for the hot settings.
8. As necessary during equipment testing and at the end of substantial completion and startup, clean or replace the screens and filter elements as appropriate for the filter type and service.
9. Prior to startup, verify, to the extent required by the ENGINEER, that specified valve packing has been provided on valves installed in the plant.
10. Prior to startup, install all of the valve and piping system identification labels.
11. Prior to startup, check and record the position of all process system valves.
12. Prior to startup, correct support, vibration, and thermal expansion problems detected during the preliminary equipment testing.
13. Prior to the startup, retorque all hot and cold service bolting as required to ensure a permanent and proper installation.
14. Prior to startup, demonstrate to the ENGINEER's satisfaction that each piping system (e.g., chemical, sample, util ity, irrigation process, etc.) functions as designed and required by the Contract Documents.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01 77 03-1
Operational Completion and Project Closeout
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 01 77 03
OPERATIONAL COMPLETION AND PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near the end of the Contract Time, in preparation for Final Completion, Final Payment, normal termination of Contract, occupancy by CITY and similar actions evidencing completion of the Work.
B. Specific requirements for individual units of Work are specified in Sections of Divisions 2 through 43.
C. Where a conflict exists between this section and the Contract Documents, the conditions in the Contract Documents take precedence.
1.2 CERTIFICATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to requesting the ENGINEER's inspection for certification of each phase as Substantially Complete, the CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that each phase of the Work is Substantially C omplete and shall submit a list of known items still to be completed or corrected (Contractor’s punchlist) prior to Contract Completion.
B. The following items shall be completed:
1. CITY has been advised of any pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Specific warranties, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents have been submitted.
3. All tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items have been delivered to CITY.
4. Instruction of CITY's operation/maintenance personnel and start up testing has been completed.
5. Submittal and acceptance of all O&M manuals.
6. Changeover of locks to CITY's cores/keys.
C. Punchlist:
1. When the CONTRACTOR considers that the Work, or a portion or phase thereof which the CITY agrees to accept separately, is Substantially Complete, the CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that the work is Substantially Complete and shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to Contract Completion (punchlist).
2. The ENGINEER may add additional work items to the punchlist.
3. Failure to include an item on the punchlist does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4. Upon receipt of the CONTRACTOR's punchlist, the ENGINEER will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is Substantially Complete.
5. If the ENGINEER's inspection discloses any item, whethe r or not included on the CONTRACTOR's list, that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, upon notification by the ENGINEER and before
01 77 03-2
Operational Completion and Project Closeout
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
an issuance of the Certificate of Operational Completion is provided, complete or correct such item.
6. The CONTRACTOR shall then submit a request for another inspection by the ENGINEER.
7. When the Work or designated portion thereof is accepted by the ENGINEER to be Substantially Complete , the ENGINEER will prepare a Certificate of Operational Completion.
8. The date of Operational Completion shall be the date of the ENGINEER's inspection and acceptance.
1.3 FINAL CLEANUP
A. At completion, leave project clean and ready for use.
1. Legally dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish off the site.
2. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, lab els, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from exposed and enclosed surfaces.
3. Repair, patch and touch up all affected curbs, gutters, and sidewa lks to match adjacent surfaces.
4. Broom clean paved surfaces, rake clean other surfaces of grounds. Vacuum clean all interior surfaces, rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
1.4 CONTRACT AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit Contract As-Built Drawings for the CITY.
1. The CONTRACTOR shall make a record of changes during construction on prints of the Drawings provided by the CITY for this purpose (Contract As-Built Drawings) as described in Section 01 33 03, Submittal Procedures.
2. ENGINEER will verify on a monthly basis and provide written verification that th e Contract As-Built Drawings are being developed and kept updated prior to submitting CONTACTOR’S progress payment to the CITY.
3. The reproducible drawings on which changed conditions are recorded shall be returned to the ENGINEER prior to Final Completion.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. The Contract Documents cover the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to remedy defects due to faulty workmanship and materials.
B. Special warranties are required by various Sections of these Specifications. Assemble written warranties, label and submit to the ENGINEER.
1. Equipment warranties shall be written in the manufacturer's standard form and shall be countersigned by the Subcontractor or supplier and the CONTRACTOR.
2. All other warranties shall be written on the Subcontractor's or supplier's letterhead and shall be countersigned by the CONTRACTOR.
1.6 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Spare parts and maintenance materials are required by various Sections of the Specifications.
1. Parts and materials shall be packaged so as to preclude damage in normal handling and storage.
01 77 03-3
Operational Completion and Project Closeout
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Packages shall be labeled w ith full description of contents and project name and clearly identified as to which item of equipment they belong to. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a spare parts inventory list which shall be provided to the CITY prior to Final Completion.
3. Submit packaged parts and materials to ENGINEER.
4. Submit the value of all spare parts.
1.7 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Prior to requesting ENGINEER's final inspection for certification of Final Completion and Final Payment, complete the following and list known exceptions (if any):
1. Submit Final Payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted.
2. Submit copy of final punchlist of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, endorsed and dated by ENGINEER.
3. Submit Consent of Surety.
4. Revise and submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
B. Certify in writing that the work has b een completed in accordance with the Cont ract Documents, and request ENGINEER's final inspection.
C. Reinspection:
1. Within seven (7) days after receipt of the CONTRACTOR's notice that the work has been completed, including punchlist items resulting from earlie r inspections, and excepting incomplete i tems delayed because of acceptable circumstance, the ENGINEER will reinspect the work.
2. Upon completion of reinspection, ENGINEER will either prepare a certificate of Final Completion or advise the CONTRACTOR of work not complete or obligations not fulfilled as required for Final Completion.
3. If necessary, inspection procedure will be repeated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01 77 03-4
Operational Completion and Project Closeout
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
02 41 03-1
Demolition
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 02 41 03
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. “Demolish”: CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site as property of CONTRACTOR.
Demolition includes disconnecting, removal, loading, repairs, cleanup, transportation, unloading, disposal permits and fees, disposal, and all other items required to remove the material from the site.
B. “Salvage”: CONTRACTOR shall remove from area of Work and place in location designated by ENGINEER. Equipment is property of CITY. Salvage includes disconnecting, removal, repairs, cle anup, loading, transportation, unloading, and all other items required to remove and relocate the material.
C. “CITY to Remove”: CITY will remove from area of Work prior to CONTRACTOR commencing demolition Work for this area.
D. “Relocate”: CONTRACTOR shall r elocate material shown to new locations shown on Drawings or stated herein. Relocation includes disconnecting, removal, reconnecting, attaching, repairs, and all other items required to relocate material to new location.
E. “Abandon”: CONTRACTOR shall disconnect and leave in place as specified.
F. “Materials”: Any and all items and objects that are scheduled, specified, or shown to be demolished, salvaged, removed, relocated, or abandoned.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals:
1. Product Information: Grout, sealants, and bonding agents to be used for patching.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Plan and schedule phased demolition, including limits of demolition, as part of and consistent with the progress schedule specified in Section 01 32 13, PROGRESS SCHEDULE.
2. Methods of demolition and equipment proposed to demolish materials.
3. Copies of any authorizations and permits required to perform Work.
4. Copies of Hazardous Materials Inspection Reports.
5. Repair procedures for demolition of materials beyond limits shown on Drawings.
02 41 03-2
Demolition
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all materials and equipment in suitable and adequate quantity as required to accomplish the Work shown, specified herein, and as required to complete the Project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Drawings are based on available information. The Work may differ slightly from what is shown. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining the work required by inspecting the site.
3.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. All Work shall be done in conformance with all applicable rules and regulations pertaining to safety.
B. Hazardous Materials:
1. See General Conditions.
2. Existing facilities, or portions thereof, to be demolished may contain hazardous materials such as asbestos cement piping, residual chemicals in existing or abandoned piping, lead-based paint, mercury sea ls, or other unknown hazardous materials.
3.3 SEQUENCE
A. Be responsible for the sequence of Work.
B. Conform to constraints as specified in Section 01 14 03, SPECIAL PROJECT CONSTRAINTS.
3.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordination with ENGINEER:
1. Only materials specified herein, shown on the Demolition Photographs or the Drawings, or approved by ENGINEER in the field shall be demolished, salvaged, removed, relocated, or abandoned.
2. Verify materials scheduled to be demolished, salvaged, removed, relocate d, or abandoned with ENGINEER prior to performing Work.
3. Do not remove materials without prior approval of ENGINEER.
4. Provide at least 3 working days’ notice to ENGINEER prior to start of Work.
5. Notify ENGINEER to turn off affected services or facilities before starting Work.
6. Provide temporary services during interruptions to affected services or facilities as acceptable to ENGINEER.
7. ENGINEER will indicate limits of Work if not clearly shown.
B. Coordination with Utility Owners:
02 41 03-3
Demolition
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Notify utility owners to turn off affected services or facilities before starting Work.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to utility owners prior to shutdown, unless otherwise directed by utility owners.
3. Provide temporary services during interruptions to affected services or facilities as acceptable to utility owners.
3.5 LIMITS
A. Drawings define minimum portions of materials to be demolished. Unless otherwise shown, rough cuts or breaks may be made to limits of demolition shown. If rough cuts or breaks are made exceeding limits shown, CONTRACTOR shall repair the cuts or breaks back to the dimensions shown on Drawings at CONTRACTOR’s expense.
B. If limits are not clear on the Drawings or Demolition Photographs, limits shall be as directed by ENGINEER.
C. All areas not within the limits of demolition Work shown on the Drawings, or as specified herein, shall be left undisturbed, unless necessary for demolition of materials.
3.6 DEMOLITION
A. General:
1. Inspect condition of materials to be demolished prior to bidding to assess potential for salvage value.
2. Remove all materials associated with existing equipment that is to be demolished.
3. Materials within limits of demolition will become the property of CONTRACTOR.
4. All materials from the demolition process shall be removed safely from the project site as soon as pos sible. They shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable federal, state, and city regulations. CONTRACTOR is responsible for determining these regulations and shall bear all costs associated with disposal of the materials.
B. Pavement and Curbs:
1. Provide saw cut at all concrete and pavement surfaces and curb removal limits and where neat connection lines are required.
2. Surfaces exposed by demolition activities shall be repaired and finished to provide a uniform, smooth, level transition between adjacent surfaces.
C. Concrete, CMU, and Reinforcing:
1. In areas where concrete or CMU portions are to be removed from a structure, the edge of removal shall be cut with a concrete saw to leave a perpendicular edge or by core-drilling where a circular hole is required.
2. Damaged concrete shall be removed to solid concrete. Damaged concrete shall include concrete that is soft, spalled, cracked, or otherwise damaged as determined by ENGINEER.
3. Depth of removal shall be as determined by ENGINEER unless otherwise shown or specified.
4. Reinforcing shall be cut and re moved unless otherwise shown or instructed by ENGINEER.
5. Spalled edges may be required to be re-sawn at the discretion of the ENGINEER.
6. Protect adjacent structures and equipment from damage during Work.
7. Exposed surfaces fo llowing demolition activities shall be repaired and finished to provide a uniform, smooth, and level transition between adjacent surfaces.
02 41 03-4
Demolition
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
8. Remove and repair designated cracked and damaged concrete areas shown in accordance with this section and Section 03 30 03, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
D. Concrete Embedded Items:
1. Except for core drills, demolish anchor bolts, reinforcing steel, conduit, and other materials that are concrete embedded to a minimum of 1 inch below final finished surface. For core drills, coat rebar exposed by core drilling with System No. 304 in accordance with Section 09 91 03, PAINTING.
2. Plug empty pipes and conduits with fireproof sealant to maintain fire ratings for floors or walls.
3. Patching:
a. Demolish damaged concrete. Damaged concrete shall be removed to solid concrete. Damaged concrete shall include concrete that is soft, spalled, cracked, or otherwise damaged as determined by ENGINEER.
b. Coat with approved bonding agent.
c. Patch with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
E. Piping:
1. Pressurized Services: Install restrained caps or plugs at the demolished ends, unless otherwise shown.
2. Gravity Services: Install concrete plugs, 5-foot minimum length.
F. Utilities:
1. Excavate utility lines serving structures to be demolished.
2. Demolish electrical, sanitary, and storm d rainage lines serving structures to be demolished.
3. Support or relocate utility lines exposed by Work.
4. For water and gas lines to be demolished or capped and terminated, provide a permanent leakproof closure. Closure type shall be as recommended by utility owner.
G. Electrical:
1. Remove conduits and wir ing from materials to be demolished back to nearest junction box.
2. For existing circuits to remain operational, intercept existing conduit at the most convenient location, or as shown, and splice and extend conduit to new location.
Install new conductors as required to accomplish intended results. New conductors shall be continuous without splices between junction boxes.
3. For existing circuits no longer needed, demolish conductors from conduits.
4. Demolish all surface-mounted conduit which is no longer needed.
5. For conduit below grade or concealed within walls, cap and abandon in place.
3.7 SALVAGE
A. Salvage materials for CITY’s own use where shown.
B. Remove materials with extreme care so as not to damage.
C. Promptly remove materials from Work area.
D. Store materials in location designated by ENGINEER.
E. Clean and protect materials from dust, dirt, natural elements, and store as directed.
02 41 03-5
Demolition
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3.8 RELOCATION
A. ENGINEER will determine condition of materials prior to removal.
B. Remove all materials associated with items to be relocated.
C. Existing materials shall not be damaged during removal.
D. Properly store and maintain materials in same condition as when removed.
E. Clean and protect materials from dust, dirt, natural elements, and store as directed.
3.9 ABANDONMENT
A. Structures: Break holes into or core drill floor slabs, catch basins, and other below-grade concrete structures to be abandoned in place to allow water to freely migrate through.
B. Piping and Conduits:
1. General: Piping and conduits to be abandoned shall be capped with a watertight plug at demolished end in a manner that will prevent entrance of soil, groundwater, or moisture.
2. Pressurized Services: Install restrained caps or plugs at the demolished ends, unless otherwise shown.
3. Gravity Services: Install concrete plugs, 5-foot minimum length.
3.10 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. Any damaged materials scheduled to be salvaged or relocated shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of ENGINEER or replaced at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.
B. Any damage to areas not within the limits of demolition Work shown on the Demolition Photographs, Drawings, or as specified herein shall be repaired or replaced to original precontract conditions at the CONTRACTOR’s sole expense.
3.11 DISPOSAL
A. Dispose of materials offsite in licensed landfills and in accordance with all loca l, state, and federal regulations. CONTRACTOR is responsible for obtaining any and all necessary permits for disposal.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
02 41 03-6
Demolition
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
03 21 03-1
Concrete Reinforcing
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 03 21 03
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Fabrication and placement of reinforcement including bars, ties and supports, and welded wire fabric for concrete, encasements and fireproofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all materials and reinforcement accessories.
2. Drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315, Parts A and B. For walls, show elevations to a minimum scale of 1/4- inch to 1-foot. For slabs, show top and bottom reinforcing on separate plan views.
Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and assemblies, as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement, unless otherwise noted. Keep splices to a minimum. Avoid splices in regions of maximum tension stresses whenever possible.
B. Certificates: Submit one (1) copy of steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile and bend tests for reinforcing steel.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. ACI 315, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforce d Concrete Structures.
b. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:
a. Manual of Standard Practice, includes ASTM standards referred to herein.
B. Allowable Placing Tolerances: Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7 - Details of Reinforcement.
1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Deliver concrete reinforcement materials to the site bundled, tagged and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams.
03 21 03-2
Concrete Reinforcing
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. Store concrete reinforcement material at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or excessive rust. Store on heavy wood blocking so that no part of it will come in contact with the ground.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for all non-welded bars. ASTM A706, Grade 60 for welded bars.
B. Smooth Steel Dowels: ASTM A36.
1. Epoxy coated conforming to ASTM A775 or ASTM A934.
C. Mechanical Couplers: Reinforcement bars may be spliced with a mechanical connection.
Provide a full mechanical connection which shall develop in tension or compression, as required, at least 125% of specified yield strength (fy) of the bar in accordance with ACI 318 Section 12.14.3.2. The locations of the connections are subject to the approval of the ENGINEER.
1. Dayton Superior Bar Lock S/CA Series.
2. Or approved equal
D. Threaded Splicing Systems: Dowel Bar Splicer System shall comply with ICC Report #4028. The completed splice shall exceed 160% of the specified yield strength (fy) of the bar.
1. Dayton Superior DB/DI parallel threaded couplers.
2. Or approved equal
E. Steel Wire: ASTM A82.
F. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls.
G. Column Spirals: Hot-rolled rods for spirals, ASTM A615.
H. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolste rs, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place.
1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, except as specified below. Do not use wood, brick, or other unacceptable materials.
2. For slabs on grade, use 5000 psi concrete blocks.
3. At all formed surfaces, provide supports complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" as follows: Plastic protected or stainless steel legs.
4. For all PVC lined concrete surfaces, provide supports complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" as follows: Either plastic or metal plastic protected legs.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI, "Manual of Standa rd Practice". In case of
03 21 03-3
Concrete Reinforcing
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
fabricating errors, do not re-bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material.
B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the Work:
1. Bar lengths, bends, and other dimensions exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.
2. Bends or kinks not shown on approved Shop Drawings.
3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrate and conditions under which concrete reinforcement is to be placed with installer, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the applicable recommendations of specified codes and standards, and CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports.
B. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, oil, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during formwork construction or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
1. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum concrete cover as shown. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16 -gauge wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Slab and wall bars shall be tied at every intersection around the periphery of the slab or wall and not less than every 48 inches in the field at walls and 60 inches in the field at slabs.
2. Bar supports shall be placed no further than 4 feet apart in each direction. Supports must be completely concealed in the concrete and shall not discolor or otherwise mar the surface of the concrete.
3. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces.
4. Do not secure reinforcing steel to forms with wire, nails or other ferrous metal. Do not permit metal supports subject to corrosion to touch or be within the required clearance to formed or exposed concrete surfaces.
D. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practical. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.
03 21 03-4
Concrete Reinforcing
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
E. Provide sufficient numbers of supports of strength required to carry reinforcement. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 inches beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment or similar construction loads.
F. Splices: Provide reinforcement lap splices by placing bars in contact, and tying tightly with wire. Comply with requirements shown for minimum lap of spliced bars.
G. Mechanical Couplers in Lieu of Lap Splicing:
1. Provide mechanical butt splices in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer of the mechanical splicing device. Butt splices shall develop 125 percent of the specified minimum yield tensile strength of the spliced bars or of the smaller bar in transition splices. Fl ame dry bars before butt splicing. Provide adequate jigs and clamps or other devices to support, align, and hold the longitudinal centerline of the bars to be butt spliced in a straight line.
H. Reinforcement Around Openings: Place an equivalent area of steel around the pipe or opening and extend on each side sufficiently to develop bond in each bar. See the Details on Drawings for bar extension length each side of opening. Where welded wire fabric is used, provide extra reinforcing using fabric or deformed bars.
I. Field Bending: Field bending of reinforcing steel bars is not permitted when rebending will later be required to straighten bars. Rebending of bars at the same place where strain hardening has taken place due to the original bend will damage the bar. Consult with the ENGINEER prior to any pour if the CONTRACTOR foresees a need to work out a solution to prevent field bending.
3.3 INSPECTION OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Do not place concrete until the reinforcing steel is inspected and permission for placing concrete is granted by ENGINEER. All concrete placed in violation of this provision will be rejected.
++ END OF SECTION ++
03 30 03-1
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 03 30 03
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Place, finish, cure, strip, and repair concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.
2. ACI 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete.
3. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, (includes ASTM Standards referred to herein).
4. ACI 304, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
5. ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting.
6. ACI 306, Cold Weather Concreting.
7. ACI 309, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.
8. ACI 311, Guide for Concrete Inspection.
9. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
10. ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete
11. ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Class A Concrete shall be steel reinforced and includes:
1. Foundations.
2. Walls.
3. Slabs.
4. Beams.
5. Girders.
6. Columns.
7. Equipment bases.
8. Pipe supports.
B. Class B Concrete shall be placed without forms or with simple forms, with little or no reinforcing, and includes:
1. Concrete fill.
2. Curbs and gutters.
3. Sidewalks.
4. Thrust blocks.
5. Encasements.
03 30 03-2
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise may be requested by ENGINEER, including names, sources and descriptions.
B. Product Data: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's specifications with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures and bonding agents.
2. List of concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use. Include the results of all tests performed to qualify the materials and to establish the mix designs.
C. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory test reports for materials and mix design tests
D. Delivery Tickets: Furnish t o ENGINEER copies of all weighmaster certificate delivery tickets for each load of concrete delivered to the site. Provide items of information as specified in ASTM C94, Section 16. Delivery tickets shall be signed by a Certified Weighmaster.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tests for Concrete Materials: Submit written reports to ENGINEER, for each material sampled and tested, prior to the start of Work. Provide the Project identification name and number, date of report, name of CONTRACTOR, name of concrete testing servic e, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for intended use.
B. If the concrete mix designs specified herein have not been used previously by the ready- mix supplier, mix proportions and concrete strength curves for regular cylinder tests shall be established by an approved ready -mix supplier or an independent testing laboratory based on the relationship of 7, 14 and 28 day strengths versus slump values of 2, 4 and 6 inches, all conforming to these Specifications. A laboratory, independent of the ready-mix supplier, shall be required to prepare and test all concrete cylinders. The costs for preparation of mix designs, not previously used by the ready-mix supplier, and testing of concrete and materials shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement:
1. Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type II; or blended hydraulic cement, ASTM C595, Type 1P (MS).
2. Do not use cement which has deteriorated because of improper storage or handling.
B. Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified.
03 30 03-3
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts, substances such as iron sulfides, pyrite, marcasite, ochre, or other materials that can cause stains on exposed concrete surfaces.
2. Fine Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, natural s and free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
3. Coarse Aggregate: Provide clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as follows:
a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Coarse Aggregate Size: Size to be ASTM C33, Nos. 57 or 67, except that No. 467 may be used for footings, foundation mats and walls 16 inches or greater in thickness.
C. Water: Clean, free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
2.2 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES
A. Provide admixtures produced by established reputable manufacturers, and use in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. Do not use admixtures that have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes, unless otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER.
B. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260.
1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. SIKA AER, as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
b. MasterAir AE 200, as manufactured by BASF.
c. Daravair, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Conn.
d. Or approved equal.
C. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (“Superplasticizer”): ASTM C494, Type F/G.
1. Superplasticizer shall be used in all Class A Concrete. Do not use high range water-reducing admixture containing more chloride ions than are contained in municipal drinking water. Add only at the job site to concrete in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Sikament 320, as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
b. MasterGlenium, as manufactured by BASF.
c. Daracem-100, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Conn.
d. Or approved equal.
D. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1. A water-reducing, aqueous solution of a modification of the salt of polyhydroxylated organic acids. Do not use admixture containing any lignin, nitrates or chlorides added during manufacture.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Eucon WR-75, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. MasterPozzolith, as manufactured by BASF.
c. WRDA series, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Conn.
d. Or approved equal.
03 30 03-4
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
E. Pozzolanic Admixtures:
1. Pozzolanic admixtures shall not be used in structures with concrete in contact with potable water, but may be used in other concrete.
2. Provide Mineral admixtures, when used, meeting the requirements of ASTM C618 Class F.
3. A substitution by weight, of the portland cement by pozzolan, so that the total tricalcium aluminate content of the resulting cement plus pozzolan is not greater than 8%, will be considered. However, the pozzolan shall not exceed 20% by weight of the cement plus pozzolan.
F. Set-Control Admixtures: ASTM C494, as follows:
1. Type B, Retarding.
2. Type C, Accelerating.
3. Type D, Water-reducing and Retarding.
4. Type E, Water-reducing and Accelerating.
5. Type F, Water-reducing, high range admixtures.
6. Type G, Water-reducing, high range, and retarding admixtures.
G. Color Pigments:
1. Color pigments for colored concrete must be of iron oxides complying with ASTM C979.
H. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride where concrete is placed against galvanized steel.
2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes of concrete. Mixes subject to the following limitations:
1. Class A Concrete
a. Specified 28-day Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi minimum. b. Air content: 5% ± 1%. For concrete placed at least 2 feet below the adjacent grade, an air-entraining admixture is not required unless otherwise specified. c. Slump, before addition of superplasticizer: 3½ inches ± ½ inches d. Slump, after addition of superplasticizer: 8-inch maximum
Coarse
Aggregate
Size
Cementitious
Content-Pounds Per
Cubic Yard
Water-Cement
Ratio by Weight
¾” 625 min, 800 max 0.375
1” 600 min, 800 max 0.385
1 ½” 590 min, 800 max 0.400
e. Use superplasticizer in all Class A Concrete. Use water reducers in combination with superplasticizers as required for mixing.
2. Class B Concrete
a. Specified 28-day Compressive Strength: 2,500 psi.
b. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio by Weight: 0.49.
c. Slump: 3-inch Minimum, 5-inch Maximum.
03 30 03-5
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to ENGINEER for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Admixtures:
1. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete, except interior slabs subject to abrasion, unless otherwise shown or specified. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the prescribed limits.
2. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacture r for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.
D. Colored Concrete:
1. The dosage of colored pigments for colored concrete must not exceed 10 percent by weight of cementitious materials in the concrete mix design.
2. When test panels are specified, cementitious materials and aggregates from the same sources used in the authorized test panel must be used for the colored concrete in the completed work.
2.4 EPOXY BONDING AGENT
A. For use in all dry-packed holes, concrete repair and for unplanned cold-joints.
B. Provide an epoxy-resin bonding agent, two component, polysulfide type.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LPL, as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
2. Eucopoxy LPL, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company.
3. Or approved equal.
2.5 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 10 ounces per square yard and complying with AASHTO M182, Class 3.
B. Moisture Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171.
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. White burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Curing Compound: ASTM C309 Type 1-D (water retention requirements):
1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Super Aqua Cure VOX, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sealtight 1100, as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Incorporated. c. Or approved equal.
D. Concrete Densifier and Chemical Hardener (Surface Applied)
1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. LS, as manufactured by Consolideck.
b. Liqui-Hard, as manufactured by W. R. Meadows.
03 30 03-6
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
c. Duro-Nox LS, as manufactured by Nox-Crete.
d. Or approved equal.
2.6 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Provide and install items such as plates, angles, inserts, bolts and similar items not specified elsewhere under this Section. Carbon steel embedded items shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
B. Abrasive Stair Nosings
1. Provide single-component stair nosing
2. 3-inch width
3. Aluminum Extrusion, with provisions for anchoring into concrete
4. Extruded with multiple channels, dovetail shaped, filled with aluminum oxide grit set in epoxy resin
5. Designed for installation before concrete sets, at the front edge of the stair
6. Provide continuous stair nosings, width of stairway less 3 inches on each side . No splices in stair nosings.
7. Manufacturers/Models:
a. Balco; Model R-315P
b. Babcock Davis; Model BSTTB
c. Or Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Provide concrete produced by the ready-mixed process.
B. Comply with the requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. Proposed changes in mixing procedures, other than herein specified, must be accepted by ENGINEER before implementation.
1. Plant equipment and facilities: Conform to National Ready- Mix Concrete Association “Plant and Delivery Equipment Specification.”
2. Mix concrete in revolving type truck mixers that are in good condition and which produce thoroughly mixed concrete of the specified consistency and strength.
3. Do not exceed the proper capacity of the mixer.
4. Mix concrete for a minimum of two minutes after arrival at the job site, or as recommended by the mixer manufacturer.
5. Mix concrete during transit only as recommended by the mixer manufacturer.
6. Mix at proper speed until concrete is discharged.
7. Maintain adequate facilities at the job site for continuous delivery of concrete at the required rates.
8. Provide access to the mixing plant for ENGINEER at all times.
03 30 03-7
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3.2 TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
A. Transport and place concrete not more than 90 minutes after water has been added to the dry ingredients or before 250 revolutions of the drum or blades, whichever occurs first.
B. If an admixture is used to retard the set time and the concrete temperature does not exceed 85 degrees F, the travel and placing time may be extended to 120 minutes or 300 revolutions of the drum or blades, whichever occurs first.
C. Take care to avoid spilling and separation of the mixture during transportation.
D. Do not place concrete in which the ingredients have been separated.
E. Do not retemper partially set concrete.
F. Use suitable and approved equipment for transporting concrete from mixer to forms.
3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General: Place concrete continuously so that no concrete will be placed on concrete, which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified in Section 03 15 16, Concrete Joints. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure that will cause segregation.
1. Screed concrete that is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid excessive skimming or grouting.
2. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign materials. Do not use retempered concrete. Remove rejected concrete from the job site and dispose of it in an acceptable location.
3. Do not place concrete until all forms, bracing, reinforcement, and embedded items are in final and secure position.
4. Do not place in cold weather, unless adequate precautions are taken against frost action.
5. Do not place footings, piers or pile caps on frozen soil.
6. Unless otherwise approved, place concrete only when ENGINEER is present.
7. Allow a minimum of 3 days of curing before placing new concrete against a slab or wall already in place.
B. Concrete Conveying:
1. Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to the concrete conveying equipment and to the locations of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods that will prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials.
2. Provide mechanical equipment for conveying concrete to ensure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Provide runways for wheeled concrete conveying equipment from the concrete delivery point to the locations of final deposit. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipme nt, including chutes, free of hardened concrete, debris, water, ice and other deleterious materials.
03 30 03-8
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3. Pumping concrete is permitted, however do not use aluminum pipe for conveying.
C. Placing Concrete into Forms:
1. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place concrete at such a rate that concrete that is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.
2. Do not permit concrete to free fall within the form from a distance exceeding 8 feet, except as noted in Section 03 11 03, Concrete Formwork. Use “elephant trunks” or “wall pipes” to prevent free fall and excessive splashing on forms and reinforcement.
3. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when con crete placing has reached the elevation of such spreaders.
4. Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance wit h the applicable recommended practices of ACI 309. Vibration of forms and reinforcing will not be permitted.
5. Vibrators shall have a frequency of at least 8,000 vpm, with amplitude required to consolidate the concrete in the section being placed. At least one stand-by vibrator in operable condition shall be at the placement site prior to initiating placement of the concrete.
6. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the layer of concrete and at least 6 inches into the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix.
7. The forms shall contain sufficient windows or be limited in heigh t to allow visual observation of the concrete and the vibrator operators shall be required to see the concrete being consolidated to ensure good quality workmanship or the CONTRACTOR shall have a person who is actually observing the vibration of the concrete at all times and advising the vibrator operators of any changes need ed to assure complete consolidation.
8. Do not place concrete in beam and slab forms until the concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic.
9. Force concrete under pipes, sleeves, openings and inserts from one side until visible from the other side to prevent voids.
D. Placing Concrete Slabs and Footings:
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
2. Consolidate concrete during placing operations using mechanical vibrating equipment, so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
3. Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs, and against bulkheads of slabs on ground, as specified for formed concrete structures.
4. Bring surfaces to the correct level. Smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
03 30 03-9
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
E. Bonding for Next Concrete Pour: Per Section 03 15 16, Concrete Joints.
F. Quality of Concrete Work:
1. Make all concrete solid, compact and smooth, and free of laitance, cracks and cold joints.
2. All concrete for liquid retaining structures, and all concrete in contact with earth, water, or exposed directly to the elements shall be watertight.
3. Cut out and properly replace to the extent ordered by ENGINEER, or repair to the satisfaction of ENGINEER, surfaces which contain cracks or voids, are unduly rough, or are in any way defective. Thin patches or plastering will not be acceptable.
4. Repair all leaks through concrete, and cracks, holes or other defective concrete in areas of potential leakage and make watertight.
5. Repair, remove, and replace defective concrete as ordered by ENGINEER at no additional cost to CITY.
G. Cold Weather Placing:
1. Protect all concrete Work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with the requirements of ACI 306 and as herein specified.
2. When the air temperature has fallen to or may b e expected to fall below 40°F, provide adequate means to maintain the temperature, in the area where concrete is being placed, at between 50°F and 70°F for at least seven days after placing. Provide temporary housings or coverings including tarpaulins or p lastic film. Maintain the heat and protection, if necessary, to ensure that the ambient temperature does not fall more than 30°F in the 24 hours following the seven -day period. Avoid rapid dry-out of concrete due to overheating, and avoid thermal shock due to sudden cooling or heating.
3. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40°F, uniformly heat all water and aggregates before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 55°F and not more than 85°F at point of placement.
4. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Ascertain that forms, reinforcing steel, and adjacent concrete surfaces are entirely free of frost and ice before placing concrete.
5. When temperatures are expected to be below 32oF the night before the concrete is placed, then all reinforcing steel, forms and the ground shall be preheated, for a minimum of 12 hours, under a minimum temperature of 50 oF.
6. Do not use salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, or set -control admixtures, unless approved by ENGINEER, in mix designs.
7. Weather predictions made by the nearest NOAA station, and corrected for the local elevation and environmental conditions, may be used to determine whether cold weather protection shall be required. Thermometers will be used by ENGINEER and these readings shall determine whether cold weather protection shall be required and whether cold weather protection is adequate.
H. Hot Weather Placing:
1. When hot weather conditions exist as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity that would seriously impair the quality and
03 30 03-10
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
strength of concrete, place concrete as recommended b y ACI 305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 85°F. No concrete shall be placed if its temperature exceeds 90°F.
Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used, or liquid nitrogen may be added. Ice, when introduced into the mixer shall be in such form that it will be completely melted and dispersed throughout the mix at the completion of the mixing time. The addition of ice shall not increase the specified water to cement ratio.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
4. Thoroughly wet forms before placing concrete. Forms shall be free of standing water when concrete is placed.
5. Do not use set-control admixtures, unless approved by ENGINEER in mix designs.
6. Fog spray shall be used during finishing operations whenever necessary to avoid surface plastic shrinkage cracking. Fog spray shall also be used after finishing and before the specified curing is commenced to avoid surface plastic shrinkage cracking.
7. Obtain ENGINEER'S approval of other methods and materials proposed for use.
I. Removal of Forms:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage resulting from improper and premature removal of forms. Satisfy all applicable OSHA requirements with regard to safety of personnel and property.
2. Forms and shoring for elevated structural slabs or beams shall remain in place in accordance wit h ACI 318, Chapter 6, and until the concrete has reached a compressive strength equal to the specified 28 -day compressive strength as determined by test cylinders unless noted otherwise in Section 03 11 03, Concrete Formwork. Removal of all supports prior to obtaining adequate field cured cylinder results and reshoring shall not be permitted.
J. Backfill Against Walls:
1. Do not place backfill against walls until the concrete has obtained a compressive strength equal to the specified 28-day compressive strength. Where backfill is to be placed on both sides of the wall, the backfill shall be placed simultaneously on both sides to prevent differential pressures.
2. Since the walls of some structures are laterally restrained or supported by suspended slabs and/or slabs on grade and are not designed as cantilever retaining walls, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule of wall shoring, bracing, and backfilling that is coordinated with the concrete curing, test cylinder reports and the design assumptions and obtain a review from the ENGINEER prior to proceeding.
K. Patching:
1. Patching of concrete shall provide an acceptable and structurally sound surface finish uniform in appearance or the CONTRACTOR shall upgrade the finish by other means at no additional cost.
2. Tie Holes: All tie holes, except where sealant is indicated, shall be filled with dry pack nonshrink grout. White cement shall be added as needed so the color of grout after curing matches the color of adjacent concrete. Tie holes shall be thoroughly sandblasted or roughened. Flush the patch area with water and allow to dry. Coat the surface of the existing concrete with an approved bonding agent prior to filling with
03 30 03-11
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
nonshrink grout. Complete the repair in the time duration specified by the bonding agent manufacturer. The grout shall be rammed into place in thin layers and leveled to the plane of the surrounding concrete. Cure in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Defective Areas: Remove all defective concrete such as honeycombed areas and rock pockets out to sound concrete. Small shallow holes caused by air entrapment at the surface of the forms shall not be considered defects unless the amount is so great as to be considered not the standard of the industry and due primarily of poor workmanship. If chipping is required, the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface.
Feather edges shall not be permitted. The defective area shall be filled with a nonshrink, nonmetallic, grout. Use an approved bonding agent on horizontal patches prior to placing nonmetallic, non shrink grout. Since some bonding agents may not be compatible for some vertical surface patching techniques, demonstrate all methods for repair o f vertical surfaces using the actual materials, methods, and curing procedures required by the manufactures of the materials on the project site.
The CONTRACTOR shall consult with representatives of the bonding agent manufacturer and the nonshrink grout manufacturer, and these representatives shall be onsite and assist in the demonstration.
4. Blockouts at Pipes or Other Penetrations: Conform to details shown or submit proposed blockouts for review. Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
3.4 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough Form Finish:
1. Standard rough form finish is with concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form material, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched with mortar of 1 part cement to 1½ parts sand & all fins and other projections exceeding ¼ inches in height rubbed down or chipped off.
2. Use rough form finish for the following:
a. Exterior vertical surfaces up to 1 foot below grade. b. Interior exposed vertical surfaces of liquid containers up to 1 foot below liquid level.
c. Interior and exterior exposed beams and undersides of slabs. d. Other areas shown.
B. Smooth Form Finish:
1. Produce smooth form finish (Class A, as defined by ACI -347) by selecting form materials that will impart a smooth, hard, uniform texture. Arrange panels in an orderly and symmetrical m anner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas as above with all fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.
2. Use smooth form finish for surfaces that are to be covered with a coating material.
The material may be applied directly to the concrete or may be a covering bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing, damp proofing, painting or other similar system.
C. Smooth Rubbed Finish:
1. Provide smooth, rubbed finish to concrete surfaces which have received smooth form finish as follows:
a. Rubbing of concrete surfaces not later than the day after form removal.
03 30 03-12
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
b. Moistening of concrete surfaces and rubbing with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2. Except where surfaces have been previously covered as specified above, use smooth rubbed finish for the following:
a. Interior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces.
b. Exterior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces down to 1 foot below grade. c. Interior and exterior horizontal surfaces, except exterior exposed slabs and steps. d. Interior exposed vertical surfaces of liquid containers down to 1 foot below liquid level.
e. Other areas shown.
D. Sack Rubbed Finish:
1. Before applying the sack -rubbed finish, fill all tie rod holes and large cavities and remove or correct all fins and irregularities as specified in the Smooth Rubbed Finish.
2. Produce a sack rubbed finish by rubbing the concrete surface with a clean rubber float or wad of burlap and mortar. Use mortar made of premixed sacking mortar or one part portland cement and 1.5 parts, by volume, clean sand passing a No. 16 sieve, mixed with sufficient water to provide a consistency equal to that of a thick cream. Use the same type and brand cement as used in the concrete or colored premixed sacking mortar . The mortar finish color shall match the surrounding concrete. If necessary, blend white cement into the mortar to match the surrounding concrete surface.
3. Thoroughly wet the surface of the concrete and then perform sack rubbing while the surface is damp but not wet. Thoroughly rub the mortar over the area with a rubber float or wad of burlap, filling all pits. While the mortar is still plastic in the pits, rub the surface with the rubber float or burlap using a dry mix of the above proportions, removing all excess plastic material and placing enough dry material in the pits to stiffen and solidify the mortar, then finish the mortar fillings flush with the surface. At the end of the rubbing, no mortar or material shall remain on the surface other than that within the pits.
4. Ensure the completed surface is free of surface voids and blemishes, and is uniform in appearance and texture, except for the difference in texture between the filled voids and the remainder of the surface.
5. A thorough wash -down with stiff bristle brushes shall follow the final bagging or stoning operation. No extraneous materials shall remain on the surface of the wall.
The wall shall be sprayed with a fine fog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition for at least 3 days after the application.
6. Use a sack rubbed finish for the following areas or as indicated in the Drawings:
a. Interior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces.
b. Exterior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces down to 1 foot below grade. c. Interior and exterior horizontal surfaces, except exterior exposed slabs and steps. d. Or other areas shown.
E. Related Unformed Surfaces:
1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching the adjacent formed surfaces. Continue the final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across the adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
03 30 03-13
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3.5 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Float Finish:
1. After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until ready for floating.
Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared or when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently. Check and level the surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding ¼ inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill all low spots. Uniformly slope surface to drains as shown. Immediately after leveling, refloat the surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
2. Use float finish for the following:
a. Interior horizontal surfaces of liquid containers, except those to receive grout topping.
b. Exterior below grade horizontal surfaces.
c. Surfaces to receive additional finishes, except as shown or specified.
B. Trowel Finish:
1. After floating, begin the first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel.
Begin final troweling when the surface produce s a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface.
2. Consolidate the concrete surface by the final hand troweling operation. Finish shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8 inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10-foot straight edge.
Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
3. Use trowel finish for the following:
a. Interior exposed slabs, unless otherwise shown or specified. b. Slabs to receive resilient floor finishes.
C. Non-Slip Broom Finish:
1. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by brooming in the direction perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use fiber -bristle broom, unless otherwise directed. Coordinate the required final finish with ENGINEER before application.
2. Use Non-Slip Broom Finish for the following:
a. Exterior exposed horizontal surfaces subject to light foot traffic. b. Interior and exterior concrete steps and ramps.
c. Horizontal surfaces which will receive a grout topping or a concrete equipment base slab.
3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete.
2. Start initial curing after placing and finishing concrete as soon as free moisture and bleed water sheen has disappeared from the concrete surface. Keep concrete continuously moist during initial curing.
03 30 03-14
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before the concrete has dried. The total curing duration shall not be less than ten (10) days. For concrete sections over 30 -inch thick, continue curing for an additional seven (7) days, minimum. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the final curing period.
B. Use one of the following methods as approved by ENGINEER:
1. Walls:
a. Method 1: Leave concrete forms in place and keep entire surfaces of forms and exposed concrete surfaces wet for the entire curing duration. If forms are loosened and the contact between the concrete surface and forms is broken then the entire wall shall be wet cured.
b. Method 2: Continuously sprinkl e or fog with water 100 percent of the exposed surfaces for the curing duration immediately after removal of forms. c. Method 3: When approved by ENGINEER and as noted below, apply curing compound immediately after removal of forms.
2. Slab and Curbs:
a. Method 1: Protect surface by water ponding for the entire curing duration. b. Method 2: Cover concrete surfaces and exposed edges with the specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating the cover with water, and keeping the absorptive cover continuously wet with sprinklers or porous hoses during the curing duration. Lap adjacent absorptive cover sections 3-inches minimum. c. Method 3: Cover the concrete surfaces and exposed edges with the specified moisture-retaining cover during the curing duration. Seal edges and seams with waterproof tape, adhesive or sand berm. Water must be introduced between the moisture-retaining cover and the concrete surface whenever moist drops cannot be detected on the concrete side of the cover or the concrete surface is noticeably dry.
d. Method 4: Cover all exposed surfaces with 1 -inch minimum layer of wet sand, earth, or sawdust and keep continuously wet for the curing duration. e. Method 5: Continuously sprinkle or fog exposed surfaces for the curing duration. f. Method 6: When approved by ENGINEER and as noted below, apply liquid curing compound immediately after final finishing when surface will no longer be damaged by traffic necessary to apply curing compound.
C. Liquid curing compound:
1. Apply the specified curing compound to conc rete surfaces when permitted by ENGINEER. Slabs to receive terrazzo floors, concrete/grout topping or ceramic tile, concrete of water bearing structures, and concrete that will receive coatings shall not be cured with liquid curing compound. The compounds shall be applied by power spray equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas, which are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain the continuity of the coating and repair damage to the coat during the entire curing period. Remove curing compound from exposed surfaces at the end of the curing duration. For concrete surfaces, which will be in contact with potable water, the manufacturer shall certify that the curing compound used is NSF 61 approved.
D. Temperature of Concrete During Curing:
1. When the nighttime low temperature may drop to 40°F or below, maintain the concrete temperature between 50°F and 70°F continuously through out the curing period, by heating, covering, insulation or housing as required.
03 30 03-15
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. When the daytime high temperature may rise to 90°F or above, maintain the concrete temperature at a minimum and reduce temperature variations by providing moist curing continuously for the concrete curing period.
3. During either of the conditions specified above, the minimum curing time shall be 10 days (240 hours), after which coverings, housings, and insulation shall remain on the work for an additional 3 days, to allow gradual temperature equalization with the atmosphere.
E. Protection from Mechanical Injury: During the curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances including load stresses, heavy shock, excessive vibration, and from damage caused by rain or flowing water. Protect all finished concrete surfaces from damage by subsequent construction operations.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The CONTRACTOR will employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. ENGINEER will direct the numbe r of tests and cylinders required. Furnish all necessary assistance required by ENGINEER.
B. Quality Control Testing During Construction:
1. Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placement of concrete, as follows:
a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172.
b. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. c. Air Content: ASTM C231; one for the first concrete load, and one for every two concrete loads thereafter, or when required by an indication of change. Adjust mix if test results are unsatisfactory and resubmit for ENGINEER'S approval. d. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set of 4 standard compression cylinders for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix design placed in any one day; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, and 2 specimens tested at 28 days, 1 held. Cast, store and cure specimens as specified in ASTM C31. 1) Adjust mix if test results are unsatisfactory and resubmit for ENGINEER'S approval.
2) Concrete that does not meet the strength requirements is subject to rejection and removal from the Work, or to other such corrective measures as directed by ENGINEER, at the expense of CONTRACTOR.
e. Concrete Temperature: Test each time a slump test is made.
2. Where questionable field conditions may exist during placing concrete or immediately thereafter, strength tests of specimens cured under field conditions will be required by ENGINEER to check the adequacy of curing and protecting of the concrete placed.
Specimens shall be molded at the same time and from the same samples as the laboratory cured specimens.
a. Provide improved means and procedures for protecting concrete when the 28-day compressive strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured cylinders.
b. When laboratory -cured cylinder strengths are appreciably higher than the minimum required compressive strength, field-cured cylinder strengths need not exceed the minimum required compressive strength by more than 500 psi even though the 85 percent criterion is not met.
03 30 03-16
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3. The testing laboratory shall submit certified copies of test results directly to ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR after tests are made.
C. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests:
1. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement that has slump or temperature outside the specified values, nor that which is older than specified in section 3.2.
2. Compressive strength tests for laboratory -cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed the 28 day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete; and, no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
3. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and subject to replacement, reconstruction or to other action approved by ENGINEER.
D. Testing Concrete Structure for Strength:
1. When there is evidence that the strength of the in -place concrete does not meet specification requirements, provide the services of a concrete testing service to take cores drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination at no additional expense to CITY. Provide tests complying with ASTM C42 and the following:
a. Take at least three (3) representative cores from each member or suspect area at locations directed by ENGINEER.
b. Strength of concrete for each series of cores will be considered satisfactory if their average compressive strength is at least 85% and no single core is less than 75% of the 28 day required compressive strength.
c. Report test results, in writing, to ENGINEER on the same day that tests are made.
Include in test reports the Project identification name and number, date, name of CONTRACTOR, name of concrete testing service, location of test cor e in the structure, type or class of concrete represented by core sample, nominal maximum size aggregate, design compressive strength, compression breaking strength and type of break (corrected for length -diameter ratio), direction of applied load to core with respect to horizontal plane of the concrete as placed, and the moisture condition of the core at time of testing.
2. Fill core holes solid with non-shrink, high strength grout, and finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces.
E. Water Leakage Tests for All Water-Holding Structures:
1. All water-holding structures shall be subjected to leakage tests after the concrete has been cured and obtained its design strength, and before backfill, brick facing, or other work which will cover the concrete surfaces of th e walls is begun. Water leakage tests shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR as follows:
a. All water-holding structures shall be filled with water to the maximum liquid level shown on the Drawings prior to leak testing at a rate less than 4 ft/hr. After these structures have been kept full for 3-days, it will be assumed for the purpose of the test that the absorption of moisture by the concrete in the basin is complete.
All valves and gates to the structure shall then be closed and the change in water surface measured over a 48-hour period. The vertical distance to the water surface shall be measured to within 1/16 -inch from a fixed point on the
03 30 03-17
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
containment structure above the water surface. Measurements shall be recorded at 24-hour intervals.
b. During the test period, all exposed portions of the structure shall be examined for dampness or leaks and all visible leaks or damp spots shall be marked; such leaks or damp spots shall be later patched or corrected in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER prior to additional leakage testing. If the drop in water surface in the 48-hour period exceeds 0.05% of the normal volume of liquid contained in the water-holding structure, after accounting for evaporation, precipitation and temperature in open basins, or if damp spots or any seepage is present on the walls or other areas exposed to view where moisture can be picked up on a dry hand, the leakage shall be considered excessive and the leakage test will be considered to have failed. A floating, restrained, partially filled, calibrated, open container for evaporation and precipitation measurement should be positioned in open containment structures, and the water level in the container recorded.
Determination of evaporation by a shallow pan -type measuring device is discouraged as the heating of the bottom of a shallow pan can cause accelerated evaporation of water when compared w ith that taking place from a deep containment structure.
1) Wet areas on top of wall footings shall not be considered cause of a qualitative failure of the leakage test unless the water can be observed to be flowing.
c. If the leakage is excessive, and if damp spots and observed seepage is present on exposed surfaces, the water-holding structure shall be drained, all leaks and damp spots previously marked shall be patched, and the necessary repairs made, and the basin shall be retested. The CONTRACTOR’s method of repair shall be subject to the requirements of these specifications and submitted for review and approval by the ENGINEER.
d. The water-holding structure shall then be refilled and again tested for leakage and this testing and repair process shall be repeated as many times as necessary until the leakage test passes. This process shall be continued until the drop in water surface in specified test period with the basin full is less than the quantity specified above and all damp spots and seepage disappears when the structures are full of water. All repairs of faulty workmanship and materials, and additional tests, shall be made by the CONTRACTOR in an acceptable manner, at no additional cost to the CITY. Both the correction for excessive leakage and the removal of the damp or wet spots on exposed surfaces shall be required to pass the leakage test.
e. The purpose of this test is to determine the integrity of the finished concrete and to show that the exposed wall surfaces are visually acceptable. Therefore, all other equipment, e.g., stop gates, sluice gates, etc. or temporary bulkheads , should be made watertight prior to the test.
f. As an alternative to having watertight bulkh eads, gates or valves, the CONTRACTOR shall accurately measure the leakage through gates, valves, and bulkheads with methods acceptable to the ENGINEER.
g. An assumed leakage through gates and valves based on the manufacturer’s recommendations is not acceptable.
03 30 03-18
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for the passage of work by other contractors, unless otherwise shown or directed, after the work of other contractors is in place. Mix, place and cure concr ete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide all other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs:
1. Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
2. Exterior curbs shall have rubbed finish for vertical surfaces and a broomed finish for top surfaces.
C. Equipment Bases:
1. Unless specifically shown otherwise, provide concrete bases for all pumps and other equipment. Construct bases to the dimensions shown, or as required to meet manufacturers requirements and drawing elevations. Where no specific elevations are shown, bases shall be 6 -inches thick an d extend 3 -inches outside the metal equipment base or supports. Bases to have smooth trowel finish, unless a special finish such as terrazzo, ceramic tile or heavy duty concrete topping is required. In those cases, provide appropriate concrete finish.
2. Include all concrete equipment base work not specifically included under other Sections.
3. In general, place bases up to 1-inch below the metal base. Properly shim equipment to grade and fill 1-inch void with non-shrink grout as specified in Section 03 60 03, Grout.
D. Installation of embedded items
1. Install all embedded items prior to concrete placement, or, if necessary, as soon after concrete placement as possible, before concrete is set.
2. Use temporary support and bracing to keep embedded items in place while concrete cures.
3. Protect all embedded items from damage during concrete installation.
3.9 CONCRETE REPAIRS
A. Repair of Formed surfaces:
1. Repair exposed -to-view formed concrete surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect the appearance of the finish. Surface defects that require repair include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, and holes left by the rods and bolts; fins and other projections on the surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
2. Repair concealed formed concrete surfaces that may contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. Surface defects that require repair include cracks in excess of 0.01-inch wide, cracks of any width and other surface deficiencies which penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections, honeycomb, rock pockets, holes left by tie rods and bolts, and spalls except minor breakage at corner.
03 30 03-19
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3. Repair structural cracks and cracks in water-holding structures.
B. Method of Repair of Formed Surfaces:
1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms and as directed by ENGINEER.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over ½-inch diameter, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case, to a depth of less than 1-inch.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing the cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with the specified bonding agent.
a. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, the patching mortar color will match the color of the surrounding concrete. CONTRACTOR shall impart texture to repaired surfaces to match texture of existing adjacent surfaces. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture, texture and color match before proceeding with the patching. Compact mortar in place and strike o ff slightly higher than the surrounding surface.
3. Cracks which require repair shall be pressure grouted, epoxy injected, using one of the following in accordance with Section 03 01 06, Crack Repair by Epoxy Injection.
Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. a. Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod L.V. and Sikadur 31, Hi -Mod Gel, as manufactured by Sika Corporation Company.
b. Euco Epoxy #452 Epoxy System, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.
c. Or approved equal.
4. Fill holes extending through concrete by means of a plunger -type gun or other suitable device from the least exposed face, using a flush stop held at the exposed face to ensure completely filling.
5. Sandblast exposed -to-view surfaces that require removal of stains, gro ut accumulations, sealing compounds, and other substances marring the surfaces. Use sand finer than No. 30 and air pressure from 15 to 25 psi.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to the tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified.
2. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having the required slope. Correct high and low areas as herein specified.
3. Repair finish of unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect the durability of the concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01-inch wide or which penetrate to the re inforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
4. Repair structural cracks and cracks in water-holding structures.
D. Methods of Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
1. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after the concrete has cured sufficiently so that repairs can be made without damage to adjacent areas.
03 30 03-20
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out the low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. Use one of the following:
a. Euco Poly-Patch, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sikatop 122, as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
c. Or approved equal.
3. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 2-inch diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts, and expose reinforcing steel with at least ¾-inch clearance all around. Dampen all concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and brush with the specified bonding agent. Place patching concrete before grout takes its initial set. Mix patching concrete of the same materials and proportions to provide concrete of the same type or class as the original adjacent concrete. Place, compact and finish as required to blend with adj acent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
4. Repair isolated random cracks, as approved be ENGINEER, and single holes not over 2-inch diameter, by the dry -pack method. Groove the top of cracks, and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen all cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with the specified bonding agent. Place dry-pack before the cement grout takes its initial set. Mix dry -pack, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched areas continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
5. Cracks which extend through the full member section, or any cracks determined by ENGINEER to require pressure grouting repair, shall be pressure grouted , epoxy injected, using one of the following in accordance with Section 03 01 06, Crack Repair By Epoxy Injection. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations.
a. Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod L.V. and Sikadur 31, Hi -Mod Gel, as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
b. Euco Epoxy #452 Epoxy System, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.
c. Or approved equal.
6. Assure that surface is acceptable for flooring material to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Other Methods of Repair:
1. Repair methods not specified above may be used if approved by ENGINEER.
++ END OF SECTION ++
03 60 03-1
Grout
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 03 60 03
GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes epoxy, non -metallic, non-shrink, and ordinary Portland cement -sand grouts.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
2. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
3. ASTM C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
4. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish ordinary cement-sand grout for the following:
1. Foundation grout.
2. Construction joint grout.
3. As shown in the Drawings.
B. Furnish non-shrink, non-metallic grout for the following:
1. Equipment bases, 25 hp or less.
2. Base plates.
3. Guardrail and railings.
4. Through-bolt and form tie openings.
5. As shown in the Drawings.
C. Furnish epoxy grout for the following:
1. Equipment bases, 26 hp or more and/or sole plates with vibration, thermal movement, etc.
2. Blockouts for gate guides.
3. Retrofit waterstop installation.
4. As shown in the Drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all proprietary materials.
2. Proposed method for keeping existing concrete surfaces wet prior to placing grout.
3. Forming method for fluid grout placements.
4. Curing method for grout.
B. Laboratory Test Reports and Certificates:
03 60 03-2
Grout
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. For proprietary materials, submit copies of reports on quality control tests.
2. Submit certification that materials meet specification requirements for nonproprietary materials.
3. For ordinary cement-sand grout, copies of grout mix design and laboratory strength test reports.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver grout materials from manufacturers in unopened containers and bearing intact manufacturer's labels.
B. Storage of Materials: Store grout materials in a dry shelter and protected from moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. High-Strength Epoxy Grout.
1. Use 100% solids , prepackaged, solvent -free, moisture insensitive, high-strength epoxy grout.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. E3-HP, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sikadur 42 Grout Pak, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. c. Five Star HP Epoxy Grout by Five Star Products, Incorporated. d. Or approved equal.
B. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout:
1. Prepackaged non -staining cementi tious grout which shall meet the minimum requirements of ASTM C1107 and requiring only the addition of water at the jobsite.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. NS, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.
b. Five Star Grout, as manufactured by Five Star Products, Incorporated. c. Sika Grout 212, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. d. Or approved equal.
C. Ordinary Cement-Sand Grout: Prepare design mix for ordinary cement grout.
1. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type II; or blended hydraulic cement, ASTM C595, Type 1P.
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified.
a. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as iron sulfides, pyrite, marcasite, ochre, or other materials that can cause stains on exposed concrete surfaces.
b. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand, free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
1) Dune sand, bank run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. c. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate not permitted.
3. Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced by established reputable manufacturers and use in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction . Do not use admixtures that have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes, unless
03 60 03-3
Grout
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER. Refer to Section 03 30 03, Cast-In- Place Concrete, for additional admixture requirements.
4. Proportioning and Design of Mixes: Mixes are subject to the following limitations:
a. Specified 28-day Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi.
b. Minimum amount of water necessary for the mixture to flow under its own weight.
c. Fine Aggregate meeting ASTM C33.
d. Air Content Percentage: ±1.5%.
e. Minimum Cement Content in Pounds per Cubic Yard: 658. f. Slump at point of placement: 5 inch ±1 inch.
5. Proportion mix by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the Project for grout required. Comply with ACI 211.1 and provide a complete report, from an independent testing laboratory, to ENGINEER, at least 30 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin grout production until ENGINEER has approved mix.
6. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select grout proportions, prepare test specimens, and conduct strength tests as specified in ACI 301, Chapter 3 - Proportioning.
7. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select grout proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301, Chapter 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which grout is to be placed with installer and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Mix, p lace and cure grout as shown and in ac cordance with manufacturer's instructions. If manufacturer's instructions conflict with the Specifications, do not proceed until ENGINEER provides clarification.
2. Manufacturers of proprietary products shall make available upon 72 hours notification the services of a qualified, full time employee to aid in assuring proper use of the product under job conditions. The cost of this service, if any, shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
3. When placing grout conform to temperature and weather limitations in Section 03 30 03, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B. Through-bolt and form-tie holes: Fill space with dry pack dense grout hammered in with steel tool and hammer. Coordinate dry pack dense grout application with bonding agent in Section 03 15 16, Concrete Joints.
C. Columns, Beams and Equipment Bases: Prepare concrete surface by sandblasting, chipping, or by mechanical means to remove any soft material prior to setting base plates and machinery. After shimming columns, beams and equipment indicated to be
03 60 03-4
Grout
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
grouted on the plans to proper g rade, securely tighten anchor bolts. Properly form around the base plates allowing sufficient room around the edges for placing the grout.
Adequate depth between the bottom of the base plate and the top of concrete base must be provided to assure that the void is completely filled with grout.
D. Guardrails and Railings: After posts and rails have been properly inserted into holes or sleeves, fill the annular space between posts and cast-in-place sleeves and/or below base plates with non-shrink grout. Bevel grout at juncture with post so that moisture flows away from posts.
E. Construction Joints: Ordinary cement-sand grout may be used in place of mortar over the contact surface of the old concrete at the interface of horizontal construction joints as outlined in Section 03 15 16, Concrete Joints, and Section 03 30 03, Cast-In-Place Concrete, of these Specifications.
F. Curing: Cure all grout in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Wet cure ordinary cement-sand grout and non-shrink non-metallic grout for a minimum of three (3) days unless directed otherwise by the ENGINEER.
++ END OF SECTION ++
05 05 06-1
Anchors, Inserts and Dowels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 05 05 06
ANCHORS, INSERTS, AND DOWELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes all post-installed anchors and inserts required to anchor parts of the Work to supporting concrete or masonry construction, and plaster. This Section also includes adhesives for anchoring reinforcing dowels into existing concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A320, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service.
3. ASTM D746, Standard Test Method for Brittleness of Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact
4. ASTM D1505, Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique
5. ASTM D1525, Standard Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics B. 2018 International Building Code (IBC)
C. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 355.2, Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete
2. ACI 355.4, Qualification of Post-installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide the size, type, and length of anchor shown on the drawings or, if not shown, as specified in the detailed sections of these specifications.
B. When the size, length or load carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, expansion anchor, toggle bolt, or concrete insert is not shown or specified, provide the size, length and capacity required to carry the design load times a minimum safety factor of 4.
C. For equipment anchors, if the design load is not specified by the manufacturer, provide anchors of diameter no less than the diameter of the hole minus 3/16 inch. When the design load is not specified by the manufacturer, provide structural calculations .
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data : Submit for approval copies of material certification, manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams and installation instructions for the devices.
05 05 06-2
Anchors, Inserts and Dowels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. Installer’s Qualifications: When installing adhesive anchors subject to sustained tension loading or when specifically noted in the Drawings, submit for approval copies of the installer’s qualifications certified by the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Post-installed con crete anchors shall be ICC approved for seismic applications in cracked concrete and prequalified in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Non-submerged Use in areas of wet use, washdown areas, or areas outside heated buildings:
1. Stainless steel Type 316, unless otherwise shown.
2. Diameter, Length and Bend Dimensions: As required by equipment or machinery manufacturer. Unless otherwise required, provide 3/4 –inch minimum diameter by 12-inches long and other geometry as shown.
3. Furnish A320 nuts and washer s of same material for each bolt , unless otherwise shown.
4. Provide sleeves as required or as shown for location adjustment.
B. Submerged Use:
1. Submerged use is defined as any connection 1 foot 6 inches below the normal water surface elevation in a water holding basin.
2. As specified for nonsubmerged use, for equipment, machinery or other connections except as follows:
a. Coating of anchor bolt threads is not required.
b. Where threads are covered with fusion bonded coating, provide nut of proper size to fit and provide connection of equal strength to embedded bolt.
C. For anchoring fabricated metalwork , structural steel, or other components where connections will be protected or dry:
1. Galvanized Steel, 36 ksi, minimum.
2. Minimum Size: ¾-inch diameter by 12-inch long, unless otherwise shown.
3. At base plates with grout pads, furnish two nuts and two washers per bolt of same material as bolt, unless otherwise shown.
2.2 ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE
A. High Density Polyethylene Plastic:
1. Single unit construction with deformed sidewalls such that the concrete and grout lock in place.
2. The top of the sleeve shall be self-threading to provide adjustment of the threaded anchor blot projection.
3. Material requirements shall conform to the following:
a. Plastic: High density polyethylene.
05 05 06-3
Anchors, Inserts and Dowels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
b. Density: 0.956, ASTM D1505.
c. Vicant Softening Point: 256oF, ASTM D1525
d. Brittleness Temperature: -180oF, ASTM D746
B. Fabricated Steel Sleeve:
1. Material: A36 steel.
2. Dimensions, welding, and sizes as shown.
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENERS LUBRICANT (ANTISEIZING) A. Provide for stainless steel nuts and machined bolts, anchor bolts, concrete anchors, and all other threaded fasteners.
B. Lubricant shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, gr aphite, mica, talc, or copper as manufactured by:
1. Loc Tite Co., Permatex.
2. Or equal
2.4 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. For vertical support of grating or floor plate, provide cast -in metal fabrications as shown.
B. Except as permitted below, or as otherwise shown, provide malle able iron inserts for hanging piping and conduit from concrete ceilings and soffits. Comply with Federal Specification WW -H-171-E (Type 18). Provide those recommended by the manufacturer for the required loading.
C. Obtain inserts in sufficient time so as not to delay concrete or masonry work.
D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide inserts of one of the following:
1. Figure 282, as manufactured by Anvil/Grinnell.
2. Sharktooth Insert, as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Incorporated.
3. Or equal.
2.5 ADHESIVE (EPOXY) ANCHORS AND DOWELS
A. Provide adhesive anchors where specifically shown and where adhesive anchors are allowed. Unless otherwise shown, adhesive anchors are allowed for anchoring:
1. Supports for pipe, conduit, and electrical boxes, devices, and panels, on floors and walls
2. Handrails, guardrails, sunshades, stairs,
3. Fixtures and equipment on floors and walls, and
4. Single pipes and conduits <2 inch in diameter to ceilings and soffits.
B. Adhesive shall be epoxy resin. Vinylester resin anchors are NOT allowed.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1. Installation to Concrete:
a. HIT-HY 200 as manufactured by Hilti, Inc.
05 05 06-4
Anchors, Inserts and Dowels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
b. SET-3G as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
c. Or approved equal meeting ACI 355.4.
2. Installation to solid-grouted Masonry:
a. HIT-HY 270 as manufactured by Hilti, Inc.
b. SET as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
c. Or approved equal.
2.6 EXPANSION ANCHORS
A. Provide expansion anchors only where specifically shown and where expansion anchors are allowed. Unless otherwise shown, and except as noted below, expansion anchors are allowed for anchoring:
1. Supports for pipe, conduit, and electrical boxes, devices, and panels, to floors and walls.
2. Handrails, guardrails, and sunshades.
3. Fixtures and equipment which have no moving parts, to floors and walls.
B. Expansion anchors are NOT allowed in any submerged or chemical containment areas.
C. Leveling nuts shall not be used with expansion anchors. If leveling nuts are required, provide adhesive anchors, unless otherwise shown.
D. Wedge anchors: Provide one of the following:
1. Installation to Concrete:
a. Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ by Hilti, Inc.
b. Strong-Bolt 2 by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
c. Or approved equal meeting ACI 355.2.
2. Installation to solid-grouted Masonry:
a. Hilti Kwik Bolt-3 by Hilti, Inc.
b. Wedge-All by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
c. Or approved equal.
E. Drop-in anchors , only where specific shown on the drawings : Provide one of the following:
1. HDI by Hilti, Inc.
2. Drop-In by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
3. Or equal.
2.7 SCREW ANCHORS
A. Provide screw anchors only where specifica lly shown. Provide ICC approved screw anchors suited for seismic and cracked concrete applications.
B. Installation to Concrete or Masonry:
1. KH-EZ by Hilti, Inc.
2. Titen HD by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
3. Or approved equal.
05 05 06-5
Anchors, Inserts and Dowels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2.8 TOGGLE BOLTS
A. Provide toggle bolts only where specifically shown, to fasten single pipes and conduits <1 inch and equipment weighing less than 50 lbs (4-bolts required) to hollow walls.
B. Provide spring -wing toggle bolts, with two -piece wings, carbon steel bolts with zinc coating in accordance with Federal Specification FF-S-325.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide toggle bolts of one of the following:
1. The Rawlplug Company, Incorporated.
2. Haydon Bolts, Incorporated.
3. Or equal.
2.9 OTHERS
A. Powder actuated fasteners and other types of anchors not specified herein shall not be used, unless approved by ENGINEER.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide Belleville washers, or approved equal, at anchorage connections used to transfer anchorage loads at sheet metal equipment housings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Obtain anchor bolts in sufficient time so as not to delay concrete or masonry work.
B. Adhesives shall be stored and installed at the service temperature ranges recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Locate and accurately set the anchor bolts using templates or other devices as necessary.
D. Protect threads and shank from damage during installation of equipment and structural steel.
E. Post-installed anchors are NOT acceptable substitutes for cast-in-place anchor bolts.
F. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with concrete.
G. Unless otherwise shown, the mini mum diameter of anchor bolts for structural steel is ¾ inch, and for other applications, 3/8 inch.
H. Unless otherwise shown, provide the following minimum embedment, where “d” is the nominal anchor diameter:
1. Cast-in-place anchors: 12d.
05 05 06-6
Anchors, Inserts and Dowels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Adhesive anchors: 12d.
3. Expansion anchors: 8d.
I. Unless otherwise shown, provide a minimum edge distance equal to six times the bolt diameter for adhesive anchors, eight times the bolt diameter for expansion anchors and a bolt spacing equal to twelve times the bolt diameter.
J. Concrete shall have a minimum age of 21 days at the time of post -installed anchor installation.
1. Concrete temperature at the time of adhesive anchor installation shall be at least 50oF.
K. Existing reinforcing bars in the concrete structure may conflict with specif ic anchor locations. Unless noted on the Drawings that the bars can be cut, the CONTRACTOR shall review the existing structural drawings and shall undertake to locate the position of the reinforcing bars at the locations of the concrete anchors by ferrosca n, ground penetrating rebar (GPR), x-ray, chipping or other means.
L. Drilling equipment used and installation of post-installed anchors shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
M. For the adhesive and expansion anchors, CONTRACTOR sh all comply with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions on the drilled hole diameter and depth.
N. CONTRACTOR shall properly clean out the hole utilizing a wire brush and compressed air in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed installation instructions to remove all loose material from the hole, prior to installing adhesive or expansion anchor s. Drilled and cleaned anchor holes shall be protected from contamination until the anchor is installed. A drilled anchor hole shall be re -cleaned assuming the hole was just drilled, if in the opinion of ENGINEER or Inspector that the hole has become contaminated after initial cleaning.
O. Unless otherwise indicated by the manufacturer, adhesive shall be dispensed through a tube or cartridge ex tension, beginning at the maximum depth of the hole and withdrawn as adhesive is injected, followed by insertion and rotating the anchor to the specified depth. Where necessary, spaces around anchors at the surface shall be sealed at horizontal to vertical ly overhead locations to prevent loss of the adhesive during curing.
P. Anchors to be installed in the adhesive shall be clean, oil -free, and free of loose rust, paint, or other coatings.
Q. Installed anchors shall be securely fixed in -place to prevent displacem ent. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, anchors shall be installed perpendicular to the concrete surface.
R. Reinforcing adhesive dowel bars or all -threaded adhesive bars shall not be bent after being adhesively embedded in hardened, sound concrete.
05 05 06-7
Anchors, Inserts and Dowels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
S. In lieu of the use of stacked standard washers, if threads of an anchor bolt protrude beyond the attachment, the installers shall use a fabricated filler plate of equal or greater size of the washer. Hole on the filler plate shall be 1/16 inch (or 2 to 3 mm) greater than the bolt size. Coat as appropriate in accordance with the material and installation location requirements.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Anchors shall be installed by qualified personnel in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. Installation of adhesive anchors shall be performed by personnel trained to install adhesive anchors.
B. Installation of adhesive anchors horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall be performed by personnel certified b y the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program.
C. CONTRACTOR shall employ a special inspector to perform field inspection services in accordance with Chapter 17 of the IBC for all post-installed anchors.
1. The special inspector must be periodic ally on the jobsite during post -installed anchor installation.
2. Adhesive anchors installed to resist sustained tension loads shall be continuously inspected during installation by an inspector specially approved for that purpose by the building official.
D. CONTRACTOR shall employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality testing of installed adhesive anchors. A minimum of 10% of randomly selected adhesive anchors and reinforcing dowel bars greater than 3/8 inch diameter are to be tension tested to the least of 50 percent of expected adhesive ultimate bond strength or 80 percent of steel yield strength of the anchor rod. Maintain the proof load at the required load level for a minimum of 10 seconds.
1. Tension testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E488.
2. The independent testing laboratory shall submit an anchorage testing plan for approval to ensure the testing requirements are fulfilled.
3. If failure of more than 5 percent of the tested anchors or reinforcing dowel bars occurs, CONTRACTOR will be requ ired to pay for the costs involved in testing the remaining 90%.
a. Concrete cracking in the vicinity of the anchor after loading shall be considered a failure.
E. CONTRACTOR shall correct improper workmanship, remove and replace, or correct as instructed by the ENGINEER, all anchors or bars found unacceptable or deficient, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
F. The independent testing and inspection agency shall complete a report on each area.
The report should summarize the observations made by the inspector and be submitted to ENGINEER.
G. Provide access for the testing agency to places where Work is being produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
05 05 06-8
Anchors, Inserts and Dowels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
++ END OF SECTION ++
07 92 03-1
Joint Sealants
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 07 92 03
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Surface preparation and installation instructions. Indicate where each product is proposed to be used. Provide sealant certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 where sealant is in direct contact with potable water.
B. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Applicator Qualification: Documentation showing minimum of 5 years' experience installing sealants in projects of similar scope.
2. Certificates of Compliance: Proposed materials meet Specification requirements.
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 and 80 degrees F (4 and 27 degrees C) when sealant is applied. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Sealant Characteristics:
1. Uniform, homogeneous.
2. Free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed.
3. Nonstaining, nonbleeding.
4. Hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum, measured by ASTM C661 method.
5. Immersible may be substituted for nonimmersible.
B. Sealant Color: To match adjacent surfaces or as selected by ENGINEER.
C. One-Part Polyurethane, Immersible:
1. Polyurethane base, single -component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 25.
2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water.
3. Designed to be used where the maximum depth of sealant will not exceed 1/2 inch.
4. Provide sealant certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 where sealant is in direct contact with potable water.
5. Manufacturers and Products for Nonsag:
a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-1a.
b. Tremco: Vulkem 116.
07 92 03-2
Joint Sealants
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
c. Or approved equal.
6. Manufacturers and Products for Self-Leveling:
a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-1C SL.
b. Tremco: Vulkem 45 SSL.
c. Or approved equal.
D. Two-Part Polyurethane, Immersible:
1. Polyurethane elastomeric, two-part, self leveling (or gun grade), non-staining, which cures at ambient temperature and conforms to ASTM C920.
2. Designed to be used where the ma ximum depth of sealant will exceed 1/2 inch or where chemical curing is required.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-2C.
b. Tremco: Dymeric 240FC.
c. Or approved equal.
E. Waterproof Expandable Sealant
1. One-component, polyurethane foam that expands and cures slowly to a semi-rigid, closed cell foam upon reaction with moisture, such as ambient humidity
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Sika Chemical Corp.; Boom
b. Or approved equal
2.2 BACKUP MATERIAL
A. Nongassing, extruded, closed-cell round polyethylene foam rod, compatible with sealant used, and as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Size: As shown or as recommended by sealant material manufacturer. Provide for joints greater than 1/2-inch deep. Backup material should be sized to maintain 2 :1 width to depth ratio to the greatest extent possible.
C. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Dow Corning; Ethafoam SB.
2. Sonneborn; Sonofoam.
3. Or approved equal.
2.3 ANCILLARY MATERIALS
A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. Provide bond breaker tape in the bottom of joints to prevent 3 -sided joint sealant adhesion when backup material is not used.
B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application
07 92 03-3
Joint Sealants
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Use of more than one material for the same joint is not allowed unless approved by the sealant manufacturer.
B. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Horizontal and Sloping Joints of 1 Percent Maximum Slope: Use self-leveling (Grade P) joint sealant.
D. Steeper Sloped Joints, Vertical Joints, and Overhead Joints: Use nonsag (Grade NS) joint sealant.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that joint dimensions, and physical and environmental conditions, are acceptable to receive sealant.
B. Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound, and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, and other foreign materials.
1. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edge.
2. Starting of work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
3. Apply primer to dry surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
E. Carefully follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing multi-component products.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform intended function.
1. Install backup material as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Where possible, provide full length sections without splices; minimize number of splices.
3. Tape sealant may be used as joint filler if approved by sealant manufacturer.
B. Use bond breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer and in the bottom of joints to prevent 3-sided joint sealant adhesion.
C. Seal joints around window, door and louver frames, expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Joint Sealant Materials: Follow manufacturer's recommendation and instructions, filling joint completely from back to top, without voids.
07 92 03-4
Joint Sealants
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
E. Joints: Tool slightly concave after sealant is installed.
1. When tooling white or light color sealant, use a water wet tool.
2. Finish joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F. Tape Sealant: Compress to 50 percent of expanded thickness and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces next to the sealed joints of smears or other soiling resultant of sealing application.
B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities.
++ END OF SECTION ++
09 91 03-1
Painting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 09 91 03
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide and install coatings on all exposed surfaces as indicated herein, in other Specification Sections, and on the Drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Experience: Both Coatings Manufacturer and Coatings Installer shall have a minimum 5 years’ experience in production and application, respectively, of specified products.
Coatings Installer shall be approved and endorsed, in writing, by Coatings Manufacturer.
B. Regulations: Meet federal, state, and l ocal requirements which apply to the work, including, but not limited to those regulations limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds.
C. Coatings Manufacturer Recommendations: Coatings Installer shall follow all recommendations of the Coatings Manufacturer regarding storage, handling, surface preparation, application of coatings, recoat times, environmental conditions during storage, preparation and application of coatings, and all other Coatings Manufacturer recommendations.
D. Warranty: Both Coatings Manufacturer and Coatings Installer shall provide a 1 -year complete replacement warranty for all coatings. Manufacturer shall provide 5 -year warranty for long-term performance of coatings in addition to 1-year warranty.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Coatings Manufacturer shall submit for approval the following:
1. Copies of Manufacturer's technical information and application instructions for each material proposed for use. Specify exactly which product is being proposed for each coating type (as specified below). This may be accomplished through a reference table along with information on the various products, or by a separate, tabbed section with information on products being submitted for each system in a separate tab of a binder. Submittal of general Manufacturer’s literature without detailing which product is proposed for each paint system will be unacceptable.
2. Copies of Manufacturer's complete color charts for each coating system.
3. Letter from the Coatings Manufacturer approving and endorsing Coatings Installer.
4. Letter from Coatings Manufacturer stating that volatile organic compounds (VOCs) meet all Federal, State and Local requirements.
5. Furnish copies of the final, approved submittal to the Coatings Installer so that it is clear which product is to be used for which each system.
B. Reference Samples:
09 91 03-2
Painting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Provide reference samples of paint colors and textures as required by the ENGINEER.
Reference samples will show the color and texture of the final paint to be applied and shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to painting. Reference samples should be applied to similar substrates to the final surfaces to be painted. If ENGINEER chooses to forego reference samples, CONTRACTOR must receive the allowance to forego reference samples before painting begins or all painted surfaces will be re-painted at the ENGINEER’s discretion and at no additional cost to the CITY.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Protect all pre-coated items from coating damage during shipping.
B. Store products in accordance with Manufacturer’s directions.
C. Store products in a neat, orderly fashion. Protect products from damage. Protect storage area from damage from stored products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER:
A. Provide coating types as listed in the following table. The systems referenced in the table are those provided by TNEMEC and Sherwin-Williams. If manufacturers other than TNEMEC or Sherwin Williams are desired, the CONTRACTOR shall submit equivalent paint systems.
COATING TYPE DESCRIPTION Sherwin
Williams Series
TNEMEC SERIES
Clear Polyamine
Epoxy
Clear Polyamine Epoxy, high solids,
moisture resistant, designed as a
one-coat wood sealer.
GP3477 Series 201,
Epoxoprime
Acrylic Filler Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic
designed for application on porous
surfaces such as rough-faced
concrete masonry units
CementPlex
875
Series 130,
Envirofill
Interior Acrylic
Latex
Single component, finish as required ProMar 200 N/A
Industrial Acrylic Single component, high density
acrylic finish for interior, exterior
surfaces
Pro Industrial
High
Performance
Acrylic
Series 1029
Interior Latex
Primer/ Sealer
Waterborne vinyl acrylic
primer/sealer for interior gypsum
wallboard/plaster. Capable of
providing uniform seal and suitable
for use with specified finish coats.
ProMar 200
Primer
Series 115
Exterior Acrylic
Latex
Primer/Sealer
Capable of providing uniform seal and
suitable for use with specified finish
coats.
Extreme Bond
Latex Primer
Series 1028
09 91 03-3
Painting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
Polyamine Epoxy
Sealer
Waterborne Polyamine Epoxy,
penetrating, flexible and low-odor
primer designed for sealing porous
substrates.
Multi-Purpose
Acrylic Primer
Series 151,
Elasto-Grip FC
Acrylate Modified Waterborne Acrylate
designed for application on porous
surfaces such as rough-faced
concrete masonry units or wood
surfaces. Flexible and breathable,
moisture and UV resistant. Matte
Finish
Loxon XP Series 156,
Enviro-crete
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
Polyamidoamine Epoxy designed for
use on steel or other ferrous metals
not in contact with potable water but
submerged or immersed in
wastewater or non-potable water.
Series N69, V69
or L69 (type per
local VOC
regulations), Hi-
Build Epoxoline
II
Polyamidoamine Epoxy designed for
use on steel or other ferrous metals
in contact with potable water.
Macropoxy
5500
Series N140,
L140 or V140
(type per local
VOC
regulations),
Pota-Pox Plus
Polyurethane Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane
designed for exterior weathering,
abrasion and corrosion resistance
HS
Polyurethane
250 or
Waterbased
Acrolon
Series 1095,
Endura-Shield
Silane Water
Repellent
Sealant
Silane/Siloxane penetrating water
repellent blend designed for
application on above-grade concrete,
stucco, block, masonry and stone
surfaces
Loxon 7%
Siloxane
Series 636, Dur
A Pell 20
Wood Sealer /
Stain
Single component, 250 g/l wood stain
in clear or standard colors
Minwax 250
Wood Varnish
Finish
Single component polyurethane
varnish
Minwax
B. All coatings used shall comply with Federal, State and local VOC limits based on application location.
2.2 COLOR
A. Color Pigments: Pure, nonfading, lead-free applicable types to suit the sub strates and service indicated.
B. Provide colors as described in the drawings or specifications, or as selected by ENGINEER from standard color palette. For piping system colors, reference pipe schedule.
09 91 03-4
Painting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Where existing colors are to be matched or satisfactory color is not available from standard color palette, provide custom-mixed colors.
D. Provide samples of each color on the substrate to be coated for approval by the ENGINEER prior to beginning coating application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Coatings Installer shall prepare all surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with Coatings Manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Coatings Manufacturer representative shall observe Coatings Installer ’s methods of preparing surfaces and approve of the work prior to Coatings Installer beginning coating installation. If, after a period of time, Coatings Manufacturer is satisfied with Coatings Installers methods, Coatings Manufacturer can allow Coatings I nstaller to proceed without inspection following surface preparation. Coatings Manufacturer and installer will still both be held equally accountable for any coatings failure.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect all adjacent surfaces from overspray, dripping or other transfer of coatings not intended for those surfaces. Use masking, tape, drop cloths, plastic and other protective materials as appropriate.
1. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, stainless steel surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted.
2. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. Mask openings in motors, fan housings, etc. to prevent coatings from falling inside.
3. Correct all damages by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Completely remove all masking, tape, drop cloths, plastic and other protective materials within 48 hours of completion of application of finish coat. Take special care to remove masking and plastic which cover tank vent openings, HVAC registers, vents, motor vents, and other areas where airflow is critical to proper operation.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Paint all exposed surfaces not specifically excluded in 3.3.C, below. Provide and install Coatings in accordance with the following Table, unless otherwise specified in other Sections:
09 91 03-5
Painting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B.
COATING
SYSTEM
NO.
SURFACE TO
BE COATED
PRIMER
COATING
NO OF
PRIMER
COATS
PRIME COAT
THICKNESS
(EACH
COAT)
FINISH
COATING
NO OF
FINISH
COATS
FINISH COAT
THICKNESS
(EACH COAT)
100 Concrete
Masonry
Units
(Interior)
Acrylic Filler 1 70 SF/Gal
Applicatio
n Rate
Acrylate 2 135 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
101 Concrete
Masonry
Units
(Exterior)
Silane
Waterproofing
Sealant
1 250
SF / Gal
Applicatio
n Rate
None
102 Concrete
Roof Slab
(Exterior)
Silane
Waterproofing
Sealant
1 250
SF/Gal
Applicatio
n Rate
None
200 Wood
(Interior and
Exterior)
Polyamine
Epoxy
1 250
SF/Gal
Applicatio
n Rate
Acrylate 2 135 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
201 Wood
(Interior,
where
noted)
Wood Sealer 1 250
SF/Gal
Applicatio
n Rate
Wood Finish 1 350 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
202 Gypsum
Board
(Interior)
Interior Latex
Primer/Sealer
1 350
SF/Gal
Applicatio
n Rate
Interior Acrylic
Latex
(Semigloss)
2 400 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
300 Exposed
Ferrous Pipe
Systems and
Exposed
Steel Items
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
2 4-6 MDFT Polyurethane 2 2-3 MDFT
301 Exposed,
Non-metallic
Pipe
Systems
Exterior Latex
Primer/Sealer
1 3-5 MDFT Industrial Acrylic
(Semigloss)
2 3-5 MDFT
302 Immersed
Ferrous Pipe
Systems and
Steel Items
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy*
1 6-10
MDFT
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy*
1 6-10
MDFT
303 Immersed
Non-metallic
Pipe
Systems
Latex
Primer/Sealer*
1 4-6 MDFT Industrial Acrylic
(Semigloss)*
1 4-6 MDFT
304 Buried
Ferrous and
Steel Items
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 8-10
MDFT
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 8-10 MDFT
09 91 03-6
Painting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
COATING
SYSTEM
NO.
SURFACE TO
BE COATED
PRIMER
COATING
NO OF
PRIMER
COATS
PRIME COAT
THICKNESS
(EACH
COAT)
FINISH
COATING
NO OF
FINISH
COATS
FINISH COAT
THICKNESS
(EACH COAT)
305 Aluminum
Surfaces in
Contact with
Concrete
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 4-6 MDFT None
Pumps Touch up factory applied coatings, per Pump Specifications
* Where in contact with potable water, coating shall be NSF-61 certified.
C. Items Delivered with Factory Applied Primer:
1. For items delivered with a factory applied primer and requiring painting under this Section, the factory applied primer may be used in lieu of field applied primer only under the following conditions:
a. The ENGINEER approves the use of the factory applied primer in lieu of field applied primer.
b. The factory applied primer is certified by the Coatings Manufacturer as compatible with the field applied finish coat.
c. The Coatings Manufacturer’s recommended recoat time for the factory applied primer has not been exceeded.
2. If all of the above conditions are not met, the Coatings Installer shall re-prepare all surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with Coatings Manufacturer ’s recommendations and primer applied, in accordance with this Section.
D. Table Definitions:
1. SF/Gal: Square foot of coverage per gallon of coating used.
2. MDFT: mil dry film thickness
3. mil: 1/1000 of an inch paint thickness
4. Ferrous Pipe: Includes Ductile Iron, Cast Iron, Steel, and Galvanized Steel piping
5. Steel Items: Includes steel and galvanized steel items such as structural steel, doors, window frames, overhead coiling doors, bollard posts, steel gates, steel fences, and all other steel and galvanized steel items.
6. Non-Metallic Pipe: Polyvinyl Chloride, Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic, High Density Polyethylene
7. Exposed: Located above grade, exposed to the atmosphere not submerged. Includes surfaces inside and outside of buildings.
8. Submerged: In an area which normally is under water or other liquid or is intermittently under water or other liquid.
9. Buried: Located below grade, surrounded by backfill.
E. Surfaces Not Requiring Painting:
1. Unless otherwise stated or shown below or in other sections, the following areas or items will not require painting or coating:
a. Concrete surfaces.
b. Reinforcing steel.
c. Copper, bronze, brass, Monel, aluminum, chromium plate, and stainless-steel surfaces, except where:
1) Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals.
09 91 03-7
Painting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2) Aluminum and stainless steel are embedded in concrete or masonry, or aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry.
3) Color coding of equipment and piping is required.
d. Existing piping, fittings and pipe supports.
e. Pipe unions or portions of piping systems where painting would make disassembly difficult or impossible.
f. Prefinished electrical, mechanical, and architectural items such as motor control centers, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, transformers, disconne ct switches, HVAC equipment enclosures, ductwork, acoustical tile, cabinets, louvers, and wall panels.
g. Electrical conduits.
h. Cathodic protection anodes.
i. Insulated piping and insulated piping with jacket will require prime coat only. j. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) surfaces with an integral ultra-violet resistant colored gel coat do not require painting, provided the color is as selected. k. Glass, plexiglass or other transparent or translucent material intended to allow passage of light.
l. Civil/site materials such as asphalt, gravel, rock, chain-link fence, and plantings.
3.4 RECOAT TIMES
A. Coatings Installer shall observe all requirements of the Coatings Manufacturer regarding recoat times.
3.5 PAINT LOG
A. Coatings Installer shall keep a paint log
1. Specific details of the contents and format paint log shall be determined by the Coatings Installer and approved by the ENGINEER.
2. At a minimum, paint log shall record, on a daily basis for any day when coating work is performed:
a. Weather conditions, including 3-day forecast
b. Which surfaces were prepared for coating
c. Approval of surface preparation by the Coatings Manufacturer representative d. Which surfaces or systems were coated that day
e. Who the installer was (specific names of persons on crew) f. Which coating type was used
g. Which coat was installed
h. What the application rate or MDFT was (as approved by ENGINEER)
3. Paint log shall be kept on-site. Paint log shall be signed on a daily basis, for any day when coating work is performed, by the supervisor of the coatings installer field crew and by the ENGINEER.
4. Any painted surface which was not recorded in the paint log shall be stripped , re- prepared, and recoated at the ENGINEER’s discretion.
3.6 WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. Warranty inspection shall be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of the Work. All defective Work shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with
09 91 03-8
Painting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
this Specification and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and at the CONTRACTOR'S expense.
B. Any location where paint has peeled, bubbled, or cracked and any location where rusting is evident shall be considered to be a failure of the system. The CONTRACTOR shall make repair at all points where failures are observed by removing the deteriorated paint, cleaning the surface, and recoating or repainting with the same system. If the area of failure exceeds 25 percent of the total coated or painted surface, the entire coating or paint system may be required to be removed and repainted in accordance with this specification as determined by the ENGINEER.
C. All costs for CONTRACTOR'S inspection, Manufacturer's inspection and all costs for repair shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
++ END OF SECTION ++
26 00 00-1
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 00 00
GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide the electrical WORK, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all Sections in Division 26, except as otherwise indicated by respective specification.
C. Work included:
1. The WORK of this Section is required for operation of electrically-driven equipment provided under Specifications in other Divisions.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 00 11 03 Summary of Work
B. Section 01 33 03 Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 33 03.13 O&M Manual Review Checklist
D. Division 26 Electrical Specifications
1. The CONTRACTOR'S attention is directed to the requirement for proper coordination of the WORK of this Section with the WORK of equipment Specifications, the WORK of instrumentation Sections.
2. Concrete, excavation, backfill, and steel reinforcement required for encasement, installation, or construction of the WORK of the various Sections of Division 26 is included as a part of the WORK under the respective Sections, including duct banks, manholes, handholes, equipment housekeeping pads, and light pole bases.
E. Division 40 Instrumentation Specifications
1.03 REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the latest provisions of the following agencies:
1. CBC California Building Code
2. CCR (TITLE 24 – PART 3) California Electrical Code
3. NEC (NFPA 70) National Electrical Code: 2020 Edition
4. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
5. Title 8, Subchapter 5, California Administrative Code Electrical Safety Orders
6. UBC Uniform Building Code
B. Electrical equipment shall be listed by and shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local code enforcement agency having jurisdiction.
C. Installation of electrical equipment and materials shall comply with OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, as applicable), state building standards, and applicable local codes and regulations.
26 00 00-2
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
D. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations apply:
1. AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies
2. ANSI American National Standards Institute
3. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
4. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
5. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
6. NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
7. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
8. NETA International Electrical Testing Association
E. Where the requirements of the specifications conflict with UL, NEMA, NFPA, or other applicable standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures.
2. Custom-prepare Shop Drawings.
3. Drawings or data indicating "optional" or "as required" equipment will not be accepted.
4. Cross out options not proposed or delete from the Shop Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings shall include the following:
a. Complete material lists stating manufacturer and brand name of each item or class of material.
b. Shop Drawings for grounding WORK not specifically indicated c. Front, side, rear elevations, and top views with dimensional data d. Location of conduit entrances and access plates
e. Component data
f. Connection diagrams, terminal numbers, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, and cable numbers
g. Method of anchoring, seismic requirements, weight
h. Types of materials and finish
i. Nameplates
j. Temperature limitations, as applicable
k. Voltage requirement, phase, and current, as applicable l. Front and rear access requirements
m. Test reports
n. Grounding requirements
26 00 00-3
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Catalog Cuts
1. Submit catalog cuts or photocopies of applicable pages of bulletins or brochures for mass produced, non-custom manufactured material.
2. Stamp the catalog data sheets in order to indicate the Project name, applicable Specifications Section and Paragraph, model number, and options.
D. Materials and Equipment Schedules
1. Within 30 Days of the commencement date in the Notice to Proceed, deliver to the ENGINEER a complete list of materials, equipment, apparatus, and fixtures that are proposed for use.
2. Include in the list the type, size, name of manufacturers, catalog number, and such other information as required to identify the item.
E. Include with each submittal a copy of this specification section, with addenda updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (√) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.
1.05 FACILITY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General
1. Submit complete operation and maintenance manual in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 03.13 – O&M Manual Review Checklist.
1.06 As-Built Drawings
1. Prepare as-built drawings, including but not limited to showing invert and top elevations and routing of duct banks and exact location of concealed below-grade electrical installations, and color coding of each individual control conductor.
2. Maintain AS-BUILT drawings and update in conjunction with CONTRUCTION progress of installation. AS-BUILT drawings shall be a full-sized set of drawings marked to reflect deviations, modifications and changes.
3. Furnish the drawings to the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures.
1.07 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Identification
1. Provide danger, caution, and warning signs and equipment identification markings in accordance with applicable federal, state, OSHA, and NEC requirements.
B. Local Disconnect Switches
26 00 00-4
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Legibly mark each local disconnect switch for motors and equipment in order to indicate its purpose, unless the purpose is indicated by the location and arrangement.
C. Warning Signs
1. 600 Volts Nominal, or Less
a. Mark entrances to rooms and other guarded locations that contain live parts with conspicuous signs prohibiting unqualified persons from entering.
2. Mark indoor electrical installations that are open to unqualified persons and contain metal- enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, and other similar associated equipment over 600 volts nominal, with appropriate caution signs.
D. Isolating Switches
1. Provide isolating switches not interlocked with an approved circuit-interrupting device with a sign warning against opening them under load.
1.08 PERMANENT PUBLIC UTILITIES REQUIREMENTS
A. Contact the serving utility and verify compliance with requirements before construction.
B. Coordinate schedules and payments for WORK by utilities.
1. The CONTRACTOR to coordinate and schedule pre-construction utility coordination meeting with utility service representative with thirty (30) days of CONTRACT.
C. Where conduits and conductors in the WORK are indicated to be larger, heavier schedule, or have greater protective coating than utility requirements, provide the larger size, heavier schedule, or greater protection.
D. Provide electrical service as indicated and as required by the serving utility.
E. Verify and provide service conduits, fittings, transformer pad, grounding devices, and service wires not provided by the serving utility.
F. Verify with the utility the exact location of each service point and type of service, and pay charges levied by the serving utilities as part of the WORK.
1.09 PERMITS AND INSPECTION
A. Obtain permits and pay inspection fees according to the General Conditions.
1.10 AREA DESIGNATIONS
A. General
1. Designations for raceway system enclosures shall comply with the requirements of Section 26 05 33– Electrical Raceway Systems.
2. Designations for electrical WORK specifically indicated in other Sections shall comply with the requirements of those Sections unless indicated otherwise.
3. Designations for other electrical WORK not included in the above Paragraphs shall be as follows:
NEMA ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION
AREA
1 3R 7 9 12 Notes
26 00 00-5
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
Inside Wet Well X
Near Wet well NEMA 4X
Outside Building X
Inside Building X
4. Designations for electrical WORK not included in the above Paragraphs shall be NEMA 4X.
5. Installations in hazardous locations shall conform strictly to the requirements of the indicated Class, Group, and Division.
B. Material Requirements
1. Provide sealing fittings in chlorine and hydrofluosilicic (HFS) acid areas.
2. Construct NEMA 4X enclosures of Type 316 stainless steel, except in chlorine and HFS areas where non-metallic enclosures shall be provided.
3. Do not coat NEMA 4X enclosures.
4. Construct NEMA 7 enclosures of cast aluminum where used with aluminum conduit, and of cast iron when used with galvanized steel conduit.
5. Do not coat NEMA 7 and 9 enclosures.
6. Construct NEMA 1, 3R, and 12 enclosures of steel, and prime and coat with ANSI 61 light grey paint.
1.11 TESTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for factory and field tests indicated in Division 26, as required by the ENGINEER, and as required by other authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Furnish necessary testing equipment.
C. Pay the costs of the tests, including replacement parts and labor, due to damage resulting from damaged equipment or from testing and correction of a faulty installation.
D. Reporting
1. Where test reporting is indicated, submit proof-of-design test reports for mass-produced equipment with the Shop Drawings.
2. Submit factory performance test reports for custom-manufactured equipment for approval prior to shipment.
3. Submit field test reports for review prior to Substantial Completion.
E. Remove and replace equipment or material that fails a test, or, if the ENGINEER approves, repair and retested for compliance.
F. Corrections to equipment or materials with a factory warranty shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be performed in a manner that does not void the warranty.
1.12 DEMOLITION AND RELATED WORK
A. General
1. Perform electrical demolition WORK as indicated.
26 00 00-6
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. The demolition WORK may also be indicated on non-electrical Drawings.
3. Coordinate with all trades regarding electrical de-energization, disconnection, and removal, and the overall sequence of construction.
B. Electrical Requirements for Removed Equipment
1. Remove dedicated wiring and exposed conduits back to the source.
2. Abandon in place wiring that shares conduits with other equipment wiring, except power wiring.
3. Remove power wiring from the power source to the initial pull box, junction box or manhole remote from the panel, and abandon in place the remaining wiring.
4. Encased Conduits
a. Abandon in place wiring routed through encased conduits. b. Cut encased conduits flush to the floor and grout flush with the floor. Remove exposed conduit to the first fitting/coupling before encasement. Remove the fitting/coupling and replace with a 5-thread conduit cap.
5. Remove remote-mounted starters, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, sensors, and transmitters.
C. Where new lighting and receptacles are installed, remove old lighting, receptacles, switches, wiring, and conduits.
D. Junction Boxes
1. Wiring and conduits indicated to be extended shall be terminated in a new junction box with terminal strips.
2. Provide a junction box with a NEMA rating in accordance with the area in which it is located, and sized as required.
3. Properly identify wires and terminals before disconnection.
E. Removed materials and equipment not indicated as “RETURN TO OWNER”, upon removal, shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to dispose of off- Site.
F. Remove and relocate material and equipment indicated to be relocated or reused, and reinstall to be protected from damage.
G. Place materials indicated to be returned to the OWNER in boxes, with the contents clearly marked, and store at a location determined by the ENGINEER.
H. [Identification
1. Where motor control centers and panelboards are indicated to have components, assemblies, or circuits removed and reconnected, provide the affected MCC compartments with new engraved nameplates worded as indicated and matching the existing, or modify the panelboard schedule to indicate the revised circuits.
2. Pencil or magic marker markings directly on the MCC or panelboard breaker will not be accepted.
1.13 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING
A. General
26 00 00-7
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Continuance of facility operation during upgrades is critical, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the WORK to be provided in, on, or adjacent to existing equipment.
2. Submit a written sequencing request, including the sequence and duration of activities to be performed during plant shutdown. Schedule of WORK, shall be subject to OWNER and Engineer approval, to minimize required shutdown time.
3. Switching, safety tagging, and lock-out, as required for plant shutdown or to isolate existing equipment, shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR under the direction of OWNER.
B. Modifications
1. Perform modifications or alterations to existing electrical facilities as required to successfully install and integrate the proposed electrical equipment as indicated.
2. Perform modifications to existing equipment, panels, and cabinets in a professional manner.
3. Repair coatings to match existing.
4. The costs for modifications to existing electrical facilities that are required for a complete and operating system shall be included as part of the WORK.
C. Existing Utilities
1. Exercise extreme caution when digging trenches to not damage existing underground utilities.
2. The cost of repairs of damages caused during construction shall be included as a part of the WORK.
D. Field Verifications
1. Visit the Site before submitting a Bid to become better acquainted with the WORK of this Contract.
2. The lack of knowledge will not be accepted as justification for extra compensation to perform the WORK.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for identifying available existing circuit breakers in lighting panels for the intended use as required.
4. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for field verifying the available space in substation switchboards to integrate new power circuit breakers.
5. The cost for the above verifications shall be included as part of the WORK.
E. Installation of Temporary Equipment
1. To facilitate the continuous operation of existing equipment, provide the temporary equipment as indicated.
2. Submit installation and connection details for review and acceptance by the ENGINEER.
3. Costs associated with these temporary installations shall be included as part of the WORK.
4. Temporary wiring and equipment shall remain the property of the CONTRACTOR unless indicated otherwise.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide equipment and materials that are new and are the products of experienced and reputable manufacturers in the industry.
26 00 00-8
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. Provide equipment and materials listed by UL and bearing the UL label, where UL requirements apply.
C. Furnish equipment and material products of the same manufacturer. Equipment and materials shall be of industrial grade standard of construction.
D. Temperature Ratings of Equipment Terminations
1. Provide terminations and lugs rated for use with 75-degree C conductors.
2. Wire sizes in the Contract Documents are based on NEC ampacity tables using the 75-degree C ratings.
3. Provide equipment and materials suitable for storage, installation and operation in an ambient of 0C to 50C up to an elevation of 3,300 feet above sea level, except where more stringent conditions are stated in individual equipment specifications.
E. Furnish factory finished electrical equipment, wireways and panels with manufacturer's standard primer and enamel topcoats, unless stated otherwise in the individual equipment specifications.
1. Provide 1 pint of the equipment manufacturer's touch-up paint per 500 square feet of painted surface for repair of damaged enamel topcoats.
2.02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates
1. Fabricate nameplates from white-letter, black-face laminated plastic engraving stock, such as Formica Type ES-1 or equal.
2. Securely fasten each nameplate, using fasteners constructed of brass, cadmium-plated steel, or stainless steel, and screwed into inserts or tapped holes as required.
3. Provide engraved characters of the block style, with no characters smaller than 1/8-inch top to bottom.
4. Provide nameplates for field mounted devices and instruments, such as pressure switches, limit switches, flow meters, etc. Identify the name of the device and its unique identifier:
Examples: Pressure
Switch Limit Switch
PS-1 LS-1
5. Where it is impractical to attach laminated nameplates to field devices, provide 19-gauge, 2- inch square brass tags with 1/4-inch black filled engraving. Provide Seton Standard Brass Valve tags or equivalent. Attach tags with No. 16 brass jack chain.
B. Conductor and Equipment Identification
1. Provide heat shrink sleeve markers, Brady Permasleeve or approved equal.
2.03 PROTECTIVE MATTING
A. Provide full-width, high-voltage switchboard matting in front of indoor switchgear, service equipment, panelboards and motor control centers.
B. For 600-volt equipment, provide matting that is 1/4-inch-thick and 36-inches wide.
C. Matting Manufacturer, or Equal
1. W.H.Salisbury and Company; Mats, Inc.; Rhino
26 00 00-9
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide materials and provisions required for a complete and operable system, even if not required explicitly by the Contract Documents.
B. Typical provisions include terminal lugs not furnished with vendor-supplied equipment, compression connectors for cables, splices, junction and terminal boxes, and control wiring required by vendor-furnished equipment to connect with other equipment indicated in the Contract Documents.
C. The Drawings diagrammatically indicate the desired location and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and shall be used as closely as possible.
D. Exact locations shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR in the field, based on the physical size and arrangement of equipment, finished elevations, and other obstructions.
E. Conduits
1. Where conduit development drawings or "home runs" are indicated, route the conduits in accordance with those requirements.
2. Provide exposed or encased routings as indicated, except conceal conduit in finished areas unless indicated otherwise.
3. Size conduits encased in a slab for conduit OD not to exceed 1/3 of the slab thickness, and lay out and space as to not impede concrete flow.
F. Placement
1. Install conduit and equipment as to avoid obstructions, to preserve headroom, and to keep openings and passageways clear.
2. Locate luminaires, switches, convenience outlets, and similar items within finished rooms as indicated.
3. Where exact locations are not indicated, such locations will be determined by the ENGINEER.
4. If equipment is installed without instruction and must be moved, the cost of moving shall be included as part of the WORK.
5. Adjust luminaire locations in order to avoid obstructions and to minimize shadows.
G. Circuits
1. Wherever conduits and wiring for lighting and receptacles are not indicated, it shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to provide lighting and receptacle-related conduits and wiring as required, based on the actual installed fixture layout and the circuit designations as indicated.
2. Provide No. 12 AWG minimum wiring, and 3/4-inch minimum conduits (exposed) and one- inch minimum conduits (encased).
3. Where circuits are combined in the same raceway, de-rate conductor ampacities in accordance with NEC requirements.
H. Workmanship
1. Install materials and equipment in strict accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer, and using workers skilled in the WORK.
26 00 00-10
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Coordinate installation in the field with other trades in order to avoid interferences.
I. Protection of Equipment and Materials
1. Fully protect materials and equipment against damage from any cause.
2. Cover materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred, or splattered with water, foam, plaster, or paint.
3. Keep moving parts clean and dry.
4. Replace or refinish damaged materials or equipment, including faceplates of panels and switchboard sections, as part of the WORK.
J. Provide incoming utility power equipment in conformance with the utility's requirements.
K. Provide starters shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 29 13 – Solid State Reduced Voltage Starting, and with Section 26 05 15 – Industrial Control Panels for starters not in MCC'S.
3.02 CORE DRILLING
A. Perform core drilling as required for the installation of raceways through concrete walls and floors.
B. Base the locations of floor penetrations, as may be required, on field conditions.
C. Verify exact core drilling locations based on equipment actually furnished as well as exact field placement.
D. To the extent possible, identify the existence and locations of encased raceways and other piping in existing walls and floors with the OWNER prior to any core drilling activities.
E. Repair damage to encased conduits, wiring, and piping as part of the WORK.
3.03 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for indoor floor-standing electrical equipment.
B. Extend housekeeping pads for equipment, including future units, 3-1/2 inches above the surrounding finished floor or grade, and 2 inches larger in both dimensions than the equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide concrete housekeeping curbs for conduit stub-ups in indoor locations that are not concealed by equipment enclosures.
D. Extend housekeeping curbs to 3-1/2 inches above the finished floor or grade.
3.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide nameplates for panelboards, control and instrumentation panels, starters, switches, and pushbutton stations.
B. In addition to nameplates, equip control devices with standard collar-type legend plates.
C. Identify control devices within enclosures as indicated and similar to the subparagraph above.
D. Provide suitable inscribed finish plates for toggle switches that control loads out of sight of switches and for multi-switch locations of more than 2 switches.
E. Use equipment names and tag numbers, where indicated, on nameplates.
F. Provide typewritten circuit directories for panelboards, that accurately reflect the outlets connected to each circuit.
26 00 00-11
General Electrical Work
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
G. Terminal Blocks
1. Label termination points on terminal blocks by identifiers on the blocks.
2. Provide identifiers that have been preprinted by the terminal manufacturer or custom-printed.
3. Hand-lettered markers will not be accepted.
H. Provide arc-flash labels for all distribution equipment, stand-alone disconnects, starters, and VFDs.
Fill in all values as required by NFPA 70E, and as calculated as part of the Protective Device Study. Verify that all settings as prescribed by the approved Protective Device Study have been implemented in the field.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Before final acceptance, thoroughly clean the electrical WORK of cement, plaster, and other materials.
B. Remove temporary tags, markings, stickers, and the like.
C. Remove oil and grease spots with a non-flammable cleaning solvent by carefully wiping and scraping cracks and corners.
D. Apply touch-up paint to scratches on panels and cabinets.
E. Vacuum clean electrical cabinets and enclosures. Do not use compressed air to clean cabinets.
F. Clean luminaires inside and out. Replace failed lamps.
G. Properly dispose cleaning debris and refuse off-site.
END OF SECTION
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 01 26-1
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 01 26
ELECTRICAL TESTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the WORK necessary to test, commission, and demonstrate that the electrical work satisfies the criteria of these Specifications and functions as required by the Contract Documents.
B. The WORK of this Section includes furnishing the labor, equipment, and power required to support the testing indicated in other Divisions of these Specifications. Electrical testing indicated herein and functional testing of power and controls not tested under Division 17 - Instrumentation, shall be completed before commencement of the 7 Day test of Section. This scope may require the CONTRACTOR to activate circuits, shutdown circuits, run equipment, make electrical measurements, replace blown fuses, and install temporary jumpers, etc.
C. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work, apply to the WORK of this Section.
D. Carry out tests indicated herein for individual items of materials and equipment in other Sections.
Testing shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, these Specifications, and applicable NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications, NEMA, ANSI, NFPA, and ASTM Standards.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 33 03 Submittal Procedures
B. Section 26 00 00 General Electrical Work
C. Section 26 05 10 Electric Motors
D. Section 26 05 15 Industrial Control Panels
E. Section 26 05 19 Wire and Cabling
F. Section 26 05 26 Grounding
G. Section 26 05 33 Electrical Raceway Systems
H. Section 26 05 36 Wiring Devices
I. Section 26 05 43 Underground Raceway Systems
J. Section 26 12 16 Panelboards and General-Purpose Dry Type Transformers K. Section 26 29 00 Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
L. Section 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switch
M. Division 40 Process & Instrumentation Specifications
1. The CONTRACTOR'S attention is directed to the requirement for proper coordination of the WORK of this Section with the WORK of equipment Specifications, the WORK of instrumentation Sections.
1.03 REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Testing shall conform to the latest provisions of the following agencies:
1. NEC (NFPA 70) National Electrical Code: 2020 Edition B. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations apply:
26 01 26-2
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute
2. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
3. IEEE 400 – 2001, Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems
4. IEEE 576 – 2000, Recommended Practice for Installation, Termination, and Testing of Insulated Power Cable as Used in Industrial and Commercial Applications
5. NETA, International Electrical Testing Association
6. NETA ATS, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.
7. NETA MTS, Maintenance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.
C. The publications listed above form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
D. Where a date is given for reference standards, the edition of that date shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of the Notice Inviting Bids shall be used.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section [01 33 03] –Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit complete system test procedures for review. Test procedures shall include but not be limited to:
1. Detailed procedures in sufficient detail to verify conformance with these Specifications.
2. Incorporation of the Test Record Sheets included at the end of this Section.
3. Detailed comprehensive testing schedule including:
a. Each major piece of electrical distribution equipment. b. Each major electrical subsystem.
c. Duration of each test.
d. Milestone test completion date.
e. Ambient Conditions at time of test
f. Date of test results submittals following completion of the tests. g. Names and qualifications of the individual(s) responsible for performing the testing.
C. Following completion of the test submit the completed test results to the Engineer for review. The results shall include a dedicated section with the “as-left” settings of all devices, relays, circuit breakers, etc.
D. Test result shall be submitted in one submittal
E. Test reports shall be based on NETA’s latest Acceptance Testing Specifications having a sign-off, pass/fail data filed for each line item covered by NETA’s Acceptance Testing Specifications latest edition.
1.05 COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning in Section 01 75 06 shall not be attempted until all subsystems have been found to operate satisfactorily.
B. Commissioning shall only be attempted as a function of normal plant operation in which plant process flows and levels are routine and equipment operates automatically in response to flow 26 01 26-3
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
and level parameters or computer command, as applicable. Simulation of process parameters shall be considered only upon receipt of a written request by the CONTRACTOR.
1.06 TESTING ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS
A. Testing organization shall be corporately and financially independent of the supplier, producer and installer of the equipment.
B. Testing organization shall meet Federal OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907, 1910 and 1936. Membership in the National Electrical Testing Association constitutes proof of meeting such criteria.
C. Testing organization shall provide all materials, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform inspections and tests.
1.07 SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS
A. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements:
1. Occupational Safety and Health Act.
2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety Council.
3. Applicable state and local safety operating procedures.
4. Owner's safety practices.
5. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 70E
6. American National Standards for Personnel Protection B. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized. Exceptions must be thoroughly reviewed to identify safety hazards and devise adequate safeguards.
C. The testing firm shall have a designated safety representative on the project to supervise the testing operations with respect to safety.
PART 2 - TESTING & REPORTS
2.01 PRE-ENERGIZATION AND OPERATING TESTS
A. The complete electrical system shall be performance tested when first installed on-site. Each protective, switching, and control circuit shall be adjusted in accordance with the recommendations of the protective device study and tested by actual operation using current injection or equivalent methods as necessary to ensure that each and every such circuit operates correctly to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction.
1. Instrument Transformers. All instrument transformers shall be tested to verify correct polarity and burden.
2. Protective Relays. Each protective relay shall be demonstrated to operate by injecting current or voltage, or both, at the associated instrument transformer output terminal and observing that the associated switching and signaling functions occur correctly and in proper time and sequence to accomplish the protective function intended.
3. Switching Circuits. Each switching circuit shall be observed to operate the associated equipment being switched.
4. Control and Signal Circuits. Each control or signal circuit shall be observed to perform its proper control function or produce a correct signal output.
5. Metering Circuits. All metering circuits shall be verified to operate correctly from voltage and current sources, similarly to protective relay circuits. 26 01 26-4
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
6. Acceptance Tests. Complete acceptance tests shall be performed, after the station installation is completed, on all assemblies, equipment, conductors, and control and protective systems, as applicable, to verify the integrity of all the systems.
7. Relays and Metering Utilizing Phase Differences. All relays and metering that use phase differences for operation shall be verified by measuring phase angles at the relay under actual load conditions after operation commences.
B. Test Report. A test report covering the results of the tests required in the Pre-Energization and Operating Tests shall be delivered to the authority having jurisdiction prior to energization.
Acceptance Testing shall be in accordance with NETA ATS, Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. The following test requirements supplement test and acceptance criteria that may be stated elsewhere.
B. Perform Electrical Tests after electrical installation is 100% completed.
3.02 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLES
A. Switching, include remote control, if present in system. Circuitry is in accordance with panel schedules. All interior and exterior lighting shall be checked for proper operation.
B. Test ground interrupter (GFI) receptacles and circuit breakers for proper operation by methods sanctioned by the receptacle manufacturer.
3.03 SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.
1. Inspect for physical, electrical and mechanical condition.
2. Compare equipment nameplate information with latest one-line diagram and report discrepancies.
3. Check for proper anchorage, required area clearances, physical damage and proper alignment.
4. Inspect all doors, panels and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit and missing hardware.
5. Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to drawings.
6. Verify that current and potential transformer ratios correspond to drawings.
7. Inspect all bus connections for high resistance. Use low-resistance ohmmeter or check tightness of bolted bus joints by using a calibrated torque wrench. a. Refer to manufacturer's instructions or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
8. Test all electrical and mechanical interlock systems for proper operation and sequencing.
9. Closure attempt shall be made on locked open devices. Opening attempt shall be made on locked closed devices.
10. Clean entire switchgear using manufacturer's approved methods and materials.
11. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
12. Verify proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.
13. Lubrication
a. Verify appropriate contact lubricant on moving current carrying parts. 26 01 26-5
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
b. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
14. Exercise all active components.
15. Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for proper operation.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform test on all instrument transformers in accordance with Instrument Transformer Section.
2. Perform ground-resistance tests in accordance with Grounding Systems Section.
3. Perform insulation-resistance test on each bus section, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one (1) minute. Test voltages and minimum resistances shall be in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
4. Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring. Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.
5. Perform control wiring performance test. Use the elementary diagrams of the switchgear to identify each remote control and protective device. Conduct tests to verify satisfactory performance of each control feature.
6. Perform secondary voltage energization test on all control power circuits and potential circuits as detailed below. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and at each terminal on devices.
7. Perform current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of switchgear. a. Perform current test by primary injection, where possible, with magnitudes such that a minimum of 1.0 ampere flows in the secondary circuit.
b. Where primary injection is impractical, utilize secondary injection with a minimum current of 1.0 ampere.
c. Test current at each device.
8. Determine accuracy of all meters per Metering and Instrumentation Section. Verify multipliers.
9. Control Power Transformers - Dry Type
a. Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring and overall general condition.
b. Verify proper primary and secondary fuse ratings or circuit breakers. c. Verify proper interlock function and contact operation. d. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurement from winding-to-winding and windings-to-ground. Test voltage and minimum resistances shall be in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Results shall be temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14.
e. Perform secondary wiring integrity test. Disconnect transformer at secondary terminals and connect secondary wiring to proper secondary voltage. Check potential at all devices.
f. Verify proper secondary voltage by energizing primary winding with system voltage.
Measure secondary voltage with the secondary wiring disconnected.
10. Potential Transformer Circuits
26 01 26-6
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
a. Perform secondary wiring integrity test. Disconnect transformer at secondary terminals and connect secondary wiring to proper secondary voltage. Check for proper potential at all devices.
b. Verify secondary voltage by energizing primary winding with system voltage. Measure secondary voltage with the secondary wiring disconnected.
11. Test circuit breakers in accordance with Circuit Breaker paragraphs.
C. Test Values
1. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with NETA ATS Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
2. Insulation-resistance test shall be performed in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
Values of insulation resistance less than this table or manufacture's minimum should be investigated.
3.04 LOW-VOLTAGE CABLES-600V MAXIMUM
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Compare cable data with drawings and specifications.
2. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with single-line diagram.
3. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer’s published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12.
4. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.
5. Inspect for correct identification, arrangements, and cable color coding.
6. Inspect cable jacket insulation and condition.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. a. Motor feeders shall be tested with motors disconnected and controller open. b. Motor control circuits shall be tested and verified for proper operation with control stations and overcurrent devices connected.
c. Panelboard feeders shall be tested with feeder breaker open and panel-board connected.
If a lighting transformer is associated with the panelboard, it shall be connected and the test made for both primary and secondary sides.
d. Conductors of main lighting feeders, including lighting panel shall be tested with branch circuits open.
2. Prior to performing insulation resistance tests on cables, verify that they are not connected to a solid-state device.
a. Equipment shall be disconnected to avoid damage during prior to testing. b. The CONTRACTOR shall notify Engineer if minimum insulation values cannot be obtained.
26 01 26-7
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
4. Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection.
C. Test Values – Visual and Mechanical
1. Compare bolted connection resistance to values of similar connections. Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12 unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer.
D. Test Values – Electrical
1. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. In the absence of manufacturer’s published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.1. Values of insulation resistance less than this table or manufacturer’s recommendations shall be investigated to determine cause of deviations.
3. Cable shall exhibit continuity.
4. Deviations in resistance between parallel conductors shall be investigated to determine cause of deviations.
3.05 CIRCUIT BREAKERS - LOW-VOLTAGE - INSULATED-CASE
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Check circuit breaker for proper mounting and compare nameplate data to drawings and specifications.
2. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
3. Inspect case for cracks or other defects.
4. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer’s published data or NETA ATS- 2017, Table 100.12.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform a contact-resistance test.
2. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute.
3. Determine long-time minimum pickup current by primary current injection where practical.
4. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic test by passing three hundred percent (300%) rated current through each pole separately. Record trip time.
5. Determine short time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
6. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injections.
7. Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection using run-up or pulse method.
C. Test Values
26 01 26-8
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Compare contact resistance or millivolt drop values to adjacent poles and similar breakers.
Investigate deviations of more than fifty percent (50%). Values of resistance less than this table or manufacturer’s recommendations shall be investigated to determine cause of deviations.
2. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megohms.
3. Trip characteristic of breakers shall fall within manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.
4. All trip times shall fall within Table ICO. Circuit breakers exceeding specified trip time at three hundred percent (300%) of pickup shall be tagged defective.
5. Instantaneous pickup values shall be within values shown on Table ICI.
Table ICO
Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Overcurrent Trip Test
(At 300% of Rated Continuous Current of Circuit Breaker) Maximum Breaker
Voltage Volts
Range of Related
Continuous Current
Amperes
Maximum Trip Time in
Seconds*
240 15-45 50
240 50-100 70
600 15-45 70
600 50-100 125
240 110-225 200
240 250-400 300
600 110-225 250
600 250-400 300
600 450-600 350
600 700-1200 500
600 1400-2500 600
600 3000-5000 650
*For integrally-fused circuit breakers, trip times may be substantially longer if tested with the fuses replaced by solid links (shorting bars).
Table ICI
Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Instantaneous Trip Tolerances Tolerances of High and Low Settings
Frame Size, Amperes
High Low
<250 +40%
-25%
+40%
-30%
>400 +25% +30%
26 01 26-9
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3.06 CIRCUIT BREAKERS - LOW-VOLTAGE - POWER
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate data with drawings and specifications.
2. Perform mechanical operation test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Check cell fit and element alignment and proper operation of racking interlocks.
4. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12 unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer.
5. Check arc chutes for damage.
6. Clean entire circuit breaker using approved methods and materials.
7. Lubricate as required.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform a contact-resistance test.
2. Perform an insulation-resistance test at 1000 volts dc from pole-to-pole and from each pole- to-ground with breaker closed and across open contacts of each phase.
3. Determine long-time minimum pickup current by primary current injection.
4. Determine long-time delay by primary injection.
5. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
6. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection.
7. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection.
8. Make adjustments for final settings in accordance with breaker setting sheet.
9. Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground-fault or under voltage relays, to ensure operation of shunt trip devices. Check the operation of electrically-operated breakers in their cubicle.
10. Check charging mechanism.
C. Test Values
1. Compare contact resistance or millivolt drop values to adjacent poles and similar breakers.
Investigate deviations of more than fifty percent (50%).
2. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megohms. Investigate values less than 100 megohms.
3. Trip characteristics of breakers when adjusted to setting sheet parameters shall fall within manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band.
3.07 PROTECTIVE RELAYS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect relays for physical damage and compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Inspect cover gasket for proper seal; clean cover glass; check for foreign material, particularly in disc slots of permanent and electromagnets; check disk clearance; check conditions of spiral spring and case contacts.
3. Check for freedom of movement, proper travel and alignment, and tightness of mounting hardware and tap plugs.
26 01 26-10
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
4. Set relays in accordance with approved settings from Specification Section 26 05 73 – Protective Device Studies.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform insulation-resistance test on each circuit-to-frame. Do not perform this test on solid- state devices.
2. Perform the following tests at the recommended trip settings.
3. Pickup parameters on each operating element.
4. Perform timing test at two (2) points on time-current curve.
5. Pickup target and seal-in units.
6. Special tests as required to check operation of restraint, directional, and other elements per manufacturer's instruction manual.
7. Perform phase-angle and magnitude contribution tests on all differential and directional-type relays after energization to vectorially prove proper polarity and connection.
3.08 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage and nameplate information for compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Verify proper connection of transformers with system requirements.
3. Verify tightness of all bolted connections and assure that adequate clearances exist between primary circuits and secondary circuit wiring.
4. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.
5. Test proper operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism (tip out) and grounding operation when applicable.
6. Verify proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential transformers.
B. Electrical Tests - Current Transformers
1. Perform insulation-resistance test of the current transformer and wiring-to-ground at 1000V dc. Do not perform this test on solid-state devices.
2. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer.
3. Perform a ratio-verification test using the voltage or current method in accordance with ANSI C57.13.1.
4. Perform an excitation test on transformers used for relaying applications in accordance with ANSI C57.13.1.
5. Measure relaying circuit burdens at transformer terminals and determine the total burden in ohms at 60Hz.
6. When applicable, perform insulation-resistance and dielectric withstand tests on the primary winding with secondary grounded. Test voltages shall be per NETA ATS, Table 100.1 and ITD respectively.
C. Electrical Tests - Voltage Transformers
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and windings-to-ground. Test voltages shall be applied for one (1) minute in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Do not perform this test with solid-state devices connected.
26 01 26-11
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Perform a polarity test on each transformer to verify the polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as applicable.
3. Perform a ratio test using a transformer-turns-ratio test set or by voltage comparison method.
4. Perform a dielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the secondary windings connected-to-ground. The dielectric voltage shall be in accordance with Table ITD and applied for one (1) minute.
D. Test Values
1. Insulation-resistance measurement on any instrument transformer shall be not less than that shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
2. Perform a burden/saturation calculation on current transformers supplying relaying circuits.
3. Ratio accuracies shall be within 0.5% of nameplate or manufacturer's specifications.
4. Withstand tests shall be evaluated as pass/fail.
Table ITD
Instrument Transformer Dielectric Test Voltage
Dielectric Withstandability
Field Test Voltage (kV)Nominal System Voltage Test BIL (kV) AC DC
2.4 45 11.3 15
4.8 60 14.3 19
13.8 95 25.5 34
13.8 110 25.5 34
25 125 30.0 40
25 150 37.5 50
Table is derived from paragraph 8.8.2 and tables 2 and 7 of ANSI/IEEE C57.13, "Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers."
3.09 METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Examine all devices for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.
2. Verify that meter types, scales, and connections are in accordance with drawings and specifications.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Determine accuracy of meters at 25/50/75/100% of full scale for each metered parameter.
2. Calibrate meters to one-half percent (0.5%).
3. Verify all instrument multipliers.
3.10 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract documents and NFPA 70 National Electrical Code Article 250.
26 01 26-12
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Inspect physical and mechanical conditions.
3. Inspect bolted electrical connection for high resistance using one or more of the following methods:
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench methods in accordance with manufacturer published data and NETA ATS Table 100.12.
4. Inspect anchorage.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method per ANSI/IEEE Standard 81 "IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System." Instrumentation utilized shall be as defined in Section 12 of the above guide and shall be specifically designed for ground impedance testing. Provide sufficient spacing so that plotted curves flatten in the 62% area of the distance between the item under test and the current electrode.
2. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and derived neutral points.
C. Test Values
1. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall be no greater than five ohms for large commercial or industrial systems and one ohm or less for generating or transmission station grounds unless otherwise specified by the owner. (Reference ANSI/IEEE Standard 142).
3. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm.
3.11 GROUND-FAULT SYSTEMS (NEC 230-95)
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage and compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Inspect neutral main bonding connection to assure:
a. Zero-sequence sensing system is grounded.
b. Ground-strap sensing systems are grounded through sensing device. c. Ground connection is made ahead of neutral disconnect link on zero-sequence sensing systems.
d. Grounded conductor (neutral) is solidly grounded.
3. Inspect control power transformer to ensure adequate capacity for system.
4. Manually operate monitor panels (if present) for:
a. Trip test
b. No trip test
c. Nonautomatic reset
5. Record proper operation and test sequence.
26 01 26-13
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
6. Set pickup and time-delay settings in accordance with the settings provided by the owner/user's electrical engineer.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Measure system neutral insulation resistance to ensure no shunt ground paths exist. Remove neutral-ground disconnect link. Measure neutral insulation resistance and replace link.
2. Determine the relay pickup current by current injection at the sensor and operate the circuit interrupting device.
3. Test the relay timing by injecting three hundred percent (300%) of pickup current, or as specified by manufacturer.
4. Test the system operation at fifty-seven percent (57%) rated control voltage, if applicable.
5. Test zone interlock systems by simultaneous sensor current injection and monitoring zone blocking function.
6. On multiple sources, tie breaker, etc., systems, devise a simulation scheme that fully proves correct operation.
C. Test Parameters
1. System neutral insulation shall be a minimum of one hundred (100) ohms, preferably one (1) megohm or greater.
2. Relay timing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published time-current characteristic curves but in no case longer than one (1) second for fault currents equal to or greater than 3,000 amperes.
3. Relay pickup value shall be within +/-10% of setting and in no case greater than 1200A.
3.12 AC MOTORS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate data with drawings and specifications.
2. Inspect for proper anchorage, mounting, grounding, connection, and lubrication.
3. When applicable, perform special tests such as air gap spacing and pedestal alignment.
4. Check for unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs of overheating during initial test run.
B. Electrical Tests - Induction Motors
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 43.
2. Motor 200 HP and Less - Test duration shall be one minute with resistances tabulated at thirty and sixty seconds. Calculate the dielectric absorption ratio.
3. Motor Larger than 200 HP - Test duration shall be ten minutes with resistances tabulated at thirty seconds, one minute, and ten minutes. Calculate the dielectric absorption ratio and polarization indexes.
4. Perform insulation-resistance test on pedestal per manufacturer instructions.
5. Test motor starter prior to energizing the motor.
6. Check resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits for conformance with drawings. Check that metering or relaying devices using the RTD's are of the proper rating.
7. Check that the motor space heater circuit is in proper operating condition and in accordance with drawings and specifications.
26 01 26-14
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
8. Check all protective devices in accordance with other sections of these specifications.
9. Perform a rotation test to ensure proper shaft direction.
10. Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes.
11. Perform vibration tests: Motors Larger than 200 HP - Perform vibration base-line test.
Amplitude shall be plotted versus frequency. For motors 200 HP and less perform vibration and amplitude test.
C. Test Values
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests at the test voltage listed in NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
Investigate dielectric absorption ratios less than 1.4 and polarization index ratios less than
1.5 for Class A insulation and 2.0 for Class B insulation.
2. Vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values shown in Table MAV.
3. Salient pole voltage drop should be equal for each pole. Investigate values that differ by more than ten percent (10%).
Table MAV
Maximum Allowable Vibration Per NEMA MG-1
Speed RPM Amplitude Inches Peak-to-Peak
3000 and above 0.001
1500-2999 0.0015
1000-1499 0.002
999 and below 0.0025
3.13 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage, proper anchorage, and grounding.
2. Inspect equipment for compliance with drawings and specifications.
3. Motor-running protection:
a. Compare overload heater rating with motor full-load current rating to verify proper sizing. (Adjust as necessary if power factor correction capacitors are connected on load side of heaters.)
4. Check tightness of bolted connections using calibrated torque wrench.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Insulation tests:
a. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one (1) minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Measure insulation resistance of each starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to- ground with the starter contacts closed and the protective device open. Test voltage shall be in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
c. Measure insulation resistance of each control circuit with respect to ground. Refer to NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.
26 01 26-15
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Test motor overload units by injecting current through overload unit and monitoring trip time at three hundred percent (300%) of motor full-load current.
3. Test molded-case breakers per Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers paragraphs.
4. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.
5. Determine accuracy of all meters per Metering and Instrumentation paragraphs.
6. Test protective devices in accordance with Protective Relay paragraphs.
C. Test Values
1. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12 unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer.
2. Insulation-resistance test results shall conform with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
3. Control wiring-insulation test voltage shall be 500V dc for 300-volt rated cables and 1000V dc for 600-volt rated cables. Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.
4. Perform overload tests at three hundred percent (300%) of motor full-load current. Trip times shall be in accordance with manufacturer's tolerances. Investigate values in excess of one hundred twenty (120) seconds.
3.14 TRANSFORMERS – SMALL DRY-TYPE, AIR-COOLED (600 Volt and Below, less than 100 kVA single-phase or 1000 kVA three-phase)
A. Inspect for physical damage, broken insulation, tightness of connections, defective wiring and general condition.
B. Thoroughly clean unit prior to making any tests.
C. Perform insulation-resistance test. Calculate dielectric absorption ratio and polarization index.
Make measurements from winding-to-winding and windings-to ground. Test voltages and minimum resistance shall be in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Results shall be temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14.
D. Verify taps and connect transformer to desired tap, is applicable.
E. Energize primary winding with system voltage. Measure secondary voltage with the secondary load disconnected. Record results.
F. A functional test and check of electrical components is required prior to performing subsystem testing and commissioning. Compartments and equipment shall be cleaned as required by other provisions of these Specifications before commencement of functional testing. Functional testing shall comprise:
1. Visual and physical check of cables, circuit breakers, transformers, and connections associated with each item of new and modified equipment.
2. Verification that electrical equipment has been labeled with Arc Flash protection boundary and PPE levels, as required by Section 26 05 73 – Protective Device Studies.
3. Setting of protective relays in conformance with results of the Short Circuit Study required by Section 26 05 73 – Protective Device Studies and testing of relays to assure that relays will trip at the current value and time required by the Study.
4. Circuit Breakers
26 01 26-16
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
a. Circuit breakers that have adjustable time or pick-up settings for ground current, instantaneous overcurrent, short-time overcurrent, or long-time overcurrent, shall be field-adjusted by a representative of the circuit breaker manufacturer. b. Time and pickup setting shall correspond to the recommendations of the Short Circuit Study.
c. Setting shall be tabulated and proven for each circuit breaker in its installed position. d. Test results shall be certified by the person performing the tests and shall be submitted to the ENGINEER.
G. Complete ground testing of grounding electrodes per requirements below prior to operating the equipment.
H. Subsystem testing shall occur after the proper operation of alarm and status contacts has been demonstrated or otherwise accepted by the ENGINEER and after process control devices have been adjusted as accurately as possible. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for each alarm point, and alarm indicators shall be checked for proper operation. It is intended that the CONTRACTOR will adjust limit switches and level switches to their operating points prior to testing and will set pressure switches, flow switches, and timing relays as dictated by operating results.
I. Metering and indication lights for motors and other devices shall be tested for proper operation.
J. All control circuits such as motor, interlock and remote shall be tested for proper operation.
K. After initial settings have been completed, each subsystem shall be operated in the manual mode and it shall be demonstrated that operation is in compliance with the Contract Documents. Once the manual mode of operation has been proven, automatic operation shall be demonstrated to verify such items as proper start and stop sequence of pumps, proper operation of valves, proper speed control, etc.
L. Motor operated valves shall be tested after having been phased and tested for correct motor rotation and after travel and torque limit switches have been adjusted by a representative of the valve manufacturer. Tests shall verify status indication, proper valve travel, and correct command control from local and remote devices.
M. All lighting panels, circuits and fixtures; and power panels, circuits and receptacles shall be tested for proper operation.
N. Provide ground resistance tests on the main grounding electrode or system in the presence of the ENGINEER and submit results
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
a. Verify ground system is in compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Electrical Tests
a. Perform fall-of-potential test or alternative in accordance with IEEE Standard 81 on the main grounding electrode or system.
b. The earth resistance of each ground electrode shall be measured and recorded before electrodes are connected to the grounding loop.
c. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral points.
3. Test Values
26 01 26-17
Electrical Tests
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
a. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall be no greater than five ohms for commercial or industrial systems and one ohm or less for generating or transmission station grounds unless otherwise specified by the owner. b. Investigate point-to-point resistance values which exceed 0.5 ohm.
O. Subsystems shall be defined as individual and groups of pumps, conveyor systems, chemical feeders, air conditioning units, ventilation fans, air compressors, etc.
3.15 TEST REPORTS
A. The test report shall include the following:
1. Summary of project.
2. Description of equipment tested.
3. Description of test.
4. Test data.
5. Analysis and recommendations.
B. Test data records shall include the following minimum requirements:
1. Identification of the testing organization.
2. Equipment identification.
3. Humidity, temperature, and other atmospheric conditions that may affect the results of the tests/calibrations.
4. Date of inspections, tests, maintenance, and/or calibrations.
5. Identification of the testing technician.
6. Indication of inspections, tests, maintenance, and/or calibrations to be performed and recorded.
7. Indication of expected results when calibrations are to be performed.
8. Indication of “as-found” and “as-left” results.
9. Sufficient spaces to allow all results and comments to be indicated.
C. The testing firm shall furnish a copy or copies of the complete report to the owner as required in the acceptance contract.
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 05 10-1
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 05 10
ELECTRIC MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide electric motors, accessories, and appurtenances complete and operable, in conformance to the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section apply to low voltage 3 phase, AC squirrel cage induction motors throughout the Contract Documents, except as indicated otherwise.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall assign to the equipment supplier the responsibility to select suitable electric motors for the equipment. The choice of motor manufacturer shall be subject to review by the ENGINEER. Such review will consider future availability of replacement parts and compatibility with driven equipment
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 33 03 Submittal Procedures
B. Section 26 00 00 General Electrical Work
C. Section 26 29 00 Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
D. Section 26 29 13 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
1.03 REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Testing shall conform to the latest provisions of the following agencies:
1. NEC (NFPA 70) National Electrical Code: 2020 Edition B. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations apply:
1. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
a. NEMA MG-1, Motor and Generator Standards
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 03 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Complete motor data shall be submitted with the driven machinery Shop Drawings. Motor data shall include:
1. Machine name and specification number of driven machines
2. Motor manufacturer
3. Motor type or model and dimension drawing. Include motor weight.
4. Nominal horsepower
5. NEMA design
6. Enclosure
7. Frame size
8. Winding insulation class and temperature rise class
9. Voltage, phase, and frequency ratings
26 05 10-2
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
10. Service factor
11. Full load current at rated horsepower for application voltage
12. Full load speed
13. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and nominal efficiencies at 1/2 and 3/4 load.
14. Type of thermal protection or overtemperature protection, where included
15. Wiring diagram for devices such as motor leak detection, temperature, or zero speed switches, as applicable
16. Bearing data. Include recommendation for lubricants of required type bearings.
17. If utilized with a variable frequency controller, verify motor is inverter duty type. Include minimum speed at which motor may be operated for the driven machinery. Provide shaft grounding details and information. Provide insulated bearing details and information.
18. Power factor at 1/2, 3/4 and full load.
19. Recommended size for power factor correction capacitors to improve power factor to 0.95 percent lagging when operated at full load.
C. If water cooling is required for motor thrust bearings, the Shop Drawing submittals shall indicate this requirement.
1.05 FACILITY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General
1. Submit complete operation and maintenance manual in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 03.13 – O&M Manual Review Checklist.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Electric motors driving identical machines shall be identical.
B. Electric motors shall comply with NEMA MG-1 - Motor and Generator. Motors used with adjustable frequency drives shall comply with NEMA MG-1, Part 31, and shall be clearly identified as “Inverter Duty.”
C. Maximum motor loading shall be equal to nameplate horsepower rating or less, exclusive of service factor and be verifiable from the submittal data of the driven machinery.
D. Electric motors shall be NEMA Design B unless otherwise indicated. Starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the value in NEMA MG 1 shall not be permitted. Motors shall be suitable for the indicated starting method.
E. Motor Voltage Ratings
1. Low voltage motors shall have voltage ratings in accordance with the following, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Motors below 1/2 HP shall be rated 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. Dual voltage motors rated 115/208 volts is acceptable, provided leads are brought out to the conduit box. b. Motors 1/2 HP and larger shall be rated 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
F. Insulation
26 05 10-3
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Three phase motors shall be provided with Class F insulation, rated to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C and at the altitudes where the motors will be installed and operated, without exceeding Class B temperature rise limits stated in NEMA MG 1-
12.44. 2. Single phase motors shall have Class F insulation with temperature rise not to exceed the insulation class.
3. Motors to be operated from adjustable frequency drives shall be provided with insulation systems to withstand 1600-volt spikes, with dV/dT as defined in NEMA MG 1-31.
4. The adjustable frequency drive manufacturer shall coordinate with the motor manufacturer to determine when additional dV/dT protection is required. Where required, it shall be furnished and installed as per the manufacturer’s written instructions.
G. Motors (Non-hazardous locations)
1. 50 HP or smaller shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) with a Service Factor of 1.15 unless otherwise indicated.
2. Motors 50 HP and greater shall be TEFC, with a service factor of 1.15.
H. Motors (hazardous locations)
1. Motors for use in hazardous locations shall have enclosures suitable for the classification indicated. Such motors shall be U.L. listed and be stamped as such.
I. Motors larger than 50 HP installed outdoors or in unheated areas shall be provided with 120-volt AC space heaters, wired to a terminal strip in a low voltage motor junction box. If provided by the manufacturer when not specified, the manufacturer shall not require that they be connected or the CONTRACTOR shall connect them at no extra cost to the OWNER, in order to keep the warranty in force.
J. NEMA Premium Efficiency Motors
1. Motors with a nameplate rating of 1 HP and larger shall be NEMA premium efficient units.
Motors shall be stamped with the efficiency on the nameplate with the caption "NEMA Nominal Efficiency" or "NEMA Nom. Eff." Such motors shall have efficiencies determined by the test as set forth in ANSI/IEEE 112 - Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators, Method B.
2. Efficiency: Nominal efficiency and minimum efficiency shall be defined in accordance with the following tables. Both efficiencies shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal. 26 05 10-4
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
OPEN DRIP-PROOF (ODP)
FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCIES OF NEMA PREMIUM EFFICIENCY MOTORS RATED 600 VOLTS OR LESS
2 POLE 4 POLE 6 POLE
HP
Nom.
Effic.
Min.
Effic.
Nom.
Effic.
Min.
Effic.
Nom.
Effic.
Min.
Effic.
1 77.0 74.0 85.5 82.5 82.5 80.0
1.5 84.0 81.5 86.5 84.0 86.5 84.0
2 85.5 82.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 85.5
3 85.5 82.5 89.5 87.5 88.5 86.5
5 86.5 84.0 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5
7.5 88.5 86.5 91.0 89.5 90.2 88.5
10 89.5 87.5 91.7 90.2 91.7 90.2
15 90.2 88.5 93.0 91.7 91.7 90.2
20 91.0 89.5 93.0 91.7 92.4 91.0
25 91.7 90.2 93.6 92.4 93.0 91.7
30 91.7 90.2 94.1 93.0 93.6 92.4
40 92.4 91.0 94.1 93.0 94.1 93.0
50 93.0 91.7 94.5 93.6 94.1 93.0
60 93.6 92.4 95.0 94.1 94.5 93.6
75 93.6 92.4 95.0 94.1 94.5 93.6
100 93.6 92.4 95.4 94.5 95.0 94.1
125 94.1 93.0 95.4 94.5 95.0 94.1
150 94.1 93.0 95.8 95.0 95.4 94.5
200 95.0 94.1 95.8 95.0 95.4 94.5
250 95.0 94.1 95.8 95.0 95.8 95.0
300 95.4 94.5 95.8 95.0 95.8 95.0
350 95.4 94.5 95.8 95.0 95.8 95.0
400 95.8 95.0 95.8 95.0 -- --
450 96.2 95.4 96.2 95.4 -- --
500 96.2 95.4 96.2 95.4 -- --
Source: NEMA MG1 - 2016, Table 12-12
26 05 10-5
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
TOTALLY ENCLOSED - FAN COOLED (TEFC)
FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCIES OF NEMA PREMIUM EFFICIENCY MOTORS RATED 600 VOLTS OR LESS
2 POLE 4 POLE 6 POLE
HP
Nom.
Effic.
Min.
Effic.
Nom.
Effic.
Min.
Effic.
Nom.
Effic.
Min.
Effic.
1 77.0 74.0 85.5 82.5 82.5 80.0
1.5 84.0 81.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 85.5
2 85.5 82.5 86.5 84.0 88.5 86.5
3 86.5 84.0 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5
5 88.5 86.5 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5
7.5 89.5 87.5 91.7 90.2 91.0 89.5
10 90.2 88.5 91.7 90.2 91.0 89.5
15 91.0 89.5 92.4 91.0 91.7 90.2
20 91.0 89.5 93.0 91.7 91.7 90.2
25 91.7 90.2 93.6 92.4 93.0 91.7
30 91.7 90.2 93.6 92.4 93.0 91.7
40 92.4 91.0 94.1 93.0 94.1 93.0
50 93.0 91.7 94.5 93.6 94.1 93.0
60 93.6 92.4 95.0 94.1 94.5 93.6
75 93.6 92.4 95.4 94.5 94.5 93.6
100 94.1 93.0 95.4 94.5 95.0 94.1
125 95.0 94.1 95.4 94.5 95.0 94.1
150 95.0 94.1 95.8 95.0 95.8 95.0
200 95.4 94.5 96.2 95.4 95.8 95.0
250 95.8 95.0 96.2 95.4 95.8 95.0
300 95.8 95.0 96.2 95.4 95.8 95.0
350 95.8 95.0 96.2 95.4 95.8 95.0
400 95.8 95.0 96.2 95.4 -- --
450 95.8 95.0 96.2 95.4 -- --
500 95.8 95.0 96.2 95.4 -- --
Source: NEMA MG1 - 2016, Table 12-12
26 05 10-6
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
26 05 10-7
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
K. Two speed motors shall be of the 2-winding type.
L. Motor Capacity
1. Motor size shall be de-rated from nameplate values as follows:
a. Ambient Temperature
For ambient temperatures up to but not exceeding 40 degrees C, no derating is required.
For ambient temperatures exceeding 40 degrees but less than 50 degrees C, de- rate nameplate HP ratings to 85 percent.
b. Site Altitude: No derating is required for altitudes less than 3300 feet (1000 meters).
Higher altitudes require the following derating factors:
Altitude Derating Factor
3,300 to 5,000 ft 97 percent
5,001 to 6,600 ft 94 percent
6,601 to 8,300 ft 91 percent
8,301 to 9,900 ft 88 percent
9,901 to 11,500 ft 85 percent
2. Increased circuit breaker, magnetic starter, and conductor and conduit capacities required for motors larger than the indicated sizes shall be provided as part of the WORK.
2.02 ACCESSORY REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Horizontal motors 3 HP and larger and every vertical motor shall have split-type cast metal conduit boxes. Motors shall be provided with oversized conduit boxes. Where conduit sizes indicated do not match the motor terminal box, the CONTRACTOR shall provide means to accommodate the motor requirements. Motor boxes other than open drip-proof shall be gasketed.
B. Lifting Devices: Motors weighing 265lb (120Kg) or more shall have suitable lifting eyes for installation and removal.
C. Special Requirements: The CONTRACTOR shall refer to individual equipment specifications for special requirements such as motor winding thermal protection or multi-speed windings.
D. Grounding Lugs: Provide motor grounding lug suitable to terminate ground wire, sized as indicated.
E. Nameplate: Motors shall be fitted with permanent stainless-steel nameplates indelibly stamped or engraved with NEMA Standard motor data, in conformance with NEMA MG-1-10.40. Inverter duty motors shall be clearly identified as such.
F. Where motors are indicated by elementary schematics or specifications to have zero speed switches, the switches shall be factory mounted integral to the motors. Switches shall close the contacts when the motor is at zero speed.
26 05 10-8
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
G. Inverter duty motors shall be provided with shaft grounding rings. Rings shall be factory installed, and shall be manufactured by Aegis, or equal. The motor warranty shall include coverage against VFD-induced bearing damage or failure.
2.03 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION
A. Single Phase Motors: Single phase 120, 208-volt motors shall have integral thermal overload protection or shall be inherently current limited.
B. Thermostats: Where indicated or specified, winding thermostats shall be snap action, bi-metallic, temperature-actuated switch. Thermostats shall be provided with one normally closed contact.
The thermostat switch point shall be pre-calibrated by the manufacturer. All inverter duty motors shall be provided with winding thermostats, unless RTDs are specified. All explosion-proof motors shall be provided with winding thermostats.
2.04 MOTOR BEARINGS
A. Vertical Motors
1. Provide bearings of the type and size required to meet the thrust loading requirements with a rated B-10 life of 100,000 hours as defined by the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA).
2. Bearings for motors 75 HP and larger shall be oil lubricated and contained in an oil reservoir with oil sight level gage and oil fill and drain openings with plugs.
3. Equip grease lubricated bearings with fittings in each bearing housing. Fittings shall be accessible without removals of any covers or guards. Provide drains to prevent over lubrication.
B. Horizontal Motors:
1. General: Equip motors larger than one (1) HP with end single shielded bearings of either the anti-friction or sleeve type with a rated B-10 life of 100,000 hours as defined by the AFBMA.
2. Anti-Friction Type: Grease lubricated type with sealed end caps to prevent grease from migrating to the bearing exterior. Provide with an excess-grease reservoir located outboard of the bearing and provisions for purging old grease.
3. Sleeve Type: Oil lubricated type contained in an oil reservoir with oil sight level gage and oil fill and drain openings with plugs. Provide bearings with shaft seals and pressure-equalizing vents to prevent oil from migrating to the motor windings.
C. Inverter Duty Motors: Provide an insulated bearing to prevent circulating bearing currents.
2.05 CONNECTION BOXES
A. Provide motors with NEMA MG-1 type I connection boxes made of fabricated steel or cast-iron construction compatible with the motor specified. Provide motors larger than 150 Hp with NEMA MG-1 type II connection boxes. Provide boxes with gaskets between the box and motor and between the box and cover. Boxes shall be capable of rotation in 90 increments. Align boxes for bottom conduit entry.
B. Provide an auxiliary terminal box for terminating auxiliary and protective devices lead wires. 26 05 10-9
Electric Motors
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2.06 MANUFACTURERS, OR EQUAL
A.U.S. Motors/Nidec
B.Baldor
C.WEG
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Motor installation shall be performed in accordance with the motor manufacturer's written recommendations and the written requirements of the manufacturer of the driven equipment.
Shaft grounding devices shall be connected to the grounding system in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Related electrical WORK involving connections, controls, switches, and disconnects shall be performed in accordance with the applicable sections of Division 26.
3.02 STORAGE
A. Protect motors from exposure of elements for which they are not designed. Install and energize temporary electrical service to motors with electrical heaters.
B. Unless protected by manufacturer's packing, upon delivery, carefully wrap each motor in three layers of 8 mil minimum polyethylene. Secure the wrap with adhesive tape to minimize the entrance of moisture. For base mounted motors, wrap the entire assembly.
3.03 FACTORY TESTING
A. Motors rated 100 HP and larger shall be factory tested in conformance with IEEE 112, IEEE 43 - Recommended Practice for Testing Resistance of Rotating Machinery, and NEMA MG-2. Except where specific testing or witnessed shop tests are required by the specifications for driven equipment, factory test reports may be copies of routine test reports of electrically duplicate motors. Test report shall indicate test procedure and instrumentation used to measure and record data. Test report shall be certified by the motor manufacturer's test personnel and be submitted to the ENGINEER.
3.04 FIELD TESTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the following field tests (see also Section 26 01 26 – Electrical Testing]):
1. Inspect each motor installation for any deviation from rated voltage, phase, frequency, and improper installation.
2. Visually check for proper phase and ground connections. Verify that multi-voltage motors are connected for proper voltage. Verify shaft grounding devices are properly grounded.
3. Check winding and bearing temperature detectors and space heaters for functional operation.
4. Test for proper rotation prior to connection to the driven equipment.
5. Visually check that motor overload heaters are properly sized and that MCP breaker settings are correct for the motor installed.
6. Test insulation (megger test) of new and re-used motors in accordance with NEMA MG-1.
Test voltage shall be 1000 VAC plus twice the rated voltage of the motor.
END OF SECTION
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 05 15-1
Industrial Control Panels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 05 15
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide complete industrial control panels and/or local control stations as indicated herein or in other Sections of the Specifications.
B. This section also specifies miscellaneous electrical devices used throughout this project. These devices are not limited to use within industrial control panels or local control stations.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Industrial control panels and/or local control stations shall comply with the requirements of NEC (including Article 409), NEMA, and UL.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Shop Drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 03 –Submittal Procedures and 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
1. Ladder diagrams and written descriptions explaining ladder diagram operation and system operation.
2. Include catalog cuts of control equipment including enclosures, overcurrent devices, relays, pilot devices, terminations, and wire troughs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the equipment, panels and stations to satisfy the functional requirements in the relevant mechanical equipment and Instrumentation and Control specifications and the Electrical Elementary Schematics. Each panel and station shall be fabricated with UL labeled components. Equipment not specifically indicated as being WORK of other Sections shall be provided under this Section. All equipment, panels and stations shall be wired under this Section.
B. The controls shall be 120 V maximum. Where the electrical power supply is 240 V, single phase or 480 V, 3 phase, the station shall be provided with a fused control power transformer. Control conductors shall be provided in accordance with Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cabling C. Each panel and/or station shall be provided with identified terminal strips for the connection of external conductors. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient terminal blocks to connect 25 percent additional conductors for future use. Termination points shall be identified in accordance with Shop Drawings. The panels and/or stations shall be the source of power for all 120 VAC solenoid valves interconnected with the panels and/or stations. Equipment associated with the panels and/or stations shall be ready for service after connection of conductors to equipment, controls, panels and/or stations.
D. Wiring to door-mounted devices shall be extra flexible and anchored to doors using wire anchors cemented in place. Exposed terminals of door-mounted devices shall be guarded to prevent accidental personnel contact with energized terminals.
E. Enclosures
26 05 15-2
Industrial Control Panels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. In finished rooms, enclosures shall be NEMA 12 steel enclosures painted with ANSI 61 exterior and white interior.
2. In all other non-hazardous areas, enclosures shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel with brushed finish. Where possible, penetrations shall be made in such a manner to maintain the NEMA 4X rating. If this is not possible, the penetrations shall be made in such a manner to minimize entry of foreign materials into the enclosure, subject to approval by the ENGINEER.
3. In hazardous areas, enclosures shall be cast aluminum NEMA 7 and shall be UL listed for use in hazardous or classified locations.
4. In chemical areas for alum, sodium hypochlorite, etc., NEMA 4X fiberglass enclosures shall be used.
5. Enclosures shall be freestanding, pedestal-mounted, or equipment skid-mounted, as indicated. Internal control components shall be mounted on a removable mounting pan.
Mounting pan shall be finished white.
F. Disconnect Switches
1. Heavy duty, fusible, single throw switches shall be rated not less than 65 KAIC at 480 VAC.
2. Horsepower rated
3. UL listed
4. Pad lockable in "Off" position and door interlock
5. Enclosure per area classification in Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
6. 480 V, 3-phase, 3-pole (6-pole when used with 2-speed motor).
7. Auxiliary control contacts as applicable and where indicated.
8. As manufactured by GE, Eaton Electrical, Square D, or equal.
G. Identification of panel-mounted devices, conductors, and electrical components shall be in accordance with Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
H. Panel-mounted devices shall be mounted a minimum of 3-feet above finished floor elevation, but not higher than 6’-6” above finished floor, unless noted otherwise.
2.02 PANEL/STATION COMPONENTS
A. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall be the heavy-duty, oil-tight type, sized to 30- mm. Miniature style devices are not acceptable. Devices shall be as manufactured by Allen Bradley, EATON, Square-D, or equal.
1. Lens colors shall be GREEN for "run," "open," or "on"; RED for "stopped," "closed," or "off"; and AMBER for alarm.
2. Pilot lights shall be full voltage, push-to-test LED cluster type.
3. Provide hazardous location type pilot devices in classified locations.
B. Relays shall be 3 PDT with 10-amp contacts, plug-in type with indicating light, rectangular blades and provided with sockets for screw-type termination and hold-down clips. Relays shall be as manufactured by Square-D, Potter Brumfield, or equal.
C. Elapsed time meters shall be non-resettable type, read to a maximum of 99999.9 hours and shall be as manufactured by GE, EATON, or equal.
D. Magnetic starters shall be:
26 05 15-3
Industrial Control Panels
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. NEMA rated, Size 1 minimum. IEC or dual NEMA/IEC rated type are not acceptable.
2. FVNR type unless indicated otherwise.
3. Combination starters with magnetic only instantaneous trip circuit breakers such as EATON HMCP, SE GV5PB, or equal. Breakers shall be rated 65 KIAC minimum.
4. Control transformers shall be provided with primary and secondary fuses, 120 V maximum control voltage. VA rating of transformer shall be based on devices on the control schematic.
E. Terminal strips shall be provided for every panel and shall be the flanged fork or ring lug type suitable for No. 12 AWG stranded wire minimum. Provide 25 percent spare terminals in each panel.
F. Time delay relays shall be combination on delay and off delay (selectable) with adjustable timing ranges. Provide socket with screw terminal connections and retaining strap. Time delay relays shall be Square D, ATC, EATON, or equal.
2.03 FACTORY TESTING
A. Each panel/station shall be factory assembled and tested for sequence of operation prior to delivery.
2.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare lamps (minimum 2) and one spare lens for each color pilot lamp in each panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Panels/stations shall be installed in accordance with in Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Panels/stations shall be protected at the site from loss, damage, and the effects of weather.
Panels/stations shall be stored in an indoor, dry location. Heating shall be provided in areas subject to corrosion and humidity.
C. Panels/station interiors and exteriors shall be cleaned, and coatings shall be touched up to match original finish upon completion of the WORK.
D. Conduit, conductors, and terminations shall be installed in accordance with Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
3.02 FIELD TESTING
A. Each panel/station shall be tested again for functional operation in the field after the connection of external conductors and prior to equipment startup.
END OF SECTION
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 05 19-1
Wires and Cabling
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 05 19
WIRE AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide wire and cable, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. In the event that motors provided are larger horsepower than the motors indicated, raceways, conductors, starters, overload elements, and branch circuit protectors shall be revised as necessary to control and protect the increased motor horsepower in accordance with Section 26 05 10 – Electric Motors. Revisions are part of the WORK of this Section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures and 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
B. Submit catalog cuts and material list for each conductor type. Indicate insulation material, conductor material, voltage rating, manufacturer and other data pertinent to the specific cable, such as type shielding, number of pairs and applicable standards.
C. Submit cable test results in accordance with this Section as well as Section 26 01 26 – Electrical Tests.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all cables from damage at all times.
B. Cable ends shall be protected from water entry in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Cable ends shall not be left open in manholes or other locations subject to submergence. If the cable ends become submerged prior to splicing or termination, the cables shall be replaced in their entirety.
C. Cables shall be pulled into raceways in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Under no circumstances shall cable pulling tensions exceed the manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. Pulling tensions on raceway cables shall be within the limits recommended by the cable manufacturer. Wire pulling lubricant, where needed, shall be UL approved.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL – LOW-VOLTAGE CABLE
A. Conductors, include grounding conductors, shall be stranded copper. Aluminum conductor and/or solid conductor wire and cable will not be permitted. Insulation shall bear the UL label, the manufacturer's trademark, and identify the type, voltage, and conductor size. Conductors except flexible cords and cables, fixture wires, and conductors that form an integral part of equipment such as motors and controllers shall conform to the requirements of Article 310 of the National Electric Code, latest edition, for current carrying capacity. Flexible cords and cables shall conform to Article 400, and fixture wires shall conform to Article 402. Wiring shall have wire markers at each end.
2.02 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER AND LIGHTING CONDUCTORS
A. Wire rated for 600 volts in duct or conduit for power and lighting circuits shall be single conductor, Class B Type XHHW-2 cross-linked polyethylene conforming to UL-44 - UL Standard for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
26 05 19-2
Wires and Cabling
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. THHN/THWN wire shall not be permitted to be used for any power or control wiring in this project, except as specifically permitted within control panels per Section 40 95 13 – Control Panels.
B. Conductors for feeders as defined in Article 100 of the NEC shall be sized to prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, heating, and lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and where the maximum total voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest connected load does not exceed 5 percent.
C. Wiring for 600-volt class power and lighting shall be as manufactured by Okonite, General Cable, Southwire, or equal.
2.03 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTOL CONDUCTORS
A. Low voltage control wire in duct or conduit shall be the same type as power and lighting wire indicated above.
B. Control wiring shall be No.14 AWG.
C. Control wires inside panels and cabinets shall be machine tool grade type MTW, UL approved, rated for 90 degrees C at dry locations, and be as manufactured by American, General Cable, or equal.
D. Multi-Conductor Cable: Where multi-conductor cable is indicated on the drawings, provide type TC, multi-conductor cable assemblies with an overall heat, moisture, and sunlight resistant PVC jacket.
Conductor insulation shall be color coded per ICEA-S-58-679, method 1, colored compounds with tracers.
2.04 INSTRUMENT CABLE
A. Instrumentation cable shall be rated at 300 volts, minimum.
B. Individual conductors shall be No. 16 AWG stranded, tinned copper. Insulation shall be color coded polyethylene: black-clear for 2 conductor cable and black-red-clear for 3 conductor cable.
C. Instrumentation cables shall be composed of the individual conductors, an aluminum polyester foil shield, a No. 18 or larger AWG stranded, tinned copper drain wire, and a PVC outer jacket with a thickness of 0.047-inches.
1. Single pair, No. 16 AWG, twisted, shielded cable shall be Belden Part No. 8719, similar by General Cable, or equal.
2. Single triad, No. 16 AWG, twisted, shielded cable shall be Belden Part No. 8618, similar by General Cable, or equal.
2.05 CABLE SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. Where cable lugs are required for power cable terminations, utilize compression lugs – 3M Scotchlok 30000 and 31100 Series, Penn Union HBBLU and BLU, Burndy Hylug, or equal.
Utilize compression tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure type, twist-on connectors (wire nuts) will not be acceptable.
B. Pre-insulated fork tongue lugs shall be Thomas & Betts, Burndy, or equal.
C. General purpose insulating tape shall be Scotch No. 33, Plymouth Slip-knot, or equal. High temperature tape shall be polyvinyl as manufactured by Plymouth, 3M, or equal.
D. Labels for coding 600-volt wiring shall be computer printable or pre-printed, self-laminating, self- sticking, as manufactured by W.H. Brady, 3M, or equal.
E. Stress cone material for make-up of medium voltage shielded cable shall be as manufactured by Raychem, 3M, or equal.
26 05 19-3
Wires and Cabling
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
F. Shielded power cable shall be spliced using kits specifically designed to splice medium voltage, shielded power cables. Splice kits shall be designed for continuous submergence. Heat shrink splice kits shall be Raychem “Type HVS”, or equal. “Cold” shrink splice kits shall be 3M “5760 Series”, or equal. The CONTRACTOR’s personnel shall be trained by the splice kit manufacturer for proper installation of the splices, and shall submit certification of training as a shop drawing. A certified trainee shall perform the splice work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, terminate and test all power, control, and instrumentation conductors.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall, as a minimum, provide the number of control wires listed in the conduit schedule or on the Contract Drawings. Excess wires shall be treated as spares for future use.
C. Conductors shall not be pulled into any raceway until raceway has been cleared of moisture and debris.
D. Instrumentation wire shall not be run in the same raceway with power and control wiring except where specifically indicated.
E. Wire in panels, cabinets, and wireways shall be neatly grouped using nylon tie straps, and shall be neatly fanned out to terminals.
F. Single conductor cable in cable trays shall be No. 1/0 or larger and shall be of a type listed and marked for use in cable trays. Tray cable smaller than 1/0 shall be multi-conductor, with outer jacket.
3.02 FIELD ASSEMBLY
A. General
1. Wire taps and splices shall be properly taped and insulated according to their respective classes.
2. In general, there shall be no cable splices in underground manholes or pullboxes. If splices are necessary, the cables shall be spliced using submersible cable splices, suitable for continuous submergence. Splices in underground manholes and pullboxes may be made only with the approval of the ENGINEER.
3. Stranded conductors shall be terminated directly on equipment box lugs making sure that conductor strands are confined within lug. Use forked-tongue lugs where equipment box lugs have not been provided.
4. Excess control and instrumentation wires shall be long enough to terminate at any terminal block in the enclosure, be properly taped, be identified with origin, and be neatly coiled.
B. Control Wire and Cable
1. Control conductors shall be spliced or terminated only at the locations indicated and only on terminal strips or terminal lugs of vendor furnished equipment.
2. In motor control centers, and control panels, control wire and spare wire shall be terminated to terminal strips.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide as a minimum the number of control wires listed in the conduit schedule or as indicated in the Contract Documents. Excess wires shall be treated as spares.
26 05 19-4
Wires and Cabling
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Instrumentation Wire and Cable
1. Shielded instrumentation cables shall be grounded at one end only, preferably the receiving end on a 4 - 20 mA system.
2. Two and 3 conductor shielded cables installed in conduit runs which exceed available standard cable lengths may be spliced in pullboxes with the prior approval of the ENGINEER.
Such cable runs shall have only one splice per conductor.
D. Power Wire and Cable
1. 120/208-volt, 120/240-volt, and 480/277-volt branch circuit conductors may be spliced in suitable fittings at locations determined by the CONTRACTOR. Cables rated above 2,000 volts shall be spliced or terminated only at equipment terminals indicated.
2. Splices to motor leads in motor terminal boxes shall be wrapped with mastic material to form a mold and then shall be taped with a minimum of 2 layers of varnished cambric tape over- taped with a minimum of 2 layers of high temperature tape.
3. Shielded power cable shall be terminated with pre-assembled stress cones in a manner approved by the cable and terminal manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed termination procedure as a Shop Drawing.
4. VFD shielded power cables shall have the shield grounded at all locations where it is exposed.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Cable Identification
1. Wire and cable shall be identified for proper control of circuits and equipment and to reduce maintenance effort. Identification shall be installed at every termination point.
2. Identification Numbers
a. The CONTRACTOR shall assign to each control and instrumentation wire and cable a unique identification number in a Source/Destination format. The following are specific examples:
61FY106-3/61PLCx001-1-1-4. This is a connection from a Flow Transmitter Signal Isolator to a PLC Analog Input Module Point, at Rack 1, Slot 1, Point 4. 64FSHx00400-NC/61PLCP00001-TB5-123. This is a connection from an eyewash station flow switch to a PLC Panel Terminal Block TB-5, Terminal 124. CB1-S/M1-L1. This is a connection within a MCC Bucket from Circuit Breaker CB- 1 to Motor Contactor M1, Terminal L1 (the example show is a 120VAC Single Phase Motor).
b. Numbers shall be assigned to conductors having common terminals and shall be shown on "as built" drawings. Identification numbers shall appear within 3-inches of conductor terminals. "Control and Instrumentation Conductors" shall be defined as any conductor used for control, interlock, alarm, annunciator, or signal purposes. c. Multiconductor cable shall be assigned a number which shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and at stub-up locations beneath free-standing equipment. It is expected that the cable number shall form a part of the individual wire number. Individual control conductors and instrumentation cable shall be identified at pull points as described above. The instrumentation cable numbers shall incorporate the loop numbers assigned in the Contract Documents.
26 05 19-5
Wires and Cabling
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
d. Color Coding of Power Wire: Provide color coding throughout the entire network of feeders and circuits (600 volts and below) per sheet I-02. e. Insulated ground wire shall be green, and neutral shall be gray. Color coding and phasing shall be consistent throughout the Site, but bars at panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers shall be connected Phase A-B-C, top to bottom, or left to right, facing connecting lugs.
f. Color coding tape shall be used where colored insulation is not available. Colored identification tape may be used on conductors between the local disconnect and the load, where permitted by the NEC. Any phase changes necessary for proper rotation shall be made at the driven equipment where colored insulation is used. Phase changes may be made on the load side of the local disconnect, where phase colors are identified using tape.
g. General purpose AC control cable shall be red. General purpose DC control cable shall be blue.
h. Spare cable shall be terminated on terminal screws and shall be identified with a unique number as well as with destination.
i. Terminal strips shall be identified by computer printable, cloth, self-sticking marker strips attached under the terminal strip.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cable Assembly and Testing: Cable assembly and testing shall comply with applicable requirements of ICEA Publication No. S-95-658/NEMA WC70 - Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
B. Factory test results shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures, prior to shipment of cable. The following field tests (in addition to the tests specified in Section 26 01 26 – Electrical Tests) shall be the minimum requirements:
1. Insulation resistance testing, using a DC megohmmeter, shall be performed on cables operating at more than 2,000 volts to ground. Time-resistance readings shall be taken and recorded at intervals of 30 seconds and one minute. Time-resistance voltage levels shall be per the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Power cable rated at 600 volts shall be tested for insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to a ground using a megohmmeter.
3. Field testing shall be done after cable is installed in the raceways.
4. Field tests shall be performed by a NETA-certified test organization. Field megger testing may be performed by a NETA-certified test organization. Test results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review and acceptance.
5. Cables failing the tests shall be replaced with a new cable or be repaired. Repair methods shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer and shall be performed by persons certified by the industry.
C. Continuity Test: Control and instrumentation cable shall be tested for continuity, polarity, undesirable ground, and origination. Such tests shall be performed after installation and prior to placing cable in service.
END OF SECTION
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 05 26-1
Grounding
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide the electrical grounding system, complet e and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 – General E lectrical Work, apply to this Section.
C. Single Manufacturer
1. Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures and Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit manufacturer's product information for co nnectors, clamps, and all grounding system components, showing compliance with the requirement s of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Components of the grounding electrode system sha ll be manufactured in accordance with UL 467 - Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment , and shall conform to the applicable requirements of National Electrical Code Article 250 and local codes.
B. Grounding System
1. Grounding loop conductors shall be bare annealed copper conductors.
2. Conductors shall be No. 4/0 unless indicated otherwise.
3. Ground Rods
a. Unless indicated otherwise, provide ground rods minimum of 3/4 inch in diameter, 10 feet long, and with a uniform covering of electrolytic copper metallically bonded to a rigid steel core.
b. Provide corrosion-resistant copper-to-steel bond.
c. The rods shall conform to UL 467.
d. The rods shall be of the sectional type, joined by threaded copper alloy couplings.
4. Buried, concrete-encased, or otherwise inaccessi ble cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod connections using exothermic welds.
a. Manufacturer, or Equal
Cadweld
Thermoweld
5. Exposed Connectors
26 05 26-2
Grounding
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
a. Exposed grounding connectors shall be of the com pression type (connector-to-cable), constructed of high-copper alloy, and manufactured specifically for the particular grounding application.
b. Manufacturer, or Equal
Burndy
O.Z. Gedney
6. Use grounding clamps to bond each separately-der ived system to the grounding electrode conductors.
7. Equipment Grounding Circuit Conductors
a. The conductors shall be the same type and insula tion as the load circuit conductors. b. The minimum size shall be as indicated. Where n ot indicated, sizes shall conform to Table 250.122 of the National Electrical Code.
c. Metallic conduit systems shall have an equipment grounding wires as well as being equipment grounding conductors themselves.
8. Grounding Materials Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Copperweld
b. Thermoweld
c. OZ Gedney
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide a separate grounding conductor, securely grounded in each raceway independent of raceway material.
B. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor box. Provide a supplemental ground connection for motor shaft grounding rings, where applicable.
C. Do not use bolts for securing the motor box to t he frame or the cover for grounding connectors.
D. Sizes shall be as indicated on the Conduit Sched ule and in accordance with NEC Article 250.
E. Route the conductors inside the raceway.
F. Provide a grounding-type bushing for secondary f eeder conduits that originate from the secondary section of each MCC section, switchboard, or panelboard.
G. Individually bond the raceway to the ground bus in the secondary section.
H. Provide a green insulated wire as grounding jump er from the ground screw to a box grounding screw, and, for grounding type devices, to the equipment grounding conductor.
I. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each i ndividual raceway for parallel feeders. Connect the parallel ground conductors together at each end of the parallel run, as required by the NEC.
J. Interconnect the secondary switchgear MCC or pan elboard neutral bus to the ground bus in the secondary switchgear compartment only at the servic e entrance point. For wye connected, 3 phase, separately derived systems with 3 wire distr ibution, connect the transformer neutral to the grounding electrode system at the transformer. Connections shall be in accordance with the NEC.
26 05 26-3
Grounding
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
K. Provide the duct bank ground system as indicated , including trenching, splices, ground rods, and connections to equipment and structures.
L. Measure ground impedance in accordance with IEEE STD 81 after installation but before connecting the electrode to the remaining grounding system. P rovide additional grounding system testing in accordance with Section 26 01 26 – Electrical Tests.
M. Low Voltage Grounded System (600V or less)
1. A low-voltage grounded system is defined as a sy stem where the local power supply is a transformer, with the transformer secondary grounded.
2. Grounding system connections for a premises-wired system supplied by a grounded AC service shall be provided with a grounding electrode connec tor connected to the grounded service conductor at each service, in accordance with the NEC.
3. The grounded circuit conductor shall not be used for grounding non-current-carrying parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures except where specifically listed and permitted by the NEC.
N. Embedded Ground Connections
1. Underground and grounding connections embedded in concrete shall be UL-listed ground grid connectors.
2. The connection shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Do not conceal or cover ground connections until the ENGINEER or an authorized representative has established that every grounding connection conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and has given the CONTRACTOR written confirmation.
O. Ground Ring
1. Furnish trenching and materials as necessary to install the ground ring as indicated.
2. The bonding conductor shall be in direct contact with the earth and of the indicated size.
3. Provide a minimum burial depth of 36 inches or a s indicated on the Drawings, whichever is greater.
4. Re-compact disturbed soils to their original density in 6-inch lifts.
P. Duct Bank Ground
1. Embed a grounding conductor in every duct bank as indicated. The ground conductor shall be terminated at the ground grid at each end of the duct bank. Where no ground grid is installed, terminate at a suitable grounding electrode conduct or near the end of the duct bank in accordance with the NEC.
Q. Ground Rods
1. Provide ground rods at the indicated locations.
2. A single electrode that does not have resistance -to-ground of 25 ohms or less shall be augmented by additional electrodes to obtain this value.
3. Take the resistance-to-ground measurement during dry weather, a minimum of 48 hours after a rainfall.
4. Rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length.
R. Instrumentation Shield Grounding
26 05 26-4
Grounding
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its sh ield grounded at one end only unless the approved Shop Drawings indicate that the shield will be grounded at both ends.
2. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or at the receiving end of the signal carried by the cable.
3. The termination of the shield drain wire shall be on its own terminal screw.
4. Jumper together the terminal screws, using manuf actured terminal block jumpers or a No. 14 green insulated conductor.
5. Connect the ground bus via a green No. 12 conductor to the main ground bus for the panel.
END OF SECTION
26 05 33-1
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 05 33
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide electrical raceway systems, complete and in place, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. In the event that individual equipment loads pro vided are larger than indicated in the Contract Documents, revise raceways, conductors, starters, o verload elements, and branch circuit protectors as necessary in order to control and pro tect the increased connected load in conformance to NEC requirements as part of the WORK .
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures, and Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit complete catalog cuts of raceways, fittings, boxes, supports, and mounting hardware, marked where applicable to show proposed materials and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Pull and junction boxes, fittings, and other ind icated enclosures that are dedicated to the raceway system shall comply with the requirements of this Section.
2.02 CONDUIT
A. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) Conduit
1. Provide rigid steel conduit manufactured from mild steel, hot-dip galvanized inside and out.
2. Provide rigid steel conduit manufactured in acco rdance with NEMA C80.1 – Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit, and UL-6 – Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel.
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Allied Tube & Conduit
b. Wheatland Tube
B. PVC Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit
1. Provide rigid non-metallic conduit manufactured from Schedule 40 PVC, as indicated, and sunlight-resistant.
2. Provide rigid non-metallic conduit manufactured in accordance with NEMA TC-2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit, and UL-651 - Standard for Rigid Non-metallic Conduit.
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Carlon
b. Cantex
C. Rigid PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel (GRS-PVC) Cond uit
26 05 33-2
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. The conduit shall meet the requirements for GRS conduit as indicated above.
2. Bond a PVC coating to the outer surface of the galvanized conduit.
3. Ensure that the bond between the coating and the conduit surface is greater than the tensile strength of the coating.
4. Provide the inside surfaces and threads of the conduit with a 2-mil urethane coating.
5. Provide a PVC coating thickness not less than 40 mils.
6. The PVC-coated RGS shall be manufactured in accordance with the following standards:
a. UL-6
b. ANSI C80.1
c. NEMA RN1 - PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigi d Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
7. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Robroy Industries
b. O’Kote
c. Thomas & Betts
D. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit
1. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit constructe d of a flexible galvanized metal core with a sunlight-resistant thermoplastic outer jacket.
2. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit manufactur ed in accordance with the requirements of UL- 360 - Steel Conduits, Liquid-Tight Flexible.
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Anaconda, Sealtite
b. Electriflex, Liquatite
E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) or Intermediate conduit (IMC) will not be accepted.
2.03 FITTINGS AND BOXES
A. General
1. For use with metallic conduit, provide cast and malleable iron fittings of the threaded type with 5 full threads.
2. Fittings and Boxes
a. Provide fittings and boxes with neoprene gaskets and non-magnetic stainless steel screws.
b. Attach covers by means of holes tapped into the body of the fitting. c. Covers for fittings attached by means of clips or clamps will not be accepted. d. Provide surface-mounted switches and receptacles shall be housed in FD-type weatherproof conduit fittings. Bell type boxes are not permitted.
3. Provide boxes larger than standard cast or malle able types manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4X.
4. Terminations
26 05 33-3
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
a. In outdoor areas, terminate conduit in rain-tight hubs. b. Manufacturer, or Equal
Myers
O.Z. Gedney
Appleton
c. In other than outdoor areas, provide sealed lock nuts and bushings.
5. Hazardous Locations
a. In hazardous locations, provide conduit, fitting s, and boxes suitable for the indicated Class and Division.
b. Provide conduits terminated in NEMA 7 boxes with a male bushing, inside the box. c. Manufacturer, or Equal
Adalet Type PEM
B. Cast Aluminum Fittings and Boxes
1. Provide cast aluminum boxes and fittings with less than 0.40 percent copper content, and use with aluminum conduit.
2. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Crouse-Hinds (EATON) Mark 9
C. Malleable Iron Fittings and Boxes
1. For use with galvanized steel conduit, provide fittings and boxes constructed of malleable iron or gray-iron alloy with zinc plating boxes shall be of the FD type.
2. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Crouse-Hinds (EATON) Form 5
b. Equivalent by O.Z. Gedney
c. Equivalent by Appleton
D. PVC Fittings and Boxes
1. For use with rigid non-metallic conduit, provide fittings manufactured of solvent-welded PVC.
2. Provide boxes manufactured of PVC.
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Hoffman
b. Crouse-Hinds (EATON)
4. Provide welding solvent as required for the installation of non-metallic conduit and fittings.
E. PVC-Coated RGS Fittings
1. For use with PVC-coated RGS, provide PVC-coated coated that are the products of the same manufacturer as the conduit.
2. Provide male and female threads and internal surfaces with a 2-mil urethane coating.
F. Stainless Steel Boxes
1. Provide stainless steel boxes with PVC-coated RGS conduit and where indicated.
26 05 33-4
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Provide NEMA 4X stainless steel boxes, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Provide stainless steel of a minimum of 14-gauge thickness, with a brushed finish.
4. Door Hinges
a. Provide doors with full-length stainless steel piano hinges. b. Non-hinged boxes will not be accepted.
5. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Hoffman
b. Rittal
G. Sheet Steel Boxes
1. Sheet steel boxes shall be galvanized steel outlet and switch boxes.
2. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Raco
b. Steel City
c. Appleton Electric
2.04 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
A. Conform with NEC Articles 501 and 502 for areas identified as "Hazardous Areas".
B. Provide threaded cast boxes and fittings for jun ction boxes and pull boxes in Class I and Class II areas. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes and fitti ngs shall be UL listed for installation in Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D and Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
C. Fixture hangers for pendant-mounted lighting fixtures shall conform to Class I, Division 1 and Class II Division 1 requirements.
D. Provide conduit seals with sealing compound and fiber in Class I, Division I location within 18 inches of each conduit entering an enclosure containing electrical devices except for hermetically sealed switches and receptacles. Provide a conduit seal for each conduit leaving the hazardous location.
E. Flexible connections to motors and other vibrati ng equipment in Class I, Division I locations shall be made with flexible fittings approved for Class I locations.
2.05 WIREWAY
A. General
1. Provide wireway of the lay-in type and NEMA-rated for the area in which it is to be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
2. Separate power, control, signal and communicatio ns cables by grounded metallic dividers in wireways or run in separate wireways.
B. Fittings and Covers
1. Provide fittings and sections with non-magnetic stainless steel screws.
2. Attach covers by hinges and clamps to the bodies.
3. Covers attached by means of clips or screws will not be accepted.
4. Provide covers and bodies constructed of aluminum or minimum 14-gauge steel.
C. Grounding
26 05 33-5
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Ground the steel and aluminum wireway bodies.
2. Provide steel dividers with steel wireways or aluminum dividers with aluminum wireways, and ground by means of an individual grounding conductor.
3. Non-metallic dividers will not be accepted.
D. Terminations
1. In indoor and outdoor areas, terminate conduit i n rain-tight hubs as manufactured by Myers, O.Z. Gedney, or equal.
2. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Myers
b. O.Z. Gedney
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Run wiring in raceway unless indicated otherwise .
B. Install raceways between equipment as indicated.
C. Provide raceway systems that are electrically an d mechanically complete before conductors are installed.
D. Bends and Offsets
1. Provide bends and offsets that are smooth and sy mmetrical, and accomplished with tools designed for this purpose.
2. Provide factory elbows wherever possible.
E. Routing
1. Where raceway routings are indicated, follow those routings to the extent possible.
2. Where raceways are indicated but routing is not indicated, such as home runs or on conduit developments and schedules, raceway routing shall b e the CONTRACTOR's choice and provided in strict accordance with the NEC as well as customary installation practice.
3. Provide the raceway encased, exposed, concealed, or under-floor as indicated, except conceal conduit in finished areas unless specifically indicated otherwise.
4. Adjust routings in order to avoid obstructions.
F. Coordination
1. Coordinate between trades prior to installing the raceways.
2. The lack of such coordination shall not be justi fication for extra compensation, and any costs for removal and re-installation to resolve conflicts shall be part of the Contract Price.
G. Install exposed raceways parallel or perpendicul ar to structural beams.
H. Expansion Fittings
1. Install expansion fittings with external bonding jumpers wherever exposed raceways cross building expansion joints.
26 05 33-6
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Install expansion/deflection fittings where cond uit movement is expected in more than one dimension, and where conduits transition out of str uctures in locations where differential settlement may occur.
3. Encased Expansion Fittings
a. Install encased expansion fittings wherever enca sed conduits cross building expansion joints.
b. Deflection type fittings shall not be required for encased conduits crossing an expansion joint within a single structure.
4. Provide expansion and expansion/deflection fitti ngs constructed of the same material as the raceway to which they are installed.
I. Install expansion fittings with bonding jumpers wherever raceways cross building expansion joints.
J. Install exposed raceways at least 1/2 inch from walls or ceilings except that at locations above finished grade where damp conditions do not prevail , install exposed raceways at least 1/4 inch from the face of walls or ceilings by the use of clamp backs or struts.
K. Wherever contact with concrete or dissimilar met als can produce galvanic corrosion of equipment, provide a means of suitable insulation in order to prevent such corrosion.
3.02 CONDUIT
A. Provide exposed conduit manufactured of rigid ga lvanized steel, except as follows and unless indicated otherwise:
1. In areas with chlorine or hydrofluosilicic acid, provide Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
2. In Class I, Div I or Div II hazardous locations, provide PVC-coated GRS conduit.
3. For conduit containing only grounding system bonding conductors, provide Schedule 80 PVC conduit.
B. Power conduit encased in concrete shall be const ructed of Schedule 40 PVC.
C. Analog control or instrumentation conduit shall be GRS.
D. Concrete Encasement
1. Where PVC or GRS conduit is stubbed up from a concrete encasement, provide a PVC-coated GRS elbow.
2. The conduit shall emerge from the concrete in a direction perpendicular to the surface whenever possible.
3. Do not encase conduit in the bottom floor slab below grade.
E. Size
1. Provide exposed conduit of 3/4-inch minimum trade size.
2. Provide encased conduit of one-inch minimum trade size.
F. Install supports at distances required by the NE C.
G. Concrete cover for conduit and fittings shall no t be less than 1-1/2 inches for concrete exposed to earth or weather, or less than 3/4 inch for concret e not exposed to weather or in contact with the ground.
H. Penetrations
26 05 33-7
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Provide conduit passing through walls or floors with plastic sleeves.
2. Perform core drilling in accordance with the req uirements of Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General.
3. Conduits passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not significantly impair the strength of the construction.
I. Conduits embedded within a slab, wall, or beam ( other than those merely passing through) shall meet the following requirements:
1. Conduits with their fittings embedded within a column shall not displace greater than 4 percent of the gross area of cross section;
2. Conduits shall not be larger in outside dimensio n than 1/3 the overall thickness of the slab, wall, or beam in which it is embedded; and,
3. Conduits shall not be spaced closer than 3 outside diameters on centers.
J. Place the conduit such that cutting, bending, or displacing reinforcement from its proper location will not be required.
K. Coat threads with a conductive lubricant before assembly.
L. Joints
1. Provide joints that are tight, thoroughly grounded, secure, and free of obstructions in the pipe.
2. Adequately ream the conduit in order to prevent damage to the wires and cables inside.
3. Use strap-wrenches and vises to install the cond uit, in order to prevent wrench marks on the conduit.
4. Replace conduit with wrench marks.
5. Where installed in chemical or fuel containment areas, the conduit shall not have joints or fittings located below the top of the containment a rea to prevent entry of chemicals or fuel into the conduit system.
M. Slope
1. Wherever possible, slope the conduit runs to drain at one or both ends of the run.
2. Wherever conduit enters a substructure below grade, slope the conduit in order to drain water away from the structure.
3. Take extreme care in order to avoid pockets or depressions in the conduit.
N. Where conduits from duct banks enter building wa lls below grade, transition to PVC-coated GRS at least 12” outside the wall. Installation of PVC -coated rigid steel conduit though a core-drilled hole in an exterior wall below-grade shall utilize a sealing device as manufactured by Link Seal , or equal.
O. Connections
1. Make connections to lay-in-type grid lighting fi xtures by using flexible metal conduit not exceeding 4 feet in length.
2. Make connections to motors and other equipment s ubject to vibration by using liquid-tight flexible conduit not exceeding 3 feet in length.
3. Provide equipment subject to vibration that is n ormally provided with wiring leads with a cast junction box for the make-up of connections.
26 05 33-8
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
P. Provide conduit seal fittings in hazardous class ified locations, in strict accordance with the NEC.
Q. Provide conduit, fittings, and boxes required in hazardous classified areas that are suitably rated for the area, and provide in strict accordance with NEC requirements.
R. Duct sealant shall be foam duct sealant such as Polywater FST or approved equal. Provide duct sealant at the following locations:
1. Where required by NEC Article 300.7.
2. In areas where chlorine gas or fumes from sodium hypochlorite exist to prevent passage of gas through the raceway system.
S. Empty Conduits
1. Tag empty conduits at both ends to indicate the final destination.
2. Where it is not possible to tag the conduit, ide ntify the destination by means of a durable marking on an adjacent surface.
3. Install a pull-cord in each empty conduit in floors, panels, manholes, equipment, and the like.
4. Install a removable plug on empty conduits that terminate below grade, in vaults, manholes, handholes, and junction or pullboxes.
T. Identification of Conduits
1. Identify conduits at ends and at pulling points.
2. Identification shall be the unique conduit number assigned in the Contract Documents.
3. Other than 120 VAC panelboard circuits, if a conduit has not been assigned a unique number in the Contract Documents, assign a unique number f ollowing the numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents.
4. Assign a unique number to 120 VAC panelboard cir cuits, similar to the cable numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents.
5. Provide conduit identification by a stamped or e ngraved non-corroding metal tag attached to the conduit bushing.
6. Provide an engraved phenolic nameplate in accord ance with the requirements of Section 16050 – General Electrical Work.
7. Markings with a pen or paint will not be accepted.
U. Identification of Pullboxes and Junction Boxes
1. Identify pullboxes and junction boxes.
2. Identification shall be the unique conduit numbe r assigned in the Contract Documents, or if not assigned a unique number the CONTRACTOR shall assign one following the numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents.
3. Provide box identification by a stamped or engra ved non-corroding metal tag or an engraved phenolic nameplate, in accordance with the requirem ents of Section 16050 – General Electrical Work, and attached to the box or enclosure.
4. Markings with a pen or paint will not be accepted.
V. Provide conduit for data cables in accordance wi th the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations, especially regarding separation fr om low- and medium-voltage power raceways.
26 05 33-9
Electrical Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
END OF SECTION
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 05 43-1
Underground Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 05 43
UNDERGROUND RACEWAY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide underground raceway systems, complete an d in place, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Pull boxes, and fittings that are dedicated to t he underground raceway system shall comply with the requirements of this Section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requir ements of Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures, and Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit complete catalog cuts of all raceways, fi ttings, pullboxes, marked where applicable in order to show proposed materials and finishes.
C. As-Built Drawings
1. Prepare as-built drawings of encased concealed a nd exposed raceways, ducts, raceways, junction boxes, pull boxes, and electrical and instrumentation equipment.
2. Show routings, burial depths, and handhole locat ions and sizes, and where applicable, connections to drainage systems.
3. Furnish the drawings to the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PULLBOXES
A. Frames and Covers
1. Provide traffic-type covers with an H-20 loading, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Identify pullbox covers as "ELECTRIC" by providing raised letters cast into the covers.
3. Provide frost-proof and water-tight grey iron fr ames and covers with solid lids and inner lids, and with 28-inch clear openings.
4. Bolt the covers and lids to cast-in-place steel frames using corrosion-resistant hardware.
5. Factory-prime the frames.
6. Provide covers constructed of cast-iron, and provide pick holes.
7. Provide frames with a 1/2-inch drilled and tapped hole and lug in order to accommodate a No. 4/0 AWG bare stranded copper conductor connected to a ground rod and the ground conductor of power cables passing through the pull boxes.
B. Equip pull boxes with pulling-in irons, opposite and below each ductway entrance.
C. Provide pull boxes with closed bottoms; open-bot tom pull boxes will not be accepted.
D. Provide PVC duct bank conduits with end bells.
26 05 43-2
Underground Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
E. Brackets
1. Provide non-metallic, non-conductive brackets an d stanchions in pull boxes as required for racking wiring through the pull boxes. Attach to pull boxes walls using stainless steel anchors and hardware.
2. Brackets and stanchions: Underground Devices, Inc., or equal.
F. Precast Pull boxes Manufacturer, or Equal
1. Jensen Precast
2. Old Castle
3. U.S. Precast
2.02 DUCTBANKS
A. Provide underground ducts constructed of Schedul e 40 PVC.
B. Encase ducts in red-dyed concrete with steel rei nforcing bars.
C. Provide concrete with a 3,000-psi compressive st rength conforming to the requirements of Section 03 30 03 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
D. Colorant
1. The concrete shall be dyed red throughout the ducts; surface treatment will not be accepted.
2. Provide colorant consisting of an integral red-o xide coloring pigment in the proportion of 8 pounds per cubic yard of concrete.
3. The costs, if any, of cleaning coloring pigment from the concrete delivery equipment and other related cleanings shall be considered as part of the WORK.
E. Grounding
1. Duct banks shall contain a No. 4/0 bare stranded copper ground wire.
2. The ground wire shall be continuous through the ductbank and terminate at power distribution equipment and the grounding grid.
F. Identification Tape
1. Provide continuous lengths of underground warnin g tapes located 12 inches above and parallel to the duct banks.
2. Provide tape consisting of 6-inch wide polyethyl ene film, imprinted with "CAUTION - ELECTRIC UTILITIES BELOW."
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Brady
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install underground raceways between pull boxes as indicated.
B. Raceway systems shall be electrically and mechan ically complete before conductors are installed.
C. Provide bends and offsets that are smooth and sy mmetrical, and fabricated with tools designed for this purpose.
26 05 43-3
Underground Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
D. Use factory elbows wherever possible.
E. To the extent possible, follow the raceway routi ngs as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Adjust the indicated routings as necessary in or der to avoid obstructions.
G. Coordination with Other Trades
1. Coordinate with other trades prior to installation of raceways.
2. The lack of coordination shall not be justification for extra compensation.
3. Perform removal and re-installation to resolve conflicts as part of the WORK.
3.02 DUCTBANKS
A. Install duct banks in accordance with the follow ing criteria:
1. Assemble the duct using high-impact, non-metalli c spacers and saddles in order to provide conduits with vertical and horizontal separation.
2. Set the plastic spacers every 5 feet.
3. Anchor the duct array every 5 feet in order to p revent movement during the placement of concrete.
4. Lay the duct on a grade line of at least 3 inches per 100 feet, sloping towards pull boxes.
5. Install the duct and adjust the pull box depths such that the top of the concrete envelope is a minimum of 18 inches below grade and a minimum of 2 4 inches below roadways.
6. Accomplish changes in direction of the duct enve lope by more than 10 degrees horizontally or vertically by using bends with a minimum radius 24 times the duct diameter.
7. Stagger duct couplings a minimum of 6 inches.
8. Provide select backfill or sand for the bottom of the trench.
9. Cleaning
a. Clean each bore of the completed duct bank by dr awing through it a standard flexible mandrel, one foot long and 1/4 inch smaller than the nominal size of the duct. b. After passing the mandrel, draw through a wire brush and swab.
10. For spare raceways that are not indicated to co ntain conductors, provide a 1/8-inch polypropylene pull cord installed throughout the entire length of the raceway.
B. Grout duct entrances smooth, and terminate ducts with flush end bells.
C. Assemble sections of pre-fabricated pull boxes u sing waterproof mastic, and set on a 6-inch bed of gravel as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by field conditions.
D. Provide watertight duct bank penetrations throug h walls of pull boxes, and building walls below grade.
E. Terminate concrete-encased duct banks at buildin g foundations.
F. Where ducts enter buildings, provide duct sealan t in every duct at the building-end of the duct run to prevent water or condensation entry from the duct bank into the building.
1. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Polywater FST, FST-MINI
26 05 43-4
Underground Raceway Systems
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
G. When duct enters the building on a concrete slab on grade, do not encase the duct but transition to rigid steel PVC-coated conduits on stub-ups.
H. Sealing
1. Where an underground conduit enters a structure through a concrete roof or a membrane- waterproofed wall or floor, provide a sealing device.
2. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Link-Seal
3. Use the sealing device with rigid steel conduit.
4. Transition from PVC to rigid steel conduit prior to building entry.
END OF SECTION
26 05 48-1
Seismic Restraints and Supports
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 05 48
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide seismic restraint d evices for electrical systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Administr ative Requirements Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures and Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
B. Submit seismic anchoring calculations with equip ment and raceway submittals. Calculations and determination of anchor types shall be performed an d stamped by a licensed structural engineer registered in the State of California. Engineer sh all either be employed by the equipment manufacturer or the equipment manufacturer shall hi re an independent consultant to perform these services.
C. Submit equipment anchoring methods. Include anc horing locations, anchor types and minimum anchor embedment depths.
D. Submit catalog cuts and material list for each a nchor type.
E. Submit recommended torque values for bolting.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 SEISMIC ANCHORING AND RESTRAINTS
A. Equipment Anchors:
1. Securely anchor electrical equipment. Anchoring shall have the capability of withstanding seismic forces per ASCE 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, Chapter 13, with SDS = 0.686, IP = 1.5, RP = 2.5, and ap = 1.0.
B. Raceway Supports:
1. Seismically support raceways (conduit, cable tra y, busway, etc.) 2.5 inches inside diameter and larger and suspended 12 inches or more from the top of the raceway to the bottom of the support for the hanger. Raceway supports shall have the capability of withstanding seismic forces per ASCE 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, Chapter 13, with SDS = 0.686, IP = 1.5, RP = 2.5, and ap = 1.0.
2. Seismically supported raceway systems shall curr ently be pre-approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development .
2.02 MOUNTING HARDWARE
A. Miscellaneous Hardware
1. Provide nuts, bolts, and washers constructed of stainless steel. a. Materials
All Areas: Anchor bolts and screws shall be Type 316 ASTM A276 stainless steel.
Nuts shall be hex Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A194, Grade 8M, or ASTM F594, Type 316 stainless steel.
26 05 48-2
Seismic Restraints and Supports
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Provide threaded rods for trapeze supports constructed from continuous threaded galvanized steel, 3/8-inch diameter minimum.
a. Materials
All Areas: ASTM A276, Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Struts
1. Construct struts for mounting of conduits and equipment of 304 stainless steel.
2. Where contact with concrete or dissimilar metals may cause galvanic corrosion, use suitable non-metallic insulators in order to prevent such corrosion.
3. Aluminum strut for free-standing support frames are not permitted.
4. Strut Manufacturer, or Equal: Unistrut ; B-Line
C. End Caps
1. Provide plastic protective end caps for all exposed strut ends.
2. End Caps Manufacturer, or Equal: Unistrut, Model P2860 D. Anchors
1. Provide stainless steel expansion anchors for at taching equipment to concrete walls, floors, and ceilings.
2. Wood plugs will not be accepted.
3. Anchor Manufacturer, or Equal: "Power-Bolt" or "Power-Stud" as manufactured by Power Fasteners, Inc. ; similar by Star .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install equipme nt anchors and raceway supports in accordance with the final shop drawings and manufac turer's recommendations. Properly torque all bolts to the recommended values.
END OF SECTION
26 05 73-1
Protective Device Studies
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 05 73
PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the indicated short circuit and protective device studies for the electrical power system in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The WORK of this Section shall include protectio n studies for motors with solid state overload and overcurrent protection devices.
C. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to ob tain the information required from the electric utility and appropriate vendors.
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Short circuit studies, protective device evaluat ion studies, arc-flash hazard analysis studies, and protective device coordination studies shall be per formed by a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in short circuit and protective d evice coordination services for a period of at least 10 years.
B. The indicated studies shall be signed by the professional electrical engineer, registered in the State of California, responsible for the studies.
C. The studies shall utilize computer programs with proven reliability and accuracy for performing 3- phase fault-duty calculations.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The indicated studies shall be submitted and app roved by the ENGINEER prior to final approval of the distribution equipment Shop Drawings and releas e of equipment for manufacture.
B. An initial short circuit study shall be submitte d and reviewed before the ENGINEER will approve the Shop Drawings for medium-voltage switchgear, tr ansformers, or 480-volt distribution equipment.
C. Submit an initial protective device coordination study shall be submitted with 90 days after the approval of the initial short circuit study.
D. The short circuit, arc-flash hazard analysis, an d protective device coordination studies shall be updated prior to Project Substantial Completion; ut ilize characteristics of as-installed equipment and materials.
E. The adequacy of the equipment "withstand" and in terruption ratings shall be approved by the ENGINEER.
1.04 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES
A. The low-voltage switchgear manufacturer shall fu rnish the services of a qualified field engineer and necessary tools and equipment in order to test, cal ibrate, and adjust the protective relays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the power system coordination study.
B. The motor control center manufacturer shall furn ish the services of a qualified field engineer to calibrate the MCPs as recommended in the power syst em study.
26 05 73-2
Protective Device Studies
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The studies shall include development of single-line and impedance diagrams of the power system.
B. The diagrams shall identify components considere d in the study and the ratings of power devices, including transformers, circuit breakers, relays, fuses, busses, and cables.
C. The resistances and reactance’s of cables shall be identified in the impedance diagram.
D. The studies shall contain written data from the electric utility company regarding maximum available short circuit current, voltage, and X/R ratio of the utility power system.
E. The studies shall include every protective devic e and feeder included within the WORK.
F. The first upstream overcurrent device outside th e WORK shall be used as a fixed reference.
G. The studies shall include all portions of the el ectrical distribution system for normal and standby power sources down to and including the 480-volt distribution system.
3.02 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY
A. The short circuit study shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program, and shall be in accordance with the following Standards:
ANSI/IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electrical P ower Distribution for Industrial Plants
ANSI/IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection, and Coordination of Industrial, and Commercial Power Systems
ANSI/IEEE C 37.010 Application Guide for AC High-Vo ltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis
ANSI/IEEE C 37.13 Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Brea kers Used in Enclosures
3.03 PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY
A. A protective device evaluation study shall be pe rformed in order to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, molded case switches, and fuses.
B. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipme nt due to prospective short-circuit currents shall be promptly brought to the attention of the ENGINEER.
C. Do not utilize series-rated circuit breakers to meet short circuit requirements for this project.
D. Devices shall be fully rated to withstand availa ble fault currents.
3.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY
A. A protective device coordination study shall be performed in order to develop the necessary calculations to select power fuse ratings, protecti ve relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated current transformers, and low-voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings.
26 05 73-3
Protective Device Studies
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipme nt due to prospective short-circuit currents shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER's attention.
3.05 TIME/CURRENT COORDINATION CURVES
A. As a minimum, the time/current coordination curv es for the power distribution system shall include the following items plotted on 5-cycle log-log graph paper:
1. time/current curves for each protective relay, circuit breaker, or fuse demonstrating graphically that the settings will provide protection and selectivity within industry standards
2. Each curve shall be identified, and tap and time dial settings shall be specified.
3. Provide individual curves for each feeder unless identical to others.
4. Selectivity
a. Time/current curves for each device shall be pos itioned to provide the maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. b. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. c. Recommendations shall be included for alternate methods that would improve selectivity.
5. time/current curves and points for cable and equipment damage.
6. circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times
7. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph.
8. sketch of bus and breaker arrangement
9. magnetizing inrush points of transformers
10. thermal limits of dry-type and liquid-insulated transformers (ANSI damage curve)
11. Every restriction of the ANSI and National Elec trical Code shall be followed, and proper coordination intervals and separation of characteristics curves shall be maintained.
3.06 ARC FLASH STUDY
A. An arc flash study shall be performed with the a id of a digital computer program in order to determine the “Arc Flash Protection Boundary” and “Personal Protective Equipment” (PPE) levels for applicable electrical distribution equipment, stand-alone disconnects, starters, and VFDs in the power distribution system.
B. The arc flash study shall be performed in conjun ction with short circuit calculations and protectiv e device coordination.
C. The arc flash study shall be in accordance with the latest version of the following Standards:
1. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety Requirem ents for Employee Workplaces
2. IEEE 1584 IEEE guide for performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations
3. OSHA (29 CFR PART 1910) Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry
4. ANSI Z535.4 Product Safety Signs and Labels
D. The recommended values for the “Arc Flash Protec tion Boundary” and PPE levels, based on the arc flash study results, shall be tabulated in the study.
E. Labeling
26 05 73-4
Protective Device Studies
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. The digital computer program shall provide the “ Arc Flash Protection Boundary” and PPE values in a format that can be directly printed on to labels.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide these labels in accordance with Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
3.07 FINAL SUMMARY REPORT
A. Summarize the results of the indicated power sys tem studies in a final report.
B. The report shall include the following items:
1. single-line diagram
2. impedance diagram
3. tabulation of all protective devices identified on the single line diagram
4. time/current coordination curves
5. specific recommendations, if any
6. test instrumentation, condition, and connections, as applicable, for each study
7. computerized fault current calculations
8. any suggested changes to the protection scheme o r equipment selection that will result in improved system reliability and safety
9. recommendations to minimize the arc flash energy
C. The report shall include information concerning the computer program used for the study, as well as a general discussion of the procedure, items, an d data considered in the preparation of the study.
D. Submit 1 bound copy and PDF including all protec tive device study data files of the report to the ENGINEER.
E. The final report shall include all coordination study data files copied to 32GB flash drive.
3.08 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND AD JUSTMENT A. Test, calibrate, and adjust the protective relay s and circuit breaker trip devices in accordance wi th the recommendations in the power system coordinatio n study.
B. Calibrate the MCPs as in accordance with the rec ommendations in the power system study.
C. Adjustments shall be made prior to energizing an y electrical equipment.
END OF SECTION
26 12 16-1
Panelboards and General-Purpose Dry Type Transformers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 12 16
PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL-PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide panelboards and gen eral-purpose dry-type transformers, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contr act Documents.
B. Single Manufacturer: Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer’s services.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures and Section 16050 – General Electrical Work.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Transformers
a. Dimension drawings
b. Technical certification sheets
c. Drawing of conduit entry/exit locations
d. Transformer ratings, including:
Voltage
Continuous current
Basic impulse level for equipment over 600 volts
KVA
e. Descriptive bulletins
f. Product sheets
2. Panelboards
a. Breaker layout drawings with dimensions and nameplate designations b. Component list
c. Drawings of conduit entry/exit locations
d. Assembly ratings including:
Short circuit rating
Voltage
Continuous current
e. Cable terminal sizes
f. Descriptive bulletins
g. Product sheets
h. Installation information
i. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage de tails
26 12 16-2
Panelboards and General-Purpose Dry Type Transformers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Transformers
1. The transformers shall be dry-type, designed, ma nufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of ANSI and NEMA.
2. Transformers shall be UL-listed and bear the UL label.
B. Panelboards
1. Panelboards shall be dead front factory assemble d. Panelboards shall comply with NEMA PB-1-Panelboards, as well as the provisions of UL 5 0 - Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment and UL 67 - Safety Panelboards. Panelboards used for service equipment shall be UL labeled for such use. Lighting panelboards s hall be rated for 120/208-volt, 3 phase operation or 120/240 volt for single phase operatio n as indicated. Power panelboards shall be rated for 480 volts, 3 phase, 3 wire operation, unless indicated otherwise.
2. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly, including circuit breakers.
2.02 TRANSFORMERS
A. Energy Efficiency: Standard dry-type transforme rs shall meet the energy efficiency requirements of the Department of Energy Code of Federal Regulat ions (10 CFR PART 431), DOE 2016 Efficiency Levels. The product requirements are in the appliance regulations, Title 20, and the usage requirements are in Title 24.
B. Ratings
1. KVA and voltage ratings shall be as indicated.
2. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry Type Distribution and Power Transformer s
3. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for self-cooled ratings:
Up to 9 kVA 40 dB
10 to 50 kVA 45 dB
51 to 150 kVA 50 dB
C. Construction
1. Insulation Systems
a. Transformers shall be insulated as follows:
2 kVA and smaller: 150 deg C insulation system ba sed upon 80 deg C rise. 3 to 15 kVA: 185 deg C insulation system based up on 115 deg C rise. 15 kVA and larger: 220 deg C insulation system ba sed upon 150 deg C rise.
26 12 16-3
Panelboards and General-Purpose Dry Type Transformers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
b. Required performance shall be obtained without e xceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 deg C maximum ambient.
c. Insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM D 635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and /or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
2. Transformer windings shall be copper.
3. Transformers shall have four 2-1/2 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below 480 volts.
4. Transformer shall include vibration dampeners be tween the core and the enclosure to minimize and isolate sound transmission.
D. Manufacturers: General Electric, Eaton, Schneider Electric/Square D Company, or equal .
2.03 PANELBOARDS
A. Ratings
1. Panelboards rated 240-VAC or less shall have sho rt circuit ratings not less than 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.
2. Panelboards rated 480-VAC shall have short circuit ratings not less than 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.
3. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. Series ratings are not acceptable.
B. Construction
1. Lighting and power distribution panels shall have tin-plated copper bus bars.
2. Breakers shall be one, 2, or 3-pole as indicated , with ampere trip ratings as required by the equipment. Breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break, inverse time trip characteristics, to trip free on overload or short circuit, and to indicate trip condition by the handle position.
3. The panels shall have hinged doors with combinat ion catch and latch. The front panels shall be so arranged that when the plates are removed, th e gutters, terminals and wiring will be exposed and accessible. The doors shall have inner doors within the plates to have only the breaker operating mechanism exposed when they are o pened. Live conductors and terminals shall be concealed behind the plates.
4. Panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage.
5. Circuit breakers shall be interchangeable and ca pable of being operated in any position as well as being removable from the front of the panel board without disturbing adjacent units.
No plug-in circuit breakers will be acceptable.
6. Lighting and power distribution panels which are not part of a motor control center shall be constructed in accordance with Section 26 00 00 – G eneral Electrical Work, Panels shall have the necessary barriers, supports, and liberal wiring gutters. Trim screws shall be stainless steel. Panelboard parts of metal other t han copper, aluminum, or stainless steel shall be cadmium plated.
7. Panelboards shall be UL listed except for specia l enclosures which are not available with UL listing.
8. Panelboards shall be suitable for use as service entrance where indicated.
C. Manufacturers: General Electric, Eaton, Schneider Electric/Square D Company, or equal D. Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
26 12 16-4
Panelboards and General-Purpose Dry Type Transformers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Provide integral SPDs. SPDs shall conform to Section 26 43 00 – Surge Protection Devices.
2. SPD units shall be rated for the voltage and phase service of the panel at 240 kA per phase.
2.04 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall meet the requirements of Sectio n 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. WORK of this Section shall be installed as indicated in Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
END OF SECTION
26 29 00-1
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 29 00
LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide motor control cente rs (MCCs), complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Contract documents were developed utilizing sizi ng for EATON MCCs. If MCCs other than EATON are approved for this project, it is the contractor ’s responsibility to make accommodations for equipment sizing and layout that is different from that show on the contract document C. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work, apply to the WORK of this Section.
D. In the event that provided motors are of greater horsepower than the indicated motors, revise the raceways, conductors, starters, overload elements, and branch circuit protectors as necessary in order to control and protect the increased motor ho rsepower in accordance with Section 16150 – Electric Motors.
E. Single Manufacturer
1. The MCCs shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to standardize appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services.
2. This requirement, however, does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of overall responsibility for the WORK.
F. Coordination
1. The equipment provided under this Section shall operate the electric motor driver with the driven equipment as indicated under other equipment Sections.
2. The MCC manufacturer shall be provided with the following information, at a minimum:
a. Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work
b. Section 26 05 10 – Electric Motors
c. Section 26 05 15 – Industrial Control Panels
d. Section 26 01 26 – Electrical Tests
e. Electrical Contract Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
B. Furnish the following equipment information in t he Shop Drawings:
1. NEMA rating and color of enclosure
2. horizontal and vertical bus ampacities, voltage rating, interrupting capacity, and materials of construction
3. ground bus size and material of construction
4. conduit entrance provisions
5. main incoming line entry provision (top or bottom)
26 29 00-2
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
6. control unit nameplate schedule
7. circuit breaker types, frames, and settings
8. starter NEMA sizes, auxiliary contact provisions, and coil voltage
9. relays, timers, pilot devices, control transformer VA and fuse sizes
10. MCC Wiring Diagrams
a. Furnish custom elementary schematic ladder diagrams for each compartment. b. The ladder diagrams shall include remote devices.
c. Submittals not meeting these requirements will n ot be reviewed further and will be returned to the CONTRACTOR.
11. MCC Internal Connections
a. Furnish the MCC internal connection list and dia gram developed by the UL 508C panel assembly shop that is preparing the PLC Section.
b. The list and diagram shall detail each wiring co nnection between the PLC Section and each compartment provided by the MCC Manufacturer, and shall specifically include and indicate the terminals and wire numbers on both ends of each internal connection wire. c. Submittals not meeting these requirements will n ot be reviewed further and will be returned to the CONTRACTOR.
12. Short circuit rating of the complete assembly
13. Replacement parts lists and operation and maint enance procedures
14. Seismic design certification of the anchoring s ystem in accordance with Section 16070.
15. Time-current curves for protective devices
16. RVSS and VFD Equipment Information
a. name of starter and drive manufacturer
b. type and complete model number
c. assembly drawing and nomenclature, including enc losure dimensions, mounting and anchoring details, and internal layout
d. detailed schematics, including external wiring connections e. maximum heat dissipation capacity in kW
f. altitude de-rating information
17. Factory test data certifying compliance with requirements of similar equipment from the same manufacturer
C. Furnish an Owner's Manual, including:
1. manufacturer's 2-year warranty
2. field test report
D. Furnish the Manufacturer's Service Representativ e's resume, including the following documentation:
1. copy of the proposed representative's Factory Training Certificate
26 29 00-3
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. number of years’ experience servicing the manufacturer’s MCCs and VFDs
3. a statement that the individual is authorized to inspect, test and perform field service and repairs E. Spare Parts List
1. Furnish spare parts information for parts required by this Section as well any other spare parts recommended by the MCC manufacturer.
F. Startup and Testing Report
1. Within 15 days after completion of startup and t esting, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a report for the MCC.
2. The report shall contain the following documentation:
a. the device name, serial number, rating, and complete model number of each MCC b. a complete listing of all tests performed and the results of each test c. a complete listing of all circuit breaker and ov erload settings, fuse ratings, settings, setpoints and configuration information for VFDs an d equipment or devices with adjustable settings
d. documentation for training that was provided to the OWNER’s personnel, including topics covered, instructor's name and contact information, and a list of attendees.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The manufacturer of the low-voltage motor contro l center shall also manufacture at least the following:
1. molded case circuit breakers, up to and including 225 ampere frame size
2. disconnect switches
3. magnetic motor starters
4. control and timing relays rated at 600 volts AC
5. pushbuttons, lights and selector switches, including remote mounted control stations
6. meters, including ammeter, voltmeter, and solid-state metering devices B. Single Manufacturer
1. Devices of the same type shall be products of the same manufacturer.
2. This requirement applies to control devices, cus tom-fabricated equipment, and insofar as practical to equipment manufactured on a production basis.
C. Lighting transformers and panelboards shall be i n accordance with the requirements of Section 26 12 16 – Panelboards and General-Purpose Dry-Type Tr ansformers.
D. Motor control centers shall conform to the stand ards for NEMA Class IIS, Type B diagrams and wiring.
E. MCC Schedule
MCC DESIGNATION LOCATION
26 29 00-4
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
MCC 100 East of Wet Well
2.02 DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENT S
A. The motor control centers shall be 600-volt clas s and suitable for operation on a 3-phase, 60-Hz system.
B. The system operating voltage and number of wires shall be as indicated.
C. Power
1. The motor control center shall receive power from a 3-phase, wye-connected 480-volt service panel with a grounded neutral.
2. Power distribution from the MCC shall be 480-volt, 3-phase, 3-wire.
3. The MCC shall include provision for termination of an incoming neutral conductor in conformance to NEC requirements for service entranc e.
D. Enclosure
1. The enclosure shall be of NEMA Type 12.
2. The variable frequency drive (VFD) and solid-state soft starter (RVSS) compartments may be of NEMA Type 1, gasketed, provided that ventilation inlet openings are covered by externally replaceable dust filters.
3. Compartment doors shall be interlocked with comp artment circuit breakers, fitted with a maintenance override.
4. Latches for panelboard compartments shall have b utterfly heads or another hand operable method that does not require tools to operate.
E. Size and Arrangement
1. Motor control centers shall be configured as mec hanical groupings of control center units, assembled into a lineup of control center sections.
2. Each control section shall be nominally 90 inches tall by a minimum of 20 inches deep.
3. MCCs shall be designed to not exceed the indicat ed spatial requirements, including spaces, spares, and future compartments.
4. MCCs shall be subject to rejection if they excee d the indicated lengths, where allotted space is critical.
5. Equipment within the MCC may be rearranged at the discretion of the manufacturer, providing that the MCC includes the spares, space, and future provisions as indicated and that panelboards are either at the top of their sections or the bottoms are at least 36 inches above the housekeeping pad.
6. Switches and circuit breakers used as switches s hall be located such that the center of the grip of the operating handle of the switch or circu it breaker, when in its highest position, will not be more than 6 feet, 7 inches above the floor, including the height of the concrete pad unless provided with a handle extension acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
26 29 00-5
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
F. Components
1. Busses
a. Provide a continuous copper ground bus, full width of the motor control center line-up. b. Horizontal Busses
The main horizontal bus shall be of silver-plated copper, and located within an isolated compartment.
The bus shall be rated for 600 amperes minimum, bu t in no case less than the main lug or main breaker frame size.
c. Vertical Busses
The vertical bus in each section shall consist of a single silver-plated copper conductor per phase, with a current capacity of not less than 300 amps. The vertical bus shall be completely isolated and insulated, and shall extend the full height of the section wherever possible.
d. Power buses shall be braced to withstand 65,000 amperes, minimum. e. The PLC section shall have neither a horizontal nor a vertical bus, in order to allow the maximum room for control components.
2. Wireways
a. Provide a separate vertical wireway adjacent to each vertical unit, covered by a hinged door.
b. Each individual unit compartment shall be provid ed with a side barrier to permit pulling wire in the vertical wireway without disturbing adjacent unit components. c. Full height (90-inch) compartments or sections a re not required to have a separate wireway.
3. Power, control, and signal fuses shall have blown fuse indicators.
4. Control wires shall be color coded in accordance with Section 16120 – Wires and Cabling.
G. Cabinets
1. Structural members shall be fabricated of not le ss than 12-gauge steel, and side and top panels and doors shall be fabricated of not less than 14-gauge steel.
2. Spaces designated as SPACE or BLANK shall includ e blank hinged doors and vertical bus bars.
3. Control units inside compartments shall be clearly identified with tags or stencil markings.
4. Identification
a. Each control unit, including spares, spaces and blanks, lights, and devices shall be identified by an engraved nameplate.
b. Identification shall include the indicated circuit number. c. Each motor control center shall be fitted with t he manufacturer's nameplate which shall include the NEMA Standard electric rating and other pertinent data, including manufacturer, sales order number, date of manufacture, and place of manufacture.
26 29 00-6
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
5. Where "L" or "U" shaped MCC layouts are indicate d, corner compartments shall have similar current and short circuit ratings as functional compartments.
6. Fans, heat exchangers, transformers, capacitors, junction boxes, and other devices shall not be mounted on the outside of the motor control center enclosure.
7. Protective Coating
a. The finish for motor control center shall be light grey: ANSI 61 or 49. b. The panels shall be coated with 2 coats of prime r inside and out, and 2 coats of enamel finish.
c. External colors other than ANSI 61 or 49 will no t be accepted.
2.03 MAIN AND FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKERS (480 V)
A. Circuit breakers having a frame size of 150 amperes or less shall be molded-case type with thermal magnetic non-interchangeable, trip-free, sealed trip units.
B. Circuit breakers with a frame size of 225 ampere s to 1,200 amperes shall be molded case with interchangeable thermal, and adjustable magnetic tr ip RMS sensing electronic trip elements with the following adjustments:
1. long-time setting (by changing the unit)
2. long-time delay
3. short-time setting
4. short-time delay
5. instantaneous setting
6. ground-fault setting
7. ground-fault delay
C. The interrupting capacity of the main and feeder branch circuit breakers shall be a minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
D. Service disconnects rated 1000 amps or greater s hall provide for ground fault protection of the equipment.
E. Circuit breaker disconnect operators shall be ca pable of accommodating 3 padlocks for locking in the OPEN position.
F. Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts shall be furn ished where indicated.
2.04 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Motor starters shall be mounted in standard moto r control center assemblies, arranged as indicated.
B. Components
1. Each motor starter unit shall consist of a combi nation magnetic contactor and short circuit protective device, mounted in a completely enclosed cubicle.
2. The short circuit protective device shall be an instantaneous, magnetic only circuit breaker:
Cutler-Hammer Type HMCP, G.E. Mag-Break Motor Circu it Protector , or equal.
26 29 00-7
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3. Circuit breakers provided as part of a motor sta rter unit shall be capable of being padlocked in the OPEN position.
4. Resetting of thermal overload elements shall be possible with the unit door closed.
5. Provide 3-phase overload trip units to suit the full load current of the equipment installed, and the trip unit shall be adjusted as required for power factor correction capacitors.
C. Magnetic Starters
1. Magnetic starters shall have auxiliary contacts as indicated, including N-O and N-C contacts as indicated, plus one each spare N-O and N-C contact.
2. The combination motor starters shall be draw out-type for Size 5 and below.
3. The fixed-type unit assembly shall be constructe d such that it can be easily removed from its panel after disconnecting the wires to the terminal block and withdrawing from the primary bus.
4. Removal of a unit assembly shall be possible wit hout rear access and without disturbing any other unit in the motor control center.
D. Control Power Transformer
1. Each starter unit shall have its own control pow er transformer, with a 115-volt grounded secondary.
2. Provide one secondary fuse and 2 primary fuses.
3. Control power transformers shall be sized to accommodate the indicated control devices.
4. Local control devices shall be mounted independently of the cover door.
5. Starters shall have a local GREEN RUN indicator, and a RED OFF indicator to indicate the presence of control power when the motor is not energized.
6. Starters shall be provided with elapsed time meters, HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switches, and other devices as indicated.
7. Cubicle control wires shall be terminated at a p ull-apart disconnecting terminal block located at the cubicle.
E. Identification
1. The motor control center manufacturer shall be r esponsible for identifying each control wire within each motor starter unit with wrap-around permanent plastic markers.
2. Each control wire shall be identified at both ends.
F. Full-Voltage Starters
1. Full-voltage motor starter units shall be NEMA Size 1 or larger.
2. Each combination starter shall be rated for a minimum 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
G. NEMA Ratings
1. Motor starters shall be designed to NEMA ratings.
2. Starters designed to IEC ratings or with dual IEC/NEMA ratings will not be accepted, either as part of an MCC, as remote starters, or as part of an equipment package.
26 29 00-8
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2.05 CONTROL DEVICES
A. Control devices shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 15 – Local Control Stations and Miscellaneous Electrical Devices.
B. Metering
1. Provide solid-state metering where indicated.
2. Include CTs and PTs of ratios as indicated or as recommended by the MCC manufacturer.
3. The CT leads shall terminate on shorting type te rminal blocks, and the shorting bar shall be grounded to the MCC ground bus.
4. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. G.E. – Multilin “PQM” II
b. EATON - PXM 2260
c. Allen Bradley – PowerMonitor 3000
d. Square-D – PowerLogic ION 7300
2.06 FACTORY TESTS
A. Provide the manufacturer's standard electrical a nd mechanical production tests and inspections for motor control centers and their components.
B. The tests shall include electrical continuity ch eck, dielectric tests for each circuit, and inspection for proper functioning of components including controls , protective devices, metering, and alarm devices.
2.07 SPARE PARTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the following for e ach MCC:
1. Unit Control Transformer: one of each size furnished in magnetic starters installed
2. Bezels: 3 of each color installed for pilot indicators
3. Panel Lamps: one dozen of each type (form, voltage and current rating) installed
4. Control Fuses: one dozen of each type (form, voltage and current rating) installed
5. Relays: one of each type and size installed
B. Spare parts shall be identified by MCC number, t ype, size, and manufacturer.
2.08 MCC MANUFACTURER, OR EQUAL
A. EATON Cutler-Hammer Freedom "2100" Series
B. General Electric "8000 Line"
C. Schneider Square-D, Model 6
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall install motor control cente rs in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions.
26 29 00-9
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. Conduit installation shall be coordinated with t he manufacturer's as-fabricated drawings such that conduit stub-ups are within the area allotted for conduit.
C. Conduit shall be stubbed up in the section that contains the devices to which conductors are terminated.
3.02 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. If stored at the Site, motor control centers sha ll be stored in a clean, dry space.
B. Factory wrapping shall be maintained or an addit ional heavy plastic cover shall be provided to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. The storage space shall be heated or the MCC spa ce heaters shall be energized.
D. Motor control centers shall be handled carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish.
E. Damage shall be repaired before installation.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. General
1. An authorized Service Representative of the manu facturer shall be present at the Site for 3 Work Days in order to provide the services listed below.
2. For the purpose of this paragraph, a Work Day is defined as an 8-hour period, excluding travel time.
3. The service representative's resume shall be app roved by the ENGINEER before training is scheduled.
B. Inspection, Startup, Field Adjustment
1. The Service Representative shall supervise the f ollowing items, and shall certify that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, and readied for operation:
a. installation of the equipment
b. inspection, checking, and adjusting of the equipment c. startup and field testing for proper operation
d. performance of repairs to correct any discrepancies or problems revealed during startup and testing
e. performance of field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with the indicated requirements
f. Preparation and submittal of a report covering s tartup and testing, including a listing of equipment settings and parameters at the end of startup and testing.
3.04 INSTALLATION
a. Motor control centers shall be installed on 3-1/ 2-inch concrete pads and in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work.
B. After leveling and shimming, the CONTRACTOR shall anchor motor control centers to the concrete pads, and shall grout such that no space exists between the pad and support beams.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall:
26 29 00-10
Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. torque bus bar bolts to manufacturer's recommend ations, and tighten sheet metal and structure assembly bolts;
2. adjust motor circuit protector (MCP) devices to the instantaneous trip setting position recommended for the actual horsepower and full load amps of the motor;
3. verify that overload devices are proper for equipment installed;
4. make necessary changes in overload devices as re quired for motors having power factor correcting capacitors;
5. touch up scratches after the equipment has been installed;
6. verify that nameplate, and other identification is accurate; and
7. provide high-voltage switchboard matting in fron t of the MCC, in accordance with the requirements of Section 16050 – General Electrical Work.
3.05 FIELD TESTS
A. Provide a visual and mechanical inspection after installation, as follows:
1. Inspect for physical damage, proper anchorage, and grounding.
2. Verify that the ratings of the thermal overload heaters match the motor full-load current nameplate data.
3. Check tightness of bolted connections.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Insulation Tests
a. Measure the insulation resistance of each bus se ction phase-to-phase and phase-to- ground for one minute.
b. The test voltage and minimum acceptable resistan ce shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
c. Measure the insulation resistance of each starte r section phase-to-phase and phase-to- ground with the starter contacts closed and the protective device open. d. The test voltage and minimum acceptable resistan ce shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
e. Measure the insulation resistance of each control circuit with respect to ground.
2. Verify the proper operation of control logic in each mode of control.
END OF SECTION
26 29 13-1
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 29 13
SOLID-STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK OF SCOPE
A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide solid-sta te reduced voltage motor starters, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Docum ents.
B. Single Manufacturer: Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to standardize appearance, operation, maintenance, spa re parts, and manufacturer's services.
However, the CONTRACTOR shall remain responsible to the OWNER for the WORK of the Contract.
C. Coordination: Equipment provided under this Sec tion shall operate the electric motor and the driven equipment indicated under other equipment sp ecifications. The CONTRACTOR's attention is specifically directed to the need for proper coordination of the WORK under this Section with the WORK under the equipment section a nd with the WORK under Section 26 05 10 - Electric Motors.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures, except that Shop Drawing information for the drives shall be submitt ed as part of the information for the driven equipment.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Equipment information
a. Name of drive manufacturer
b. Type and model
c. Assembly drawing and nomenclature
d. Maximum heat dissipation capacity (KW)
2. Written description of ladder diagram operation. Custom schematics shall be furnished.
Diagrams shall include remote devices.
3. System block diagram and interconnection diagrams.
4. Replacement parts list and operation and maintenance instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Solid-state reduced voltage starters (SSRV) shal l be UL-listed and consist of a SCR-based power section, logic board, internal paralleling bypass contactor, and forward/reverse contactors.
B. Starters shall conform to the following:
1. The SCR-based power section shall consist of 6 b ack-to-back SCRs, 2 SCRs per phase, and shall be rated for a minimum peak inverse volta ge rating of 2.5 times line voltage, 1200 PIV for 480 volts. Units using triacs or SCR/ diode combinations shall not be
26 29 13-2
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
acceptable. Resistor/capacitor snubber networks sh all be used to prevent false firing of SCRs due to dv/dt characteristics of the electrical system.
2. Starters shall include the following logic and control functions:
a. Adjustable maximum starting current from 200 percent to 500 percent b. Ramp time adjustment from 1 to 40 seconds
c. Adjustable linear voltage deceleration
d. Kick start
e. Phase loss protection
f. Undervoltage protection
g. Current unbalance protection
h. Phase rotation protection (prevents starting)
i. Class 20 electronic overload protection. Heat s ink overtemperature protection shall be provided.
j. Dry contacts for remote indication of RUN and TR IP status
3. The paralleling bypass contactor shall energize when the motor reaches full speed. The contactor shall be an integral part of the reduced voltage starter and be connected directly across the power SCRs.
4. The starter shall be housed in a NEMA 3R enclosu re. Heaters and cooling fans shall be provided if required to maintain the equipment with in the manufacturer’s environmental guidelines.
5. The starter shall be provided with a control pow er transformer sized to accommodate controls indicated on the Contract Drawings. An in put power circuit breaker shall be provided. Lug termination of the incoming power co nductors shall not be permitted. The starter and circuit breaker shall be rated for 65 KAIC RMS at 480 V.
6. The starter shall have door-mounted indication o f run, phase rotation, phase loss, undervoltage, current unbalance, and current trip.
7. The starter shall be provided with the operator controls indicated. Operator interface controls shall be heavy duty, oil-tight, 30.5-mm.
8. Starter controls shall be amended with Deragger+ anti-ragging pump management system controllers, one for each starter provided and per contract drawings.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS, OR EQUAL
A. Solid-state reduced voltage starters shall be Schneider Electric/Square D Company Altistart 48 with Reversing Contactors, Isolation Contactors, and Modbus TCP Ethernet Connectivity, or approved equal .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall install the solid-state red uced voltage starters in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions.
26 29 13-3
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. The CONTRACTOR shall
1. Verify that the overload devices are properly adjusted for the equipment installed.
2. After the equipment is installed, touch up scrat ches and verify that nameplate and other identification is accurate.
C. Inspection, Startup, Field Adjustment: An autho rized service representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the following and certify the equip ment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, and readied for operation.
1. Installation of the equipment
2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment
3. Startup and field testing for proper operation
END OF SECTION
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 32 13-1
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY POWER GENERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an engine-driven standby electrical generating system, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Docum ents.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordina tion of interface with other equipment and for any special construction necessary to complete the WORK of this Section in an acceptable manner.
C. The supplier of the generator set shall also be the manufacturer of the engine for the generator system; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsibl e to the OWNER for the WORK of this Section.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Materials shall conform with applicable requirem ents of the National Electrical Code (NEC), and any other State or Municipal codes which apply. Ge nerator system shall meet applicable standards and codes, including IEEE, NEMA, ANSI, OS HA, and UL.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Detailed, dimensioned Shop Drawings and data demonstrating adherence to the requirements of these specifications shall be submitted and appr oved before fabrication, shipment, or other WORK under this Section begins. Include the m anufacturer's certification that engine atmospheric emissions will comply with the limitations.
2. Certified custom drawings and custom wiring diagrams of each component in the system and a master wiring diagram showing the entire system on one sheet. This diagram shall include all AC and DC power control connections between the generator, engine, fuel tank system, batteries, and circuit breakers and shall be a cust om drawing for this specific installation. A master drawing of the engine/generator set shall al so be provided, showing general dimensions, bill of materials, location and size of all connections for fuel, cooling, exhaust, direct current connections, conduit locations, and connections for control and power wiring.
Include wire and terminal numbers for all diagrams. Furnish KW output curves, fuel consumption curves, and certified air emission data sheets.
3. Outline drawings and connection diagrams shall be complete enough to enable the installation to be designed completely, and connection diagrams shall give both internal and external connections. Include foundation loading and clearances.
4. Four
copies of complete and detailed instructions for th e operation, lubrication, and maintenance of equipment in the system. The manuals shall be furnished after final approval of Shop and working drawings but prior to shipment of equipment. Manuals shall be complete with wiring diagrams, lubrication schedule s and recommended lubricants, drawings, cuts, parts lists, and other necessary da ta. All parts shall be numbered or
26 32 13-2
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
otherwise clearly identified to facilitate ordering of replacements. Descriptions of all operational control devices and their functions shall also be included.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Permits from Local Air Quality District: Contractor shall submit engine emissions data and required fees and obtain a “Permit to Construct” from Placer County Air Pollution Control District (PCADCD) in the Owner’s name prior to delivery of engine-generator set to job-site.
B. The engine/generator shall be the product of a m anufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and production of similar engine/generator sets for a minimum of 10 years.
C. The supplier shall maintain a local part and 24- hour service facility within the State of Californi a.
The supplier shall have factory trained and authorized service representatives to furnish necessary installation, test, and start-up supervision as well as operation and maintenance training necessary for final approval and acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Provide one new diesel engine-powered electric g enerator set, in an outdoor, waterproof, walk-in sound attenuated enclosure. The engine generator s hall have a nominal standby rating of 130KW, 163KVA, 0.8 power factor, 480 volts, three p hase, four wire, grounded neutral, 60 Hertz.
The equipment package shall include in general, and as applicable, engine and generator on a common vibration isolating base, with auxiliaries, accessories, and controls, including intake filters, discharge silencer, turbocharger, heat exchangers, foundation bolts, isolators, piping, flexible couplings, supports, complete exhaust piping, ring, and silencer, insulation, control panels, lubrication system, water jacket heaters, cooling s ystem, fuel tank, batteries and battery rack, battery charger, spare parts, and all materials necessary to permit installation, testing and placing the system in successful operation.
B. Provide one 400-amp frame circuit breaker locate d in the generator enclosure with 250 amp trip unit.
C. Provide fuel storage tank with double wall steel construction, integral with the base of the generator- set and generator-set enclosure capable of operatin g the engine at 100% load for 24 hours minimum.
D. The generator-set, enclosure, base-mounted fuel tank, and accessories shall be assembled and shipped to the Site as a complete, coordinated pack age, ready for installation. The engine generator base, cooling system, etc., shall be factory painted before installation in the enclosure.
2.02 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. The system shall operate as follows:
1. Automatic Control
a. A maintained remote contact closure from the aut omatic transfer switch shall cause the generator-set to start and run.
b. When the remote startup contact opens, the engin e shall continue to operate for an adjustable cool-down time (typically 5 to 30 minutes).
26 32 13-3
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Local Control: The generator-set shall be capab le of manual initiation or stopping from the locally mounted generator control panel. The local generator control panel shall be provided as part of this Contract.
3. Emergency Stop Control: An emergency stop pushb utton shall be provided at the generator control panel that shall cause the unit to stop without any delay.
2.03 ENGINE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a complete engine-p owered standby electrical generating system of the type and capacity indicated.
B. The diesel engine shall be mounted on a common base with the generator and the direct connected radiator and shall be rated for standby service, co ntinuously for the duration of the electric power interruption, with engine jacket water cooled by me ans of a direct mounted water-to-air radiator under SAE conditions at 85 degrees F, 1500 feet above sea level. It should be noted that this is the rating of the engine.
C. The minimum generator rating shall be 125 KW.
D. The diesel engine shall be four-cycle, turbochar ged, aftercooled, 1800 rpm, with individual fuel pumps and injection valve for each cylinder.
E. The generator-set shall be Cummins, or approved equal .
F. The engine shall have a dry type air cleaner with service indicator, fuel oil filter, full pressure positive pump lubrication with full-flow oil filters, thermo static regulated oil cooling system, and crankcase drain with valving to be able to drain the crankcase oil without reaching under the engine.
G. The engine shall also be equipped with two 120 v olt, thermostatically controlled jacket water heaters. Power shall be derived from a suitably-ra ted dry-type transformer and panelboard, also provided as part of the generating system, and incl uding facilities to provide power to the battery charger, fuel oil transfer pumps if required, and other generator-related facilities.
H. The diesel engine shall perform as indicated whe n operating on a commercial grade of non- premium distilled petroleum fuel oil such as No. 2 domestic burner oil and diesel fuel.
I. The engine shall be equipped with an electric 12 or 24 volt dc starting system of sufficient capacity to crank at a speed which will start the engine und er conditions indicated. Include a charging alternator. The starting pinion shall disengage automatically when the engine starts. The starting system shall include relays for fully automatic operation from a remote signal.
J. The engine shall be provided with electronic gov ernor system capable of automatic isochronous frequency regulation.
K. The engine shall minimize discharge of gaseous p ollutants and shall comply with the discharge limitations of the Air Quality Management District. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certification from the manufacturer that the proposed generator set will comply with the limitations.
2.04 BATTERIES AND BATTERY CHARGER
A. Battery: Provide a lead-acid storage battery wit h sufficient capacity for three 30 second cranking cycles, allowing 10 seconds between cycles. Submit calculations verifying adequate capacity.
The battery shall be on a plastic rack as close as practical to the starter motor. The CONTRACTOR shall provide vented, nonmetallic protective covers or red and black plastic or rubber boots
26 32 13-4
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
covering all terminals to protect against an accidental short circuit as might be caused by laying a metallic object on the battery. Metallic racks and covers are not acceptable.
B. Battery Charger: A unit-mounted battery charger for 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz input shall be provided. The battery charger shall be voltage regulated, with separate float and equalize charge voltage adjustment having a 10 amp rating. The bat tery charger shall include alarm relays to sense high and low dc voltage, zero current, and ac power failure, with individual output contacts wired to terminal strips for tie into remote alarms . Also, provide an ac “on” indicating pilot LED light and dc voltmeter and ammeter and annunciator. The battery charger shall be as recommended by generator-set provider.
2.05 EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. The engine shall be provided with an exhaust sys tem consisting of flexible connection, exhaust silencer, steel piping, fittings, stainless steel hardware and supports, brackets, and rain collar.
B. The flexible connection shall be of the stainles s-steel bellows type with flanged ends. Flexible elements shall be stainless steel suitable for exha ust temperatures recommended by the engine manufacturer. The flexible connection shall be sui table for vibration isolation and for relieving stress caused by thermal expansion.
C. The exhaust silencer shall be a critical grade m anufactured by Maxim, or equal.
D. Exhaust piping shall be pitched upward from the engine and be provided with sufficient drains to eliminate condensation and rain water. Exhaust pip ing shall be welded steel pipe. Elbows shall be welding type, standard wall. Flanges shall be welding slip-on type, 125 pound, either forged or plate steel. Exhaust piping shall be supported ind ependently of the silencer. The silencer and exhaust piping shall be insulated with a minimum of 2-1/2 inches of calcium silicate with a stainless steel jacket and shall be supported as required. T he weight of the exhaust and silencer shall not be supported by the engine.
2.06 COOLING SYSTEM
A. The engine shall be equipped with a cooling syst em having sufficient capacity to effectively cool the engine when delivering full rated horsepower at the conditions stated above. A radiator and engine-driven fan of a type and capacity recommende d by the engine manufacturer shall be included.
B. The radiator shall be sized in accordance with t he engine manufacturer’s recommendation for use with 50 percent aqueous ethylene glycol. Air flow shall be controlled by a power inlet damper and a gravity discharge damper, both provided as part o f the walk-in outdoor enclosure. Design ambient air temperature shall be 100 degrees F at sea level.
C. The engine shall have an engine-driven, gear dri ven centrifugal type water circulating pump for circulating water through the cooling system.
2.07 GENERATOR
A. The generator shall be nominally rated 130 KW at .8 PF, 480 V 3 phase, 60 Hz, 4 wire wye and shall be a brushless design with solid state perman ent magnet generator (PMG) exciter. Other excitation methods are not acceptable. The voltage regulator shall be solid state, generator mounted. Provide radio-interference suppression me eting commercial standards.
B. If a line to neutral short circuit occurs, the g enerator shall be capable of supporting 300 percent rated current for 10 seconds without externally mounted devices.
26 32 13-5
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Voltage Regulation Tolerance: Plus or minus 1 percent of any present value over the 3 phase load range. Instantaneous voltage dip or rise, when mea sured with an oscilloscope, shall not exceed 25 percent upon full load application or rejection, and shall return to preset value within 0.5 seconds.
D. Waveform: Deviation factor of output voltage sh all not exceed 5 percent and the value of any individual harmonic shall not exceed 2 percent of t he fundamental when operating with an unbalanced load.
E. Temperature Rise: Temperature rise of any compon ent shall not exceed the rise permitted by NEMA standards. The voltage regulator shall be adjustable minus 25 percent to plus 10 percent.
F. Bearing: Double sealed ball bearing, lubricated for life.
2.08 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. The engine and generator shall be mounted on a c ommon system base and shall be provided with vibration isolators of number and size as recommend ed by the engine supplier to support the engine, generator, radiator, and base. The isolati on mountings shall consist of steel or cast iron top and bottom housings incorporating steel springs or "donut" style isolators, located between the genset and the base, and shall be provided with bui lt-in leveling bolts and built-in resilient chocks to control isolation and withstand lateral forces in all directions.
B. The vibration isolators shall be Korfund Dynamics Corporation Series L , or equal.
2.09 LUBRICATION AND COOLING FLUIDS
A. The supplier shall furnish the engine fully char ged with lubricating oil and grease as specified by the manufacturer for continuous service. The coolin g system shall be furnished with a full charge of 50 percent ethylene glycol.
2.10 GENERATOR SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL
A. The engine shall be provided with an integrally mounted instrument and control panel, vibration isolated, NEMA 12 compliant, dead front, constructe d of 14-gauge steel and containing at least the following equipment:
Coolant temperature gauge
Oil pressure gauge
Four position selector switches marked for “auto,” “manual,” “stop,” and “stop/reset.” Automatic starting controls (2 wire start/stop)
Coolant level pre-alarm
Coolant temperature pre-alarms (low and high)
Fuel pressure pre-alarm
26 32 13-6
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
Low dc voltage alarm to indicate loss of charge on battery Electrical contacts and "push to test" pilot lights for shutting down the engine on low oil pressure, high oil temperature, over-crank, high coolant temperature, and overspeed condition Individual electrical contacts for remote indication of any pre-alarm or alarm condition Running Time Meter (Non Resettable)
Emergency stop switch
Voltmeter and switch, ammeter and switch, frequency meter
B. Wiring
1. Signal wiring shall be segregated from power wiring and be arranged neatly to facilitate tracing of circuits.
2. Plastic wiring wraps shall be used to bundle wir es, except within wiring ducts. The bundles shall be securely fastened to the steel structure at suitable intervals not exceeding 12-inches in length. No open space hanging of wires will be permitted. Flexible stranded copper wiring shall be used throughout. No solid conductor wire shall be permitted.
3. Terminal blocks shall be provided for interconne ctions between remote devices and local control panel wiring. The terminal blocks shall be factory assembled on a mounting channel, and the channel shall be bolted to the inside of th e panel. The terminals shall have a continuous marking strip using the nomenclature on the schematic diagrams. No more than 2 wires shall be terminated at any one terminal. W ire terminals shall have sleeve wire markers properly marked to match the schematic diagrams.
2.11 GENERATOR ENCLOSURE AND FUEL TANK
A. Generator Enclosure
1. A weatherproof, sound attenuated, walk-in type e nclosure shall be provided to house the engine/generator and accessories. The following st andards and codes shall be met at a minimum:
a. NEPA 70 (National Electric Code)
b. NFPA 30
c. NFPA 37
d. NFPA 110
e. UL 142
f. API 620
2. The enclosure shall be constructed with an aluminum diamond plate finished floor for mounting on a concrete pad. The enclosure shall conform to the following design criteria.
Rigidity wind test equal to [150] MPH
26 32 13-7
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
Roof load equal to [50] lbs. per sq. ft.
Floor load equal to [200] lbs. per sq. ft.
Rain test equal to [4]-inches per hour
Enclosure certified to meet [BOCA base building and mechanical codes]
3. Test data on similar construction by the manufac turer shall be available to the ENGINEER upon request.
4. Enclosure shall consist of a roof, steel floor, fuel tank base, 2 side walls and 2 end walls, of stressed skin, semi-monocoque construction, sized as required to meet dimensional, sound attenuation, and code requirements for the actual generator provided.
5. The system shall include a cooling and combustio n air inlet silencer section, an equipment enclosure section, and a cooling air discharge silencer section. It shall be designed to reduce source noise by an estimated average 75 dB(A) as measured at a distance of 7-meters from the enclosure. The enclosure shall also be bird- and rodent-proof with all openings screened.
6. Roof and walls shall be of one-piece semi-monoco que construction. Framing members shall be aluminum or aluminized steel. Skin material shall be minimum thickness 0.040-inch, pre- painted earth bronze color, aluminum (roof shall be mill finish) or minimum thickness 18- gauge aluminized steel. Other materials of constru ction may be acceptable; however, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish data verifying that the pr oposed system is equivalent or better than that indicated. Alternative skin colors may be submitted to the ENGINEER for selection. Skin panels shall be hard-riveted to fr aming members on 3-inch centers maximum. Pop rivets and bolts are not acceptable f asteners to attach exterior skin to framing. Roof assembly shall be cambered to aid in rain runoff.
7. Insulation in walls and roof shall be semi-rigid, thermo acoustic, thickness as required to meet the noise criteria. Lining shall be perforated mil l finish aluminum. Self-adhesive foam and loose or batt-type insulating materials will not be accepted.
8. Lifting provisions shall be provided at the enclosure base, with capacity suitable for rigging the entire assembly. Quality assurance procedures of t he manufacturer shall include regular testing of the lift devices.
9. A minimum of 4 single personnel access doors sha ll be provided. A hinged access door for the load bank controls shall also be provided. Doors shall consist of an extruded frame with skin material matching enclosure. Doors shall be f ully gasketed to form a weathertight perimeter seal and be pad-lockable. Hinges shall b e stainless steel, and lock mechanisms shall be 3 point, with panic hardware to allow open ing from inside even when padlocked.
The door threshold, if needed, shall be aluminum. Stairs and handrails shall be aluminum and shall be manufactured to meet field-installed conditions.
10. Air handling shall be as follows: Air shall en ter the enclosure through a removable hood.
Motor-operated dampers shall be provided, wired to be spring operated to open upon engine startup. Radiator discharge shall be through a gra vity-operated damper and into a hood.
26 32 13-8
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
The system shall not exceed 0.5-inch wg total exter nal static pressure to ensure adequate airflow for cooling and combustion.
11. A bolt-in-place removable end wall panel shall be provided for maintenance and/or equipment installation. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel.
12. Enclosure manufacturer shall provide all necess ary hardware to externally mount the exhaust silencer and maintain the weatherproof inte grity of the system. A bird screen shall be installed on exhaust outlet.
13. An electrical package shall include minimum fou r 100 watt incandescent lights, one battery- backed emergency light with two 25 watt heads, one light switch, and one duplex GFCI receptacle. These items, as well as the motor-oper ated air inlet damper, shall be factory wired to a 60A 120/240V Load Center. Input power to the load center shall be as indicated.
B. Sub-base Fuel Storage System
1. Provide a double wall secondary containment sub- base fuel tank mounted within or beneath the structural skid below the generator set. The t ank shall have fuel level gauge, fill, vent, bottom drain, top supply and return lines.
2. The tank shall have venting and emergency venting per UL 12 and NFPA 30; lockable fill, low- level, and high-level alarm contacts; and a dc elec tric analog fuel level gauge. The rupture basin shall include a float contact to indicate tan k rupture. The crossmembers shall incorporate 3/8-inch thick steel tapping plates for gen-set mounting. The entire enclosure/fuel tank package shall be UL listed for use with a diesel engine generator system and shall meet the previously indicated codes and standards.
3. The fuel storage tank capacity shall be sufficient for operating the engine at 100% load for 24 hours, generator rating.
4. Pipe and Fittings
a. Pipe and fitting materials shall be new and the best of their respective classes. Pipe shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer’s standard trade mark or identification mark.
Pipe and fittings, unless otherwise indicated, shal l meet the requirements of these specifications.
b. Piping carrying fuel oil shall be copper type “L ” with wrought copper fittings silver soldered. Flexible connections shall be provided between fuel lines and the engine.
5. Hangers, Supports, and Miscellaneous Metalwork: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary hangers, supports, concrete inserts, anch ors, and guides for the standby generator equipment.
6. Valves: The CONTRACTOR shall provide ball valves for installation at all required points and on at least each fuel supply line. Ball valves sha ll be stainless steel, rated 125 pounds working pressure and in every respect be suitable for the purpose intended.
2.12 SPARE PARTS
A. Four sets of the following spare parts shall be furnished:
1. Air filters
2. Oil filters
3. Fuel filters
26 32 13-9
Standby Power Generation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 START-UP ASSISTANCE AND TRAINING
A. The manufacturer’s representative shall furnish on-Site start-up assistance and shall inspect the installation prior to start-up to verify that equip ment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
B. Upon completion of startup and after acceptance by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall completely fill the fuel tank.
C. In addition, the manufacturer’s representative s hall provide on-Site training for operation and maintenance of all equipment included in this Section.
D. The following times shall be included, as a mini mum, for the above tasks. A Day is defined as 8 hours on-Site, exclusive of meals and travel. Each task shall be considered a separate trip to the site. Dates and times for the trips shall be coordinated with the OWNER.
1. Inspection of the installation: One Day
2. Startup assistance: One Day
3. Operation and Maintenance Training: One Day
END OF SECTION
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 36 23-1
Automatic Transfer Switch
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 36 23
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide automatic transfer switch, control and terminal cabinets, control devices, circuit breakers, and all appurtenant work , complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work, apply to the WORK of this Section.
1.02 REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, e quipment and workmanship shall conform to the latest provisions of the following agencies:
1. NEC (NFPA 70) National Electrical Code: 2020 E dition B. Electrical equipment shall be listed by and shal l bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc . (UL) or an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local code enforcement agency having jurisdiction.
C. Installation of electrical equipment and materia ls shall comply with OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, as applicab le), state building standards, and applicable local codes and regulations.
D. Standards: Where referenced in these specificat ions or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations apply:
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute
a. ANSI/IEEE C37.20 Switchgear Assemblies, includin g Metal-Enclosed Bus b. ANSI/NEMA ICS-2 Devices, Controllers, and Assemb lies for Industrial Control c. ANSI/UL 1008 Automatic Transfer Switches, Safet y Standard for
2. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
3. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
4. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics E ngineers
5. NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1 000 Volts Maximum)
6. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
7. NETA International Electrical Testing Associat ion
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: All materials shall be inspected for compliance with Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work, and shall be tested per Section 26 01 26 - Electrical Tests.
B. Factory Tests: Design test reports conducted on similar assemblies at the factory testing faciliti es shall be submitted.
26 36 23-2
Automatic Transfer Switch
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1.04 WARRANTY
A. The system warranty shall be no less than one ye ar after initial startup and shall include all cost s for repair, parts, travel and living expenses, and labor.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings of the Automatic Transfer Switch in accordance with the requirements for of Section 01 33 03 –Submittal Procedures.
B. Equipment ratings and characteristics including voltage ratings, continuous current ratings, fault current withstand ratings, neutral bus ratings, enc losure type, ratings and arrangement of overcurrent protective devices.
C. Outline and dimensional drawings and conduit ent ry restrictions.
D. Nameplate designations, sizes and mounting metho ds.
E. ATS information on setpoints and methods for adj usting settings.
F. Short circuit rating of the complete assembly
G. Replacement parts lists and operation and mainte nance procedures H. Seismic design certification of the anchoring sy stem in accordance with Section 26 05 48.
1.06 FACILITY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General
1. Submit complete operation and maintenance manual in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 03.13 – O&M Manual Review Checklist.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit operation and mainte nance procedures for the ENGINEER’s review. The data sheets shall be supplemented by written text and shall include the following:
1. Operating procedures.
2. Maintenance procedures.
3. Manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, assemblies, and diagrams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials: All materials and equipment provided under this Specification shall be new; they shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Insti tute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, the National Fire Protection Association, and the National Electrical Code. Where available, all materials and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories label.
B. Equipment: All equipment for the same purpose s hall be of the same make.
C. Enclosure Requirements: All outdoor equipment, fixtures, and wiring devices shall be of approved, weatherproof construction.
D. Standard Products: Materials and equipment subm itted for approval shall be the cataloged products of companies regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, of the latest standard design that conforms to the specification requirements, and shall essentially duplicate material and equipment that has been in satisfactory use for several years.
26 36 23-3
Automatic Transfer Switch
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2.02 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. The automatic transfer (ATS) switch shall be a 3 -pole, double-throw, with in-phase monitor rated at 480 volts, with the continuous current rating shown.
B. The ATS switch shall be able to withstand the short circuit currents indicated or shall have the same withstand rating as the switchboard in which it is installed.
C. The load terminals of the ATS switch shall be de -energized when the ATS switch is in the neutral position; the duration of the neutral position shall be adjustable from zero to 30 seconds. The ATS switch shall comply with requirements of ANSI/UL 1008 and ANSI/NEMA ICS-2.
D. The ATS switch shall be manually operable but th e manual operating mechanism shall be declutched when the electric operator becomes energ ized. Mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be provided to prevent simultaneous closure of the normal and emergency positions.
E. The automatic transfer switch shall include inte grated controls featuring solid state timing and sensing relays. Protective features and indicators shall include:
1. Three-phase, close-differential undervoltage pro tection on the Normal source; dropout shall be adjustable from 80-85 percent; pick-up shall be adjustable from 90-95 percent.
2. Engine start and run contact closure; contact cl osure shall be adjustable from zero to 120 seconds after failure of the Normal source is detected. The engine run contact shall remain closed for an adjustable period of zero to 5 minute s (cool down period) after the load has been transferred back to the normal source.
3. Circuitry shall be provided to prevent transfer to the Emergency source until Emergency source voltage and frequency are within 90 percent of nominal values.
4. Adjustable time delay of retransfer of up to 10 minutes after the voltage of the Normal source has attained the pick-up setting specified in the foregoing Item No. 1 on all phases.
5. The automatic transfer switch shall be equipped with indicator lamps for the Normal and Emergency positions. Two "dry" contacts shall be provided for the Emergency position and one "dry" contact for the Normal position; said contacts shall be wired to identified terminals.
6. Three-position selector switch: TEST-OFF-AUTO; the AUTO position shall cause engine start-up, transfer, and retransfer of the load on f ailure and subsequent restoration of the Normal source. The TEST position shall simulate fa ilure of the Normal source for however long the switch is in the Test position.
F. The automatic transfer switch shall be as manufa ctured by ASCO 7000 Series, EATON, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. All electrical equipment shall be installed secu rely in place. Equipment shall be mounted parallel and perpendicular to the walls, floors, and ceilings.
B. All anchors and fasteners shall be types designe d for the intended purpose and shall be capable of adequately, safely, and permanently securing the material in place. Generally, screws shall be used on wood surfaces, masonry anchors in concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow walls, machine screws, bolts, or welded studs on steel. N ails shall be used only for temporary attachment or support.
26 36 23-4
Automatic Transfer Switch
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
C. Omissions or conflicts on Drawings or between Dr awings and Specifications shall be brought to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification before proceeding with the work.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisio ns throughout the Site to receive all equipment as construction progresses and shall provide adequate backing, supports, inserts, and anchor bolts for the hanging and support of all ele ctrical cabinets, enclosures, conduits, panelboards, and switches, and shall provide sleeve s through walls, floors, or foundations where electrical lines are required to penetrate.
A. Floor standing equipment shall be leveled with shim s as required to maintain horizontal surfaces within 1/32-inch per horizontal foot; after levelin g, equipment shall be anchored, then grouted so that no space exists between concrete and equipment support beams.
3.02 PREPARATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
A. All equipment cabinets or enclosures furnished u nder this Section shall have a finish that will conform to Section 26 29 00 - Low-Voltage Motor Control Center.
END OF SECTION
26 43 00-1
Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 43 00
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install surge protective devices (SPD).
B. SPDs furnished under this Section shall be ANSI/ UL 1449 Type 2 integrating both surge suppression and high-frequency noise filtering suitable for use on low-voltage distribution systems.
C. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work, apply to the WORK of this Section
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Reference Standards:
1. ANSI/UL 1449, Fourth Edition, Safety Surge Protective Devices
2. IEEE C62.41.1, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits
3. IEEE C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testi ng for Equipment Connect to Low- Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits
4. UL 1283, Safety Electromagnetic Interference Filters
5. NFPA 70, National Electric Code
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work, General.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Electrical and mechanical drawings for each type of unit, showing electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting provisions, connection details, and layout diagrams.
C. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s technical information, including catalog information.
2. Manufacturer's technical specifications with assembly and component ratings.
D. Certifications: Certification that SPD devices c omply with standards referenced in this Section.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Shall have at least five (5) years ’ experience manufacturing and servicing products substantially similar to those required and shall be able to submit documentation of at least 5 installations in satisfactory operation for at least five (5) years each.
B. Component Supply and Compatibility:
1. Obtain all products included in this Section reg ardless of component manufacturer from a single SPD manufacturer.
2. SPD manufacturer shall review and approve or pre pare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section.
26 43 00-2
Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
3. Components shall be suitable for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into overall assembly by SPD manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. SPD shall be modular, high-energy, parallel desi gn with fast-acting transient voltage suppression using metal oxide varistors. Equipment shall provi de noise attenuation with electromagnetic interference filter.
B. SPD shall be suitable for operation under the fo llowing environmental conditions:
1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95%, non-condensing
2. Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
3. Temperature: Zero to 149°F
4. SPD operating voltage shall be suitable for the associated SPD location(s).
5. SPD shall be suitable for internal and external mounting. SPD shall be factory-mounted and integrated into distribution equipment specified under the following Sections:
a. Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Work
b. Section 26 12 16 – Panelboards and General-Purpose Dry Type Transformers c. Section 26 29 00 – Low-Voltage Motor Control Cen ters C. SPD shall include a surge suppression path for each mode as required for the system configuration.
Each mode shall be individually fused and equipped with thermal cutouts. SPD short-circuit current rating shall be 200 kA. Protection modes s hall include, to the extent applicable, the following:
1. Line-to-line
2. Line-to-neutral
3. Line-to-ground
4. Neutral-to-ground
D. SPD shall include electromagnetic interference/r adio frequency interference (EMI/RFI) noise rejection filter with attenuation up to 30 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz.
E. SPDs and components in the operating path shall have maximum continuous operating voltage greater than 115% of nominal system operating volta ge.
F. ANSI/UL 1449 minimum withstand rating shall be 2 0 kA per pole, and ANSI/UL 1449 voltage protection rating for SPD shall not exceed the following:
Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277
L-N,L-G, N-G 800 1200
L-L 1200 2000
G. SPD surge capacity based upon IEEE C62.41 locati on category shall, as a minimum, be the following:
Category Application Per Phase Per Mode
C Service entrance 240 kA 120 kA
26 43 00-3
Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
H. Provide SPD equipped with the following accessor ies:
I. Surge counter with display for indicating the nu mber of surges detected.
J. LED indicators for monitoring device status.
K. Audible alarm and silence switch for indicating an inoperative condition.
L. Dry contacts, “form C”, for remote annunciation of unit status.
M. Source Quality Control: Perform manufacturer’s s tandard factory tests on equipment. Tests shall be in accordance with ANSI/UL 1449.
N. Manufacturers: General Electric, Eaton, Schneider Electric/Square D Company, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install SPD in accordance with equipment manufac turer’s written recommendations and instructions and the Contract Documents.
B. Where an SPD cannot be installed integral with t he equipment to which it is connected, conductor length between suppressor and connection point shal l be as short and as straight as possible.
END OF SECTION
B High exposure locations
(distribution equipment)
160 kA 80 kA
A Branch locations 120 kA 60 kA
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
26 50 00-1
Lighting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide luminaires and accessories, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.02 REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, e quipment and workmanship shall conform to the latest provisions of the following agencies:
1. CBC California Building Code
2. CEC (TITLE 20) California Energy Commission
3. IBC International Building Code - Earthquake R equirements
4. NEC (NFPA 70) National Electrical Code: 2020 Ed ition
5. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
6. UBC Uniform Building Code
B. Electrical equipment shall be listed by and shal l bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc . (UL) or an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local code enforcement agency having jurisdiction.
C. Standards: Where referenced in these specificat ions or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations apply:
1. AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Compan ies
2. ANSI American National Standards Institute
3. ANSI C82.1 – Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
4. ANSI C84.4 – Specifications for High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply)
5. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
6. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
7. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics E ngineers
8. NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1 000 Volts Maximum)
9. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
10. NETA International Electrical Testing Associa tion D. Where the requirements of the specifications con flict with UL, NEMA, NFPA, or other applicable standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern.
1. UL-595 Standard for Safety Marine-Type Electri c Lighting Fixtures
2. UL-844 Standard for Safety Electric Lighting F ixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified Locations)
3. UL-924 Standard for Safety Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
26 50 00-2
Lighting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
Standards of the Certified Ballast Manufacturer’s Association
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish the following product information in acc ordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 03 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Furnish the following information:
1. Interior Luminaires
a. catalog data sheets and photos
b. luminaire finish and metal gauge
c. lens material, pattern, and thickness
candlepower distribution curves in 2 or more plane s
d. candlepower chart, 0 to 90 degrees
e. lumen output chart
f. average maximum brightness data in foot-lamberts
g. coefficients of utilization for zonal cavity calculations h. mounting or suspension details
i. heat exchange and air handling data
2. Exterior Luminaires
a. catalog data sheets and photos
b. luminaire finish and metal gauge
c. lens material, pattern, and thickness
d. IES lighting classification and Isolux diagram
e. fastening details to wall or pole
f. ballast type, location, and method of fastening
g. for light poles: wind loading; complete dimensions; and finish
3. Lamps
a. voltages
b. colors
c. approximate life (in hours)
d. approximate initial lumens
e. lumen maintenance curve
f. lamp type and base
4. Ballasts
a. type
b. wiring diagram
c. nominal watts and input watts
26 50 00-3
Lighting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
d. input voltage and power factor
e. starting current, line current, and restrike current values f. sound rating
g. temperature rating
h. efficiency ratings
i. low-temperature characteristics
j. emergency ballasts rating and capacity data
5. Photocells
a. voltage and power consumption
b. capacity
c. contacts and time delay
d. operating levels
e. enclosure type and dimensions
f. temperature range
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES
A. General
1. Additional WORK requirements are indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on the Drawings.
2. Fluorescent luminaires that utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be serviced in place shall be provided with a disconnecting means either internal or external to each luminaire, in accordance with the requirements of Article 410.130(G)(1) of the 2020 NEC.
B. Provide a feed-through type or separate junction box.
C. Provide 2-lamp ballasts when possible.
D. Tandem-wire luminaires for 3-lamp fluorescent lu minaires.
E. Provide minimum 18 AWG wire leads.
F. Provide components that are accessible and repla ceable without removing the luminaire from the ceiling.
G. Soffit Installations
1. Installations shall be UL-labeled as "Suitable for Damp Locations."
2. Provide removable and prewired ballasts.
H. Exterior Installations
1. Installations shall be UL-labeled as "Suitable for Wet Locations."
2. Provide removable and prewired ballasts.
3. When factory-installed photocells are provided, the entire assembly shall be UL-labeled.
26 50 00-4
Lighting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
I. Emergency Lighting
1. Power Pack
a. self-contained
b. 120 V
c. 6 V sealed lead-calcium, maintenance free
d. indicator switch in accordance with the requirements of UL 924
2. lighted, push-to-test pushbutton and indicator
3. capability of providing full illumination for 1-1/2 hours in emergency mode
4. capability of full recharge in 24 hours, automat ically initiated upon resumption of normal line voltage
5. capability of protecting against excess charging and discharging
6. twin halogen, sealed lighting heads
7. solid state charger
8. normal and emergency LED indicating lights
9. Provide a 3-wire power cord and plug set.
10. mounting stand
11. time delay relays in order to maintain emergenc y lighting in areas illuminated by HID luminaires for 5 minutes after normal power has been restored.
12. Provide NEMA-rated enclosures in accordance wit h the area classifications in which they are installed.
J. Exit Signs
1. internally illuminated
2. universal mounting type
3. internal 6V sealed lead-calcium, maintenance free battery
4. battery charger
5. LED-type emergency and normal indicating lights
6. press-to-test button
7. directional arrows
8. red letters on a white panel
2.02 LAMPS
A. Light Emitting Diode (LED)
1. High
2. Efficiency Type: energy
3. Color: per schedule
B. Manufacturer, or Approved Equal
1. Cooper Crouse (EATON)
26 50 00-5
Lighting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Lithonia
2.03 LED DRIVER
A. General
1. UL-Listed, ETL-certified
2. high power factor, energy-efficient type
3. Driver shall meet luminaire requirements.
4. LED driver shall be UL listed with integral short circuit, overload and overheat protection.
5. Power factor >90% and total harmonic distortion THD <20%.
6. Provide driver capable of operating on 120, 208V.
7. Driver shall have minimum 3 years warranty and rated for 50,000 hours.
2.04 LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Photocell
1. Photo Control: automatic ON-OFF switch
2. Housing: self-contained; die-cast aluminum; unaffected by moisture, vibration, or temperature changes
3. Settings: ON at dusk; OFF at dawn
4. Provide a time delay feature in order to prevent false switching.
5. field-adjustable to control operating levels
6. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Tork
b. Paragon
2.05 POLES
A. Rating (with luminaire): 125-mph steady winds wi thout incurred damage B. Material: steel
C. one-piece stationary type
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LUMINAIRES
A. General
1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Provide necessary hangers, pendants, canopies, and other accessories.
3. Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural reinforcements to the building as required to safely mount the luminaire.
4. Install the luminaire plumb and level.
5. The mounting heights indicated for wall-mounted or pendant-mounted luminaires are from the bottom of the luminaire to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
26 50 00-6
Lighting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
6. Install each luminaire outlet box with a galvanized stud.
B. Pendant Mounting
1. Provide swivel-type hangers and canopies to matc h the luminaires, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space single-stem hangers on continuous-row fluorescent luminaires 48 inches apart.
3. Provide twin-stem hangers on single luminaires.
C. Pole Mounting
1. Provide a cast-in-place concrete base.
2. Install the pole base flush with the finished grade where located in grassy areas not subject to vehicular traffic, and 30 inches above the finished grade when the pole is located in areas subject to damage from vehicular traffic.
3. Set the luminaire poles on anchor bolts and secure with double nuts on each bolt.
4. After the luminaire has been leveled and plumbed, dry-pack the luminaire base with grout.
D. Finished Areas
1. Install the luminaires symmetrically with tile pattern.
2. Locate with the centerline of tile or with centerline of the joint between adjacent tile runs.
3. Install recessed luminaires tight to the finishe d surface such that no spill light will show between the ceilings and the sealing rings.
4. When installing on combustible low-density cellu lose fiberboard, provide spacers and mount luminaires 1-1/2 inches from ceiling surface, or use luminaires suitable for mounting on low- density ceilings.
5. Junction Boxes
a. Flush and Recessed Luminaires: Locate a minimum of one foot from the luminaire. b. In concealed locations, install junction boxes t o be accessible by the removal of the luminaire.
6. Wiring and Conduit
a. Provide wiring of a suitable temperature rating as required by the luminaire. b. Provide flexible steel conduit.
7. Provide plaster frames when required by ceiling construction.
8. Independent Supports
a. Provide each recessed fluorescent luminaire with 2 safety chains or 2 No. 12 soft- annealed galvanized steel wires of length needed to secure the luminaire to the building structure, independent of the ceiling structure.
b. Ensure that the tensile strength of chain or wir e, and the method of fastening to the structure, is adequate to support the weight of the luminaire. c. Fasten the chain or wire to each end of the lumi naire.
E. Unfinished Areas
26 50 00-7
Lighting
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Locate the luminaires to avoid conflicts with ot her building systems and blockage of the luminaire light output.
2. Luminaire Suspension
a. Provide 1/4- inch threaded steel hanger rods.
b. Scissor-type hangers will not be accepted.
3. For attachments to steel beams, provide flanged beam clips and straight or angled hangers.
3.02 LAMPS
A. Within each luminaire, provide the number and ty pe for which the luminaire is designed, unless otherwise indicated.
3.03 LED DRIVERS
A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s re commendations.
B. Use LED driver mounting holes to fasten the driv er securely within the luminaire.
C. Replace noisy or defective drivers.
3.04 LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Outdoor Luminaires
1. The photocells shall switch lights ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.
B. Dimming Systems
1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Do not connect ballasts or equipment to the dimm ing system unless such connections are acceptable to the dimming system manufacturer.
3.05 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove labels and other markings, except the UL listing mark.
B. Wipe the luminaires inside and out in order to r emove construction dust.
C. Clean the luminaire plastic lenses with an antis tatic cleaner only.
D. Touch up painted surfaces of the luminaires and the poles with matching paint provided by the manufacturer.
E. Replace defective lamps at the Date of Substanti al Completion.
END OF SECTION
TOC-4
Table of Contents
Pump Station No. 26 Improvements
City of Roseville NOVEMBER 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
31 05 03-1
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 31 05 03
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes: All excavating, backfilling, filling, grading, subgrade preparation and disposing of earth materials as required. It also includes all temporary means needed to prevent discharge of sediment to watercourses from dewatering systems or erosion.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Aggregate Material.
2. ASTM D422, Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
3. ASTM D423, Liquid Limit of Soils.
4. ASTM D427, Shrinkage Factors of Soils.
5. ASTM D698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil.
6. ASTM D1556, Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
7. ASTM D2922, Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
8. ASTM D2166, unconfined compressive strength of soils.
B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
1. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1926
C. City of Roseville
1. Design and Construction Details for Trench Backfill
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Permits and Regulations:
1. Perform excavation Work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Obtain all necessary permits for Work in roads, rights -of-way, railroads, etc. Also, obtain permits as required by local, state and federal agencies for discharging water from excavations, for erosion control, and for prevention of air and water pollution.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports - Borrow, Backfill, and Grading: Testing laboratory shall submit copies of the following reports directly to ENGINEER:
1. Tests on borrow material.
2. Tests on footing subgrade.
3. Field density tests.
4. Optimum moisture - maximum density curve for each soil used for backfill.
31 05 03-2
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
5. Reports of observations for conformance of borrow material to the Project Geotechnical Report.
6. Quality Control Plan: Names and phone numbers of independent testing companies that will be used to perform soil and asphalt concrete testing, qualifications, and proposed procedures for performing tests and providing test results to ENGINEER.
B. Submit to the ENGINEER samples of all materials, including select backfill, gener al backfill, bedding, crushed stone, sand and topsoil. Submit samples of the proposed material at least seven days in advance of its anticipated use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All material will be tested by the laboratory and approved by the ENGINEER.
2. No material shall be placed without the approval of the ENGINEER.
B. Marking Tape:
1. Plastic:
a. Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil.
b. Thickness: Minimum 4 mils.
c. Width: 12 inches.
d. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length.
e. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Reef Industries; Terra Tape.
2) Allen; Markline.
3) Or equal.
2. Metallic:
a. Solid aluminum foil, visible on unprint ed side, encased in a protective high visibility, inert polyethylene plastic jacket.
b. Foil Thickness: Minimum 5.5 mils.
c. Width: 12 inches.
d. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length.
e. Joining Clips: Tin or nickel-coated, furnished by tape manufacturer. f. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Reef Industries; Terra ”D”.
2) Allen; Detectatape.
3) Or equal.
3. Marking tape shall be marked with the following statements:
a. Sanitary Sewer Pipeline: “CAUTION – SANITARY SEWER PIPELINE BURIED BELOW.”
b. For Existing Utilities Within Trench Limits: “CAUTION – BURIED PIPELINE/CONDUIT” or as specified by utility owner.
4. Color:
a. Sanitary Sewer Pipeline: Green, as specified in ANSI Z53.1 Safety Color Code.
31 05 03-3
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
b. Others Disturbed: Color, as specified for specific utility in ANSI Z53.1 Safety Color Code.
C. Pipe Locating Wire:
1. Pipe locating wire shall be bare AWG No. 10, soft drawn, single-strand copper wire.
2. Provide at least 6-mil PVC electrical tape insulation around wire where adjacent to metal pipe, valves, and in all valve boxes.
D. Filter Fabric:
1. Filter fabric shall be Mirafi, Type 140N; Dupont, Type PAR, Style 3401, or equal and shall conform to the following requirements:
2. Minimum grab strength of 120 lbs per ASTM D4632.
3. Apparent open size (AOS) to be equal to or greater than the U.S. Standard Sieve No. 100 (0.210 mm) per ASTM D4751.
4. Percent open area not to exceed about 25 percent. The percent open area is defined as the ratio of the sum of 20 or more individual open areas (times 100) to the sum of the corresponding 20 or more individual total areas.
5. Permittivity shall not be less than 1.7 sec-1.
E. Fill Material:
1. Classification:
a. Fill adjacent to structures to a distance measured horizontally from the structure that is equal to the depth from the finished grade is classified as Select Fill. b. Outside these limits, the fill is classified as Common Fill, unless otherwise specified.
2. Common Fill:
a. Common Fill materials shall consist of soils obtained from on -site excavations or off-site sources that are uniformly mixed, contain no organic material, and have been passed through a 3-inch screen.
b. The maximum expansion of off-site materials shall be 1.5% as performed on a sample re molded to approximately 9% of the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 at 2% below optimum moisture content under a 100 psf surcharge pressure.
c. If on-site material is unsuitable as determined by the ENGINEER, imported fill shall be used.
3. Select Fill:
a. Select fill or backfill is material selected by the ENGINEER from the excavation. b. Select material shall be free of organic or other unsuitable materials and shall not contain rocks, or unbroken masses of soil larger than 4 inches in greatest dimension.
F. Aggregate Base:
1. Class 2, ¾ inch maximum conforming to Section 26 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
G. Granular Bedding:
1. Well-graded sand and gravel materials.
2. Unfrozen, friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material.
3. Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5 % passing No. 200 sieve, as determined in accordance with ASTM D1140, or gravel or crushed rock within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless otherwise specified.
31 05 03-4
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
4. 3/4-inch maximum particle size, except 1/4 inch for stainless steel pipe, copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe under 3-inch diameter.
5. Conduit and Direct-Buried Cable:
a. Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12% passing No. 200 sieve. b. Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges.
c. Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve.
d. If more than 5 % passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that passes No. 40 sieve shall be non-plastic as determined in accordance with ASTM D4318.
H. Sand:
1. Natural or manufactured granular material, containing no organic material.
2. Sand will be non -plastic, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318, 100% passing a ½ inch screen and no more than 20% passing a No. 200 screen.
I. Crushed Stone:
1. Crushed stone will be crushed rock or gravel conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33, Size #57.
J. Gravel Surfacing
1. Gravel Surfacing will be crushed rock, angular, and well-graded.
2. Maximum size of ¾ inch, at least 50% passing the No 4. screen, between 10 and 30% passing the No. 10 screen and no more than 15% passing the No. 40 screen.
3. Color to be selected by CITY.
K. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM):
1. Select and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between 50 and 150 psi at 7 days in accordance with ASTM D4832. Sufficient cement shall be added to meet the strength and material requirements given below and as required to provide sufficient strength for compacting overlying trench backfill. Provide certified mix design and test results in accordance with submittal requirements.
2. Materials:
a. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, two sacks minimum per cubic yard. b. Aggregate: ASTM C33, maximum Size 7. The amount of material passing a No. 200 sieve shall not exceed 12%. The above No. 200 sieve material shall be well graded so as to avoid segregation. The minus #200 sieve fraction shall be non- plastic.
c. Fly Ash (if used): ASTM C618, Class C or F.
d. Water: Clean, potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.
3. Mix Design:
a. The CONTRACTOR and its suppliers shall determine the materials and proportions used to meet the requirements of these Specifications. Make daily checks of the aggregate gradation and adjust the mix design as required. Modify the CLSM mix as necessary to meet the flowability, pumpability, and set time requirements for each individual pour.
b. At least 30 days before placing CLSM, submit to the ENGINEER a mix design for each CLSM to be used. The mix design shall include trial lab and field data, with pairs of 6 -inch by 12 -inch cylinder breaks performed at 7, 14, and 28 days.
Molds shall be plastic or waxed cardboard. The mix design shall be performed by an indepen dent laboratory under the direction of an engineer licensed in California.
31 05 03-5
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
c. No CLSM shall be placed until the ENGINEER has approved the mix design. The ENGINEER’s approval of the mix design shall be understood to indicate conditional acceptance. Final accep tance will be based on tests conducted on field samples and conformance with these Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspection:
1. Provide ENGINEER with sufficient notice and with means to examine the areas and conditions under which excavating, filling, and grading are to be performed.
2. ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR if conditions are found that may be detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work.
3. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been co rrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. “Pot-holing”:
1. Excavate and backfill, in advance of the construction, test pits to determine conditions or location of the existing utilities and structures.
2. Definite the location of each existing facility involve d within the area of his excavation for Work under this Contract.
3. Exercise care during such location work to avoid damaging and/or disrupting the affected facility.
4. CONTRACTOR is responsible for repairing, at his expense, damage to any structure, piping, or utility caused by his Work.
C. Temporary Fencing:
1. Furnish and install a temporary fence surrounding excavations and work area, including the stockpile and storage areas.
2. Provide fence openings only at vehicular, equipment, and worker access points.
3.2 EROSION CONTROL
A. General: Implement the construction procedures outlined herein to assure minimum damage to the environment during construction. Take all additional measures required to conform to the requirements of applicable codes and regulations.
1. Whenever possible, locate and construct access and temporary roads to avoid environmental damage. Make provisions to regulate drainage, avoid erosion , and minimize damage to vegetation.
2. Where areas must be cleared for storage of materials or temporary structures , provisions will be made for regulating drainage and controlling erosion, subject to the ENGINEER'S approval.
3. Remove only those shrubs and grasses that must be removed for construction.
Protect the remainder to preserve their erosion-control value.
B. Control Measures: Apply meas ures to control erosion and to minimize the siltation of the existing waterways, and natural ponding areas. Such measures include, but are not limited to, the use of berms, baled straw silt barriers, gravel or crushed stone, mulch, slope drains, and other methods.
31 05 03-6
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Install erosion and sediment control practices where shown and according to applicable standards, codes, and specifications. The practices will be maintained in effective working condition during construction and until the drainage area has been permanently stabilized.
2. Temporary measures will be coordinated with the construction of permanent drainage facilities and other Work to the extent practicable to assure economical, effective, and continuous erosion and siltation control.
3. CONTRACTOR will provide special care in areas with steep slopes. Disturbance of vegetation will be kept to a minimum to maintain stability.
4. After stabilization, remove all straw bale dikes, debris, etc., from the site.
C. Dust Control:
1. Prevent blowing and movement of dust from exposed soil surfaces and access roads to reduce on- and off-site damage and health hazards.
2. Control may be achieved by irrigation in which the site is sprinkled with water until the surface is moist.
3. Repeat the process as needed.
D. Failure to Comply: In the event CONTRACTOR repeatedly fails to satisfactorily control erosion and siltation, the CITY reserves the right to employ outside assistance or to use its own forces to provide the corrective measures indicated. The cost of such work, plus engineering costs, will be deducted from monies due CONTRACTOR.
3.3 DEWATERING
A. General:
1. Continuously control all water during the course of construction, including surface water and ground water, to prevent any damage to any excavation or to the construction activities occurring within those excavations.
2. Maintain all dewatering systems full time (24-hours/day) during the entire time the excavation is open. Do not shut down dewatering systems at night, on weekends or on holidays, or any other time the excavation is open.
3. Each excavation will be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure to be built, or the pipe to be installed therein is inspected by the ENGINEER and backfill operations have been completed.
4. Provide a dequate alarm, monitoring and back -up systems for all dewatering systems to maintain control of all water during all times any excavation is open.
B. Surface Water:
1. Provide and maintain adequate drainage and dewatering system to prevent surface water from ent ering excavations and to remove and dispose of all rainwater entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the Work.
2. Keep the different working areas on the site free of surface water at all times.
Special care will be taken to eliminate depressions th at could serve as mosquito pools.
3. The diversion and removal of surface water will be performed in a manner that will prevent the accumulation of water behind temporary structures or at any other locations within the construction area where it may be detrimental.
C. Ground Water:
31 05 03-7
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
1. Provide, operate an d maintain dewatering system to permit excavation and subsequent construction activities in a dry, safe environment.
2. System shall be of sufficient size and capacity to maintain groundwater level a minimum of 2 feet below the lowest point of excavation.
3. Contractor shall make an assessment of the potential for dewatering induced settlement of surrounding soils and structures. Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment and facilities, including re -injection wells, cutoff walls, infiltration trenches, etc, to prevent damage to adjacent structures.
D. Disposal of water:
1. Disposal of discharge water shall conform to any and all applicable permit requirements.
3.4 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Trench Support
1. Provide, install and maintain trench shields for all trench excavations for which trench shields are required (at a minimum, as required by OSHA).
2. Follow all OSHA guidelines and other applicable laws and ordinances.
3. Elevation of Bottom:
a. Excavation of earth material below the bottom of a shield will not exceed the limits established by ordinances, codes, laws and regulations. b. When using a shield for pipe installation, the bottom of the shield will not extend below the mid-diameter of installed pipe at any time.
c. When using a shield for the installation of structures, the bottom of the shield shall not extend below the top of the bedding for the structures.
4. Moving Shield: When a shield is removed or moved ahead, extreme care will be taken to prevent the movement of pipe or structures or the disturbance of th e bedding for pipe or structures. Pipe or structures that are disturbed are to be removed and reinstalled as specified.
B. Below Grade Structure Excavation Support
1. Provide, install and maintain excavation support systems for all structural excavations where excavation support is required (at a minimum, as required by OHSA).
2. Follow all OSHA guidelines and other applicable laws and ordinances.
3. Prepare excavation support plan addressing the following topics:
a. Details of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisio ns for worker protection from the hazards of caving ground
b. Design assumptions and calculations
c. Methods and sequencing of installing excavation support d. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated materials e. Minimum lateral distance from the crest of slopes fo r vehicles, equipment, and materials
f. Location of vertical and horizontal monitoring points on structures and recommended frequency of monitoring for excavation support system stability and performance
4. Design of excavation support systems and excavation sup port plan shall be prepared by a civil or structural engineer registered in the state in which the system is installed.
31 05 03-8
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
a. Excavation support system shall consist of h -pile and lagging, sheet piles, or other reliable method of excavation support.
b. The use of below-ground tiebacks is allowed, however, Contractor is responsible for locating and avoiding potential conflicts with existing utilities in the area in which the tie-backs are installed. All tiebacks shall be further than 3 feet from any conflicting utility. Tiebacks shall not use existing structures for support.
C. Removal of Excavation Support
1. Completely remove all excavation support unless ENGINEER specifically allows requested excavation support to remain in place after backfill.
2. Remove all excavation support in a manner that will maintain support as excavation is backfilled and will not leave voids in the backfill.
3.5 EXCAVATION
A. General:
1. Material removed: Excavations include earth, sand, clay, gravel, hardpan, boulders, rock, pavements, rubbish, and all other materials within the excavation limits.
2. Excavations for structures and pipelines will be open excavations. Provide excavation protection system(s) required by ordinances, codes, law s, and regulations to prevent injury to workmen and to prevent damage to new and existing structures or pipelines. Unless shown or specified otherwise, protection system(s) will be utilized under the following conditions. a. Excavation Less Than 5 feet deep: Excavations in stable rock or in soil conditions where there is no potential for a cave-in may be made with vertical sides. Under all other conditions, excavations will be sloped and benched, shielded, or shored and braced.
b. Excavations More Than 5 feet deep: Excavations in stable rock where there is no potential for a cave -in may be made with vertical sides. Under all other conditions, excavations will be sloped and benched, shielded or shored and braced.
c. Excavation protection system(s) will be installed and maintained in accordance with the excavation plan submitted.
3. CONTRACTOR shall be made aware of the specific exc avation support suggestions detailed in the Geotechnical report.
B. Structural Excavation:
1. The elevation of the bottom of footings shown is approximate only. ENGINEER may order such changes in d imensions and elevations as may be required to secure a satisfactory footing.
2. Hand-trim all structure excavations to permit the placing of full widths and lengths of footings on horizontal beds. Rounded and undercut edges will not be permitted.
3. Excavations shall allow for aggregate base, forms, working space, installation of shoring or bracing or the safe sloping of banks.
C. Pipe Trench Excavation:
1. No more than 100 feet of trench may be opened in advance of pipe laying.
2. Minimize trench width to the greatest extent practical but conform to the following:
3. Sufficient to provide room for installing, jointing , and inspecting piping, but in no case wider at top of pipe than pipe barrel outside diameter plus 3 feet.
4. Enlargements at pipe joints may be made, if required, and approved by ENGINEER.
31 05 03-9
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
5. Sufficient for shoring and bracing, or shielding and dewatering.
6. Sufficient to allow thorough compaction of backfill adjacent to bottom half of pipe.
7. Depth of trench will be as shown. If required and approved by ENGINEER, depths may be revised.
D. Subgrades:
1. Subgrades for roadways, structures and trench bottoms shall be firm, dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; free from mud, mu ck, and other soft or unsuitable materials; and remain firm and intact under all construction operations.
2. Subgrades that are otherwise solid, but which become soft or mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with select fill.
3. The fi nished elevation of stabilized subgrades shall not be above subgrade elevations shown.
E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials in approved areas, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as specified hereinafter.
F. Unauthorized Excavation:
1. All excavation outside the lines and grades shown, and which is not approved by ENGINEER, together with the removal and disposal of the associated material is at the CONTRACTOR'S expense.
2. Unauthorized excavations shall be filled and compacted with select fill by the CONTRACTOR at his expense.
3.6 PLACEMENT OF FILL AND BACKFILL
A. General:
1. Backfill excavations as promptly as Work permits, but not until completion of the following:
a. Acceptance by the ENGINEER of construction below finish grade. b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording of locations of underground piping and ductwork.
c. Removal of concrete formwork.
d. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.
e. Removal of trash and debris.
2. Remove and replace with approved fill material, as specified, fill containing organic materials or other unacceptable material.
3. Compact all fill and backfill as specified in Subsection 3.7.
B. Structural Backfill:
1. Select fill shall be placed as structural backfill where shown on the Drawings or indicated herein.
2. Constraints:
a. Backfill water-holding basins or structures only af ter satisfactory leakage tests have been conducted as specified in Sections Concrete and Precast Concrete. b. No backfill or fill material shall be placed when free water is standing on the surface of the area.
31 05 03-10
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
c. No compaction of fill will be permitted with fre e water on any portion of the fill to be compacted.
d. No fill shall be placed or compacted in a frozen condition or on top of frozen material.
e. Any fill containing organic materials or other unacceptable material previously described shall be removed and repl aced with approved fill material prior to compaction.
3. Levels of backfill against concrete walls are not to differ by more than 2 feet on either side of walls, unless walls are adequately braced, or all floor framing is in place up to and including grade level slabs.
4. Wherever a pipe passes through a structure backfill, the structure backfill shall be placed and compacted to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated.
C. Backfill in Pipe Trenches:
1. Pipeline trenches may be backfilled prior to pressure testing, but no structure shall be constructed over any pipeline until it has been tested.
2. Unless otherwise shown, place all pipe on a minimum 6 inches thick layer of Granular Bedding. The bedding shall extend 12 inches above the top of the pipe.
3. Install bedding as follows:
a. Spread bedding and grade to provide a uniform and continuous support beneath the pipe at all points between bell holes or pipe joints. b. After each pipe section is placed, deposit and c ompact sufficient bedding material under and around each side of the pipe to hold the pipe in proper position and to maintain alignment during subsequent pipe jointing and bedding operations.
c. Bedding material shall be deposited and compacted uniformly and simultaneously on each side of the pipe to prevent lateral displacement. Then place and compact the bedding material to an elevation 12 inches above the top of pipe.
4. Above the level of bedding, place Select or Common Fill, as specified elsewhere in these specifications.
5. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM):
a. When CLSM pipe zone material is indicated, the pipe may be supported above the trench floor on pea gravel bags or sandbag supports. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate to the ENGINE ER, 7 days prior to full pipeline backfill installation, placement of CLSM as described below. This demonstration shall occur on the first 300 feet of trench , The CLSM pipe zone material shall be installed as indicated.
1) Bedding and Embedment: Place and compact CLSM pipe zone material using the following techniques:
a) Following placement and anchoring of the pipe, remove all loose soil from trench walls and floor. Remove any unstable soil at the top of the trench which might fall into the trench during placement of the CLSM. b) Deliver the CLSM to the trench in ready mix trucks or traveling pug mill and utilize pumps or chutes to place the CLSM in the trench. Direct CLSM to one side of the pipe, taking care not to displace the pipe at any time.
Continue placing CLSM on one side of the pipe until CLSM has gone under the pipe and up the other side to a depth of 6 inches above the pipe bottom. Use at least two handheld vibrators to continuously liquefy and
31 05 03-11
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
move CLSM into all voids. Adjust water in mixture to maintain fluid consistency but maintain strength requirements. Continue placing CLSM on both sides of the pipe continuously using two vibrators for every 30 feet of pipe run.
c) Maintain stability of pipe and conduit throughout CLSM placement and curing. CLSM will lik ely require placement in lifts to prevent pipe flotation. No movement of the pipe caused by flotation will be allowed.
If any movement occurs, the CLSM material shall be removed and/or repaired in full conformance with these Contract Documents at no additional cost to the CITY. Remove all sloughed material or other debris from top of previously placed CLSM.
d) CLSM shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 4 hours prior to placing each lift as well as trench zone material. A smaller cure period will be allowed if it can be demonstrated to the ENGINEER that it will support the individual lift or trench zone material. The CLSM shall be sufficiently strong to support trench backfill material and the compaction effort required to achieve the specified compaction.
D. Marking Tape:
1. Continuously install marking tape along centerline of all buried piping, on top of last lift of pipe zone material unless otherwise shown. Coordinate with piping installation drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. a. Metallic Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and waterlines. Join ends with clips provided by the manufacturer.
b. Plastic Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping.
E. Pipe-Locating Wire:
1. Pipe-locating wire shall be provided for the entire length of all nonmetallic pipelines and shall be continuous around restrained joint sections.
2. Install pipe locating wire by strapping to the top of the pipe with PVC tape, polyethylene-backed tape, or tie locks. Test pipe locating wire with pipe locator equipment prior to final acceptance.
3. Stub the pipe -locating wire up inside each valve box or flush -mounted Type C corrosion monitoring stations. Sufficient excess length shall be provided at terminal connections to allow continuation of the pipe -locating wire to the term inal connection.
4. Wire splices shall be made with compression fittings or soldering; wrapped with Tac-Tape, Aqua -Seal, or equal, and wrapped with electrical tape. Prevent bare copper wire from contacting metallic appurtenances including, but not limited to, pipe, buried valves, or fittings.
F. Resume backfilling operations using the techniques described above to complete the pipe zone backfill. ENGINEER will approve the pipe zone backfill prior to initiating the trench zone backfill.
G. Embankments:
1. To the maximum extent available, use excess earth obtained from structure and trench excavations for construction of embankments. Obtain additional material from borrow pits, if such pits are shown, otherwise obtain additional material from offsite sources as necessary.
31 05 03-12
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Strip, scarify, level and roll the subgrade so that surface materials of the subgrade will be compact and well bonded with the first layer of the embankment.
3. Wherever a pipe is to pass through a fill or embankment, place and compact the fill or embankment material to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated.
H. Crushed Stone:
1. Place where shown on the Drawings, to the limits shown.
2. Place in hand-tamped lifts, not to exceed 6 inches.
I. Replacement of Unacceptable Excavated Materials: In cases where over-excavation for the replacement of unacceptable soil materials is required, backfill the excavation to the required subgrade with select backfill material and thoroughly compacted.
3.7 COMPACTION
A. General:
1. Compaction by inundation with water will not be permitted.
2. Provide equipment capable of discing, aerating, and mixing the soil to ensure reasonable uniformity of moisture content throughout the material and to reduce the moisture content by air drying, if necessary.
3. Perform compaction with equipment suitable for the type of fill material being placed. Select equipment that is capable of providing the minimum density required by these Specifications. Use hand-operated compacting equipment within a distance of 3 feet from the wall of any completed below grade structure. Between 3 feet and 12 feet adjacent to below grade structures, compaction may be completed with lightweight compaction equipment weighing less than 15,000 pounds. Beyond 12 feet adjacent to below grade structures, there are no equipment weight restrictions.
Provide equipment that is capable of compacting in restricted areas next to structures and around piping.
B. Compaction Density Requirements: The degree of compaction required for several types of fill is listed below. Moistened or aerated material as necessary to provide the moisture content specified, or if not specified, that will facilitate obtaining the specified compaction.
MATERIAL Required
Minimum Density
(ASTM D 1557)
Maximum
Uncompacted Lift*
Common Fill/Prepared Subgrade: 90% 8 inches
Select Fill/Trench Backfill above pipe:
More than 2 feet below final grade 90% 8 inches
Less than 2 feet below final grade 95% 8 inches
Aggregate Base: 95% 8 inches
Granular Bedding 90% 6 inches
Sand 90% 6 inches
Gravel Surfacing 95% 6 inches
31 05 03-13
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
*Where large areas of backfill allow for use of large, heavy equipment, ENGINEER may, at their option, allow uncompacted lifts up to 12 inches.
C. Moisture Content: All fill and backfill shall be prepared and thoroughly mixed to achieve optimum moisture content, ±3%, with the following exception: On site clayey soils optimum to +3%.
D. Testing: Testing will be as specified under Paragraph 3.10, “Field Quality Control”.
3.8 GRADING
A. General:
1. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas.
2. Smooth subgrade surfaces within specified tolerances, and compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades.
B. Adjacent to Structures: Grade areas adjacent to structures to drain away from structures (including masonry fences) and to prevent ponding.
C. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1 inch above or below the required subgrade elevation.
D. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, and grade and cross-section with finish surface not more than ½ inch above or below the required subgrade elevation.
E. Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of ½ inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
F. Special Areas: In turfed areas or areas covered with gravel, stone, wood chips, or other special cover, grade to within not more than 1 inch above or below the required subgrade elevations.
G. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification.
Area Required Minimum Density
(ASTM D 1557)
Beneath Treatment Structures and
Buildings
95%
Beneath Pavement 90%
Landscaped and other areas 85%
3.9 PAVEMENT BASE COURSE
A. Shoulders:
1. Place shoulders along edges of base course to prevent lateral movement.
31 05 03-14
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
2. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each base course layer.
3. Compact and roll at least a 12 -inch width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of base course.
B. Placing:
1. Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness.
2. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting base material during placement operations.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Testing by a testing laboratory of materials, testing for moisture content during placement and compaction of fill materials, and of compaction requirements for compliance with technical requirements of the Specifications.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall retain one or more independent testing agencies to perform all quality control testing required for all materials except portland cement concrete. The required testing is for soil, aggregates, imported gravel, aggregate base, asphalt concrete, and CLSM. Each independent testing agency shall perform the testing under the supervision of an engineer registered in California. Technicians performing the testing shall be certified to operate the equipment and have at least 1 full year of experience in the type of tests being performed.
C. A Quality Control Plan shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER at least 30 days before field testing is required. It shall include the names, addresses, and phone number of the companies, the major personnel that will be involved, and resumes of the individuals that will be supervising and performing the tests. Copies of certificates held by the companies and the testing personnel shall be included.
D. CONTRACTOR’s independent testing agency shall perform all field and laboratory testing as described in these Specifications. Test shall include specific gravity, sand equivalent, durability, abrasion resistance, soundn ess, gradation, compaction curves, lab and field moisture contents, compressive strength, and field density. Other tests shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR’s independent testing agency as may be required to meet the Specifications. Mix design testing for portland cement concrete, CLSM, and asphalt concrete shall also be performed by the CONTRACTOR. Field testing for portland cement concrete will be performed by the ENGINEER.
E. CONTRACTOR shall schedule all lab testing so that materials arriving at the site have been approved by the ENGINEER for use on the Project.
F. All lab tests shall be performed on Samples obtained from the source of actual material that will be used on the Project. No test results more than 90 days old shall be submitted for review.
G. The location of field density tests shall be determined by the ENGINEER.
H. Frequency of tests: Frequency will be not less than as follows:
1. For trenches:
31 05 03-15
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
a. In open fields: 2 locations every 1,000 linear feet, for each layer b. Along dirt, gravel, or paved roads or off traveled right-of-way: 2 locations every 500 linear feet, for each layer
c. Crossing roads: 2 locations along each crossing, for each layer
2. For structural backfill: 1 every 50 cubic yards.
3. In embankment or fill: 1 every 200 cubic yards.
4. Base material: 1 every 50 cubic yards.
5. Footing Subgrade: 1 every 50 linear feet, for each layer.
6. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: 1 every 500 square feet, but in no case less than 3 tests, for each layer.
I. The ENGINEER may modify the frequency or spacing of tests to p rovide for testing at specific structures or locations where the ENGINEER deems additional testing is required. The CONTRACTOR shall perform such additional testing up to 10% above the frequency and total number of tests specified at no additional cost to the CITY.
J. Verbal and hand -written test results shall be provided to the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR immediately following the field testing. Written test data sheets shall be provided to the ENGINEER not more than 12 hours following completion of the field test. Typed lab test results shall be provided to the ENGINEER not more than 7 calendar days following completion of the tests . However, the results must be reviewed and approved by the ENGINEER prior to placing the material in the trenches or incorporating it in the Work.
A. Any location where a failing test occurs shall be recompacted and retested until a passing test is obtained. Specified testing values are minimums and no tests shall be accepted below the specified minimums. No material shall be placed over the failing test area until the failing material is recompacted and a passing test is obtained and the area is approved by the ENGINEER. The limits of the failing test shall be assumed to be halfway between the failing location and the nearest passing loca tion. Additional tests may be taken to determine the limits of unsatisfactory compaction.
B. At the first of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall provide to the ENGINEER a typed summary of all tests performed for the previous month including test location by station, depth below finished grade, material tested, wet density, moisture content, dry density, maximum density curve used, and percent relative compaction. Lab test results shall also be included in the monthly report with clear description of material tested, intended use on the Project, and a statement of compliance or noncompliance with the Project Specifications.
C. Any material which does not meet the Specifications shall be removed from the site and replaced with material in compliance.
D. Material which has been softened or modified prior to placing the overlying lift shall be removed down to material which is in compliance.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Material removed from the excavations that does not conform to the requirements for fill or is in excess of that required for backfill shall be hauled away from the Work site
31 05 03-16
Earthwork
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
and disposed of by CONTRACTOR in compliance with ordinances, codes, laws and regulations at no additional cost to the CITY.
B. Any uncontaminated material can be hauled to 1800 Booth Road. ++ END OF SECTION ++
31 11 03-1
Site Preparation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 31 11 03
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Interfering or Objectionable Material: Trash, rubbish, and junk; vegetation and other organic matter, whether alive, dead, or decaying; topsoil.
B. Clearing: Removal of interfering or objectionable material lying on or protruding above ground surface.
C. Grubbing: Removal of vegetation and other organic matter including stumps, buried logs, and roots greater than 0.5 inch caliper to a depth of 6 inches below subgrade.
D. Stripping: Removal of topsoil remaining after applicable scalping is completed.
E. Project Limits: Areas, as shown or specified, within which Work is to be performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Clear, grub, and strip areas actually needed for waste dispo sal, borrow, or site improvements within limits shown or specified.
B. Do not injure or deface vegetation that is not designated for removal.
3.2 LIMITS
A. As follows, but not to extend beyond Project limits.
1. Excavation 5 feet beyond top of cut slopes.
2. Trench Excavation: 4 feet from trench centerline, regardless of actual trench width.
3. Waste Disposal:
a. Clearing: 5 feet beyond perimeter.
b. Scalping and Stripping: Not required.
c. Grubbing: Around perimeter as necessary for neat finished appearance.
4. Structures: 5 feet outside of new structures.
5. Roadways: Clearing , grubbing and stripping 50 feet from centerline.
6. Overhead Utilities:
a. Clearing and Grubbing: Entire width of easements and rights-of-way. b. Scalping and Stripping: Wherever grading is required.
7. Other Areas: As shown.
31 11 03-2
Site Preparation
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
B. Remove rubbish, trash, and junk from entire area within Project limits.
3.3 CLEARING
A. Clear areas within limits shown or specified.
B. Fell trees so that they fall away from facilities and vegetation not designated for removal.
C. Cut stumps not designated for grubbing flush with ground surface.
D. Cut off shrubs, brush, weeds, and grasses to within 2 inches of ground surface.
3.4 GRUBBING
A. Grub areas within limits shown or specified.
3.5 STRIPPING
A. Do not remove topsoil until after scalping is completed.
B. Strip areas within limits to minimum depths shown or specified. Do not remove subsoil with topsoil.
3.6 DISPOSAL
A. Clearing and Grubbing Debris: Dispose of debris offsite.
B. Strippings:
1. Dispose of strippings that are unsuitable for topsoil or that exceed quantity required for topsoil offsite or approved by ENGINEER.
2. Stockpile topsoil in sufficient quantity to meet Project needs. Dispose of excess strippings as specified for clearing and grubbing.
++ END OF SECTION ++
32 12 16-1
Asphalt Concrete Pavement
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Information Submittals:
1. Asphalt Concrete Mix Formula:
a. Submit minimum of 15 days prior to start of production. b. Submittal to include the following information:
1) Gradation and portion for each aggregate constituent used in mixture to produce a single gradation of aggregate within specified limits. 2) Bulk specific gravity for each aggregate constituent. 3) Measured maximum specific gravity of mix at optimum asphalt conte nt determined in accordance with ASTM D2041.
4) Percent of asphalt lost due to absorption by aggregate. 5) Percentage of asphalt cement, to nearest 0.1 percent, to be added to mixture. 6) Optimum mixing temperature.
7) Optimum compaction temperature.
8) Temperature-viscosity curve of asphalt cement to be used.
2. Test Report for Asphalt Cement:
a. Submit minimum 10 days prior to start of production. b. Show appropriate test method(s) for each material and the test results.
3. Statement of qualification for independent testing laboratory.
4. Test Results:
a. Mix design.
b. Asphalt concrete core.
c. Gradation and asphalt content of uncompacted mix.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Independent Testing Laboratory: In accordance with ASTM E329.
2. Asphalt concrete mix formula shall be p repared by approved certified independent laboratory under the supervision of a certified asphalt technician.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Temperature: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when ground temperature is lower than 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or air temperature is lower than 4 degrees C (40 degrees F). Measure ground and air temperature in shaded areas away from heat sources or wet surfaces.
B. Moisture: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when application surface is wet.
32 12 16-2
Asphalt Concrete Pavement
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Material: Conform to the following specification:
1. Asphalt Material shall be a hot mix asphalt concrete, consisting of a mixture of mineral aggre gate and paving asphalt conforming to Section 92 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, PG 64-10.
B. Seal Coat: Conform to the following specification:
1. Seal coat material shall be conforming to Section 37 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Traffic Control:
1. In accordance with all applicable specification sections and laws.
2. Minimize inconvenience to traffic, but keep vehicles off freshly treated or paved surfaces to avoid pickup and tracking of asphalt.
B. Driveways: Repave driveways from which pavement was removed. Leave driveways in as good or better condition than before start of construction.
3.2 LINE AND GRADE
A. Provide and maintain intermediate control of line and grade, independent of underlying base, to meet finish surface grades and minimum thickness.
B. Shoulders: Construct to line, grade, and cross-section shown.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subgrade as specified.
B. Thoroughly coat edges of con tact surfaces with emulsified asphalt or asphalt cement prior to laying new pavement. Prevent staining of adjacent surfaces.
3.4 PAVEMENT APPLICATION
A. General: Place asphalt concrete mixture on approved, prepared base in conformance with this section.
B. Pavement Mix:
1. Prior to Paving:
a. Sweep primed surface free of dirt, dust, or other foreign matter. b. Patch holes in primed surface with asphalt concrete pavement mix.
2. Place asphalt concrete pavement mix in one single lift.
3. Total Compacted Thickness: 3 inches.
32 12 16-3
Asphalt Concrete Pavement
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
4. Apply such that meet lines are straight and edges are vertical.
5. Collect and dispose of segregated aggregate from raking process. Do not scatter material over finished surface.
6. After placement of pavement, seal meet line by painting a minimum of 150 millimeters (6 inches) on each side of joint with cut-back or emulsified asphalt.
Cover immediately with sand.
C. Compaction: Roll until roller marks are eliminated and density of 92 percent of measured maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D2041.
D. Tolerances:
1. General: Conduct measurements for conformity with crown and grade immediately after initial compression. Correct variations immediately by removal or addition of materials and by continuous rolling.
2. Completed Surface or Wearing Layer Smoothness:
a. Uniform texture, smooth, and uniform to crown and grade. b. Maximum Deviation: 1/8 inch from lower edge of a 3.6 -meter (12 -foot) straightedge, measured continuously parallel and at right angle to centerline. c. If surface of completed pavement deviates by more than twice sp ecified tolerances, remove and replace wearing surface.
3. Transverse Slope Maximum Deviation: 1/4 inch.
E. Seal Coat:
1. General: Apply seal coat of paving grade or emulsified asphalt to finished surface at longitudinal and transverse joints, joints at abutting pavements, areas where asphalt concrete was placed by hand, patched surfaces, and other areas as directed by ENGINEER.
2. Preparation:
a. Surfaces that are to be sealed shall be maintained free of holes, dry, and clean of dust and loose material.
b. Seal in dry weather and when temperature is above 2 degrees C (35 degrees F).
3. Application:
a. Fill cracks over 1.5 millimeters (1/16 inch) in width with asphalt -sand slurry or approved crack sealer prior to sealing.
b. When sealing patched surfaces and joints with exi sting pavements, extend minimum 150 millimeters (6 inches) beyond edges of patches.
++ END OF SECTION ++
32 12 16-4
Asphalt Concrete Pavement
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
32 31 13-1
Chain Link Fences and Gates
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
SECTION 32 31 13
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detailed information and specifications for materials, finishes, and dimensions.
B. Samples: Approximately 6 inches square, or 6 inches long of posts, rails, braces, fabric, wire, ties, and fittings.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.
2. Evidence of Supplier and installer qualifications.
1.2 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Complete necessary site preparation and grading before installing chain link fence and gates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Match style, finish, and color of each fence component with that of other fence components.
2.2 CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. PVC-coated galvanized fabric conforming to ASTM F668, Class 1 or 29.
1. Color: Black.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Colorbond Corp., Raritan, NJ; Colorbond II.
b. Cyclone Fence, United States Steel, Chicago, IL; Cyclone Color Fence System.
B. Height: 72 inches, unless otherwise shown.
C. Wire Gauge: No. 9.
D. Pattern: 2-inch diamond-mesh.
E. Diamond Count: Manufacturer's standard and consistent for fabric furnished of same height.
F. Loops of Knuckled Selvages: Closed or nearly closed with space not exceeding diameter of wire.
32 31 13-2
Chain Link Fences and Gates
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET
G. Wires of Twisted Selvages:
1. Twisted in a closed helix three full turns.
2. Cut at an angle to provide sharp barbs that extend minimum 1/4-inch beyond twist.
H. Privacy Slats, if called for on Drawings:
1. HDPE or PVC Top Lock slats sized for No. 9 gauge 2 -inch mesh, approximately 1 3/32-inches wide.
2. Length to match the fabric height minus 2 inches.
3. Color selected by OWNER.
2.3 POSTS
A. General:
1. Strength and Stiffness Requirements: ASTM F669, Heavy Industrial Fence, except as modified in this section.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM F1083.
3. Roll-Formed Steel Shapes: Roll-formed from ASTM A570, Grade 45, steel.
4. Protective Coatings:
a. Zinc Coating: ASTM F1234, Type A external and internal coating.
5. Color Coating: ASTM F1043, minimum 10 mils thickness over zinc coating to match color of chain link fabric.
B. Line Posts:
1. Steel Pipe:
a. Outside Diameter: 2.375-inch.
b. Weight: 3.65 pounds per foot.
2. Roll-Formed Steel C Shape:
a. Outside Dimensions: 2.25-inch by 1.625-inch.
b. Weight: 2.70 pounds per foot.
3. Steel H-Section:
a. Outside Dimensions: 2.25-inch by 1.70-inch.
b. Weight: 3.26 pounds per foot.
C. End, Corner, Angle, and Pull Posts:
1. Steel Pipe:
a. Outside Diameter: 2.875-inch.
b. Weight: 5.79 pounds per foot.
D. Posts for Removable Fence Panels: As specified for end, corner, angle, and pull posts.
E. Posts for Swing Gates:
1. Material: ASTM F1043 Group IA ASTM F1083 schedule 40 pipe.
2. Gate Post Size per ASTM F900:
For gate fabric height up to and including 6 feet
Gate Leaf Width Post Outside Diameter
Up to 4 feet 2.375-inch
Over 4 feet to 10 feet 2.875-inch
Over 10 feet to 18 feet 4.0-inch
For gate fabric height over 6 feet to 12 feet
Up to 6 feet 2.875-inch
32 31 13-3
Chain Link Fences and Gates
Pump Station 26 Improvement Project
City of Roseville December 2022
WWE Project: 21-060 BID SET